Today’s News May 16, 2015

  • Guest Post: How Big Government Kills The American Dream

    Authored by U.S. Rep. Jaime Herrera Beutler of Camas, Clark County, originally posted at The Seattle Times,

    Last week, Sen. Elizabeth Warren, D-Mass., and New York Mayor Bill de Blasio published their prescription for reviving the American dream. They are right to focus on the dream. They are wrong in their understanding of American history and the role government can play in restoring and fostering the dream.

    In an 872-word argument titled “How to revive the American dream,” the words “free” or “freedom” never appear. That’s a clue.

    They open with a chilling refrain: Opportunity for success for most Americans is hopeless. All but the rich are falling behind because the “game is rigged.” Their diagnosis: You can’t improve your situation by your own talents or effort. Their prescription: Don’t leave freedom in the hands of citizens. Only a massively larger central government, run by people like them, can help you.

    Respectfully, this has been the claim of every person in history who has ever sought to gain enormous power through government control over the daily lives of their fellow citizens.

    They say the American dream is nearly dead because the game is rigged. If so, your talent, hard work and dedication can’t help you, and your freedom to choose your own path in life isn’t worth much, is it?

    And if the situation is hopeless, the change has to be dramatic. “Bold” is their word. They aren’t trying to sell common-sense reforms. They are selling an entirely new American system that fundamentally changes the relationship between central government leaders and you. Thomas Jefferson wrote that the purpose of the government is to secure freedom. Warren and de Blasio’s government would take your freedom in order to protect you from freedom’s harmful effects.

    Their misreading of American history is frightening. The American system of free people and free markets created more opportunity and prosperity for more citizens than any economic system in human history. Most countries have tried to copy our economic model.

    Take China. Thirty years ago, the Chinese government abused and controlled every aspect of the lives of its impoverished people. The Chinese middle class did not exist. In the last two decades, the Chinese have moved from a totally government-controlled economy toward freer markets, and more than 300 million Chinese citizens now comfortably belong in the world’s middle class. Unfortunately, the Chinese government still allows egregious abuses of law and its people, but the old model was a complete disaster.

    The Warren and de Blasio answer for strengthening the American middle class would move us toward the old Chinese economic model. They propose having the government dictate wages, overtime, vacation and leave policies, child-care requirements, and how much men and women are paid. They would dictate tuition levels for colleges. While decrying cronyism, they want a central government empowered to decide which companies are “fair,” and only those would receive funding for research and development. According to them, rather than allowing a business to succeed — or fail — on its own merits, government should pick the winners and bail them out with the public’s money when they fail.

    They oppose free markets. Instead, they’d create “fair rules” in the marketplace. Let’s cut through the code words here. They don’t want you to be free to make economic decisions. Instead, they want the power to decide what is “fair” for you. Nowhere in their list of new government services and controls is any mention of a cost to us. We’re to believe only Bill Gates and a few of his friends would pay.

    Except we know that isn’t true. The cost of their policies would be paid in more debt, taxes and fewer jobs. Have they learned nothing from watching Greece?

    Warren and de Blasio aim their argument for a massive expansion of federal power at the goal of helping the middle class. The great American middle class was not created by government policies. Their prescription would crush working families and small business — the engine of the American dream.

    The debate here isn’t between a more powerful central government versus no government and a dog-eat-dog world where the strong eat the weak. A fair read of American history shows that wise government policies nurture an environment where the dream can grow through actions, such as funding of public infrastructure, scientific and technological research, and public education. And government regulation plays a necessary role in keeping America safe.

    To build their case that America today is in need of radical change, Warren and de Blasio make the incredible claim that America used to invest in our kids and in policies to build a strong middle class, but “we don’t anymore.” What are those government policies? Social Security, Medicare, free public education. We don’t invest in these policies anymore? Spending for these programs has risen from $195 billion in 1980 to just under $2 trillion today.

    If Warren and de Blasio limited their argument to the need for government assistance to help the poorest and weakest in our society, there wouldn’t be a debate. I would agree with that. But that is not their claim. They claim that a massive expansion of federal power would help the families in the middle. Their prescription requires middle America to surrender freedom. In exchange, they say government control would improve our situation in life more than exercising our own freedom will.

    Warren and de Blasio’s prescription is for killing the American dream rather than reviving it.



  • Only 22 Countries Have Never Been Invaded By Britain (For Now)

    While America may have troops in around 150 countries around the world, it still has not ‘officially’ invaded as many as Britain managed throughout its history… but there’s still time.

     

    Source: @MaxCRoser

    *  *  *

    Time to step up the American Empire game…



  • Birth Tourism: How 1000s Of Pregnant Chinese Women Visit The US To Give Birth (& Get A Passport)

    Submitted by Mike Krieger via Liberty Blitzkrieg blog,

    Did you know there exists a highly lucrative business in America that consists of helping pregnant Chinese women get into the U.S. merely to give birth and get their children passports? Yep, neither did I.

    From Bloomberg:

    Fiona He gave birth to her second child, a boy, on Jan. 24, 2015, at Pomona Valley Hospital in Southern California. The staff was friendly, the delivery uncomplicated, and the baby healthy. He, a citizen of China, left the hospital confident she had made the right decision to come to America to have her baby.

     

    She’d arrived in November as a customer of USA Happy Baby, one of an increasing number of agencies that bring pregnant Chinese women to the States. Like most of them, Happy Baby is a deluxe service that ushers the women through the visa process and cares for them before and after delivery.

     

    There are many reasons to have a baby in the U.S. The air is cleaner, the doctors generally are better, and pain medication is dispensed more readily. Couples can evade China’s one-child policy, because they don’t have to register the birth with local authorities. The main appeal of being a “birth tourist,” though, is that the newborn goes home with a U.S. passport. The 14th Amendment decrees that almost any child born on U.S. soil is automatically a citizen; the only exception is a child born to diplomats. He and her husband paid USA Happy Baby $50,000 to have an American son. If they had to, she says, they’d have paid more.

     

    A week later, five men from Homeland Security Investigations, the sheriff’s department, and the fire department arrived. At first He thought they’d come from the homeowners’ association. Then she saw the bulletproof vests and handguns. They showed her a search warrant. She recognized the translator from the previous visit. “Then they asked me a lot of questions, and I became nervous,” she says.

     

    The HSI agents told He she wasn’t in trouble. That turned out to be only sort of true. They were investigating the owners of USA Happy Baby—Dong and her husband, Michael Liu—for suspected tax evasion, money laundering, and visa fraud. Although it’s legal to travel to the U.S. to give birth, it’s illegal to lie about the purpose of a visit—or coach someone to do so. For two hours the agents gathered documents, including the family’s passports, and made copies of He’s e-mails and texts. “They took my son’s immunization record, even the paper I used to record his milk time,” she says.

     

    Homeland Security and the IRS have been investigating the growing business of “birth tourism,” which operates in a legal gray area, since last June. The industry is totally unregulated and mostly hidden. Fiona’s apartment was one of more than 30 baby safe houses that HSI agents and local law enforcement searched in Southern California that day in March. They came with translators and paramedics, almost 300 people in all. The investigators focused on three agencies—USA Happy Baby, You Win USA Vacation Resort, and Star Baby Care—using a confidential informant, undercover operations, and surveillance, according to three affidavits.

     

    No one knows the exact number of Chinese birth tourists or services catering to them. Online ads and accounts in the Chinese-language press suggest there could be hundreds, maybe thousands, of operators. A California association of these services called All American Mother Service Management Center claims 20,000 women from China gave birth in the U.S. in 2012 and about the same number in 2013. These figures are often cited by Chinese state media, but the center didn’t reply to a request for comment. The Center for Immigration Studies, an American organization that advocates limiting the scope of the 14th Amendment, estimates there could have been as many as 36,000 birth tourists from around the world in 2012.

     

    The U.S. and Canada are the only developed countries that grant birthright citizenship. For those who believe U.S. immigration policies are too generous, birth tourism has become a contentious issue. “It’s like somebody giving birth in your living room and saying they’re part of your family,” says Ira Mehlman, the spokesman for the Federation for American Immigration Reform.

     

    After the March raids, 29 Chinese mothers and relatives were designated material witnesses and ordered to stay in Southern California until the federal court decided they could leave. Fiona He moved from her apartment in Rancho Cucamonga to one in another part of the Inland Empire. “I want my children to have the best they can,” she says. “But I had no idea I would have this trouble. We didn’t hurt anyone. We just found an easy way to stay here to give birth. Is that wrong?

     

    If a woman says she’s traveling to give birth, the consular and customs officers may request proof that she can pay for her hospital stay. (The same would be asked of anybody seeking medical treatment in the U.S.) “Keep every single one of your invoices as evidence that you didn’t use the public charge,” Zhai says, referring to Medicaid. “If you have receipts with big sums, such as a watch worth tens of thousands, or a diamond ring, save those too.”

    The consular and customs officers “may” ask for proof?

    There’s a lot of money to be made in laundering Chinese money into America, as well as in getting Chinese citizens a green card or residency.



  • UK PM David Cameron Proclaims: It’s Not Enough To Follow The Law, You Must Love Big Brother

    Submitted by Mike Krieger via Liberty Blitzkrieg blog,

    It’s not just those domestic extremists and crazy “conspiracy theory” kooks who took serious issue with UK Prime Minister David Cameron’s recent overtly fascist language when it comes to freedom of expression in Great Britain. For example, in a post published today, the UK Independent describes the quote below as “the creepiest thing David Cameron has ever said.”

    Screen Shot 2015-05-14 at 11.52.20 AM

    This statement, and others like it, are a huge deal. This isn’t how the leader of a major civilized Western so-called “democracy” speaks to the citizenry. It is how a master talks to his slaves. How a ruler addresses his subjects. I think the following tweet by Glenn Greenwald earlier today sums up David Cameron’s attitude perfectly well:

    Those of us who are in disbelief over David Cameron’s recent language, don’t have to just point to the quote above. There’s a lot more to it than a simple quote. For example, the Guardian reports:

    The measures would give the police powers to apply to the high court for an order to limit the “harmful activities” of an extremist individual. The definition of harmful is to include a risk of public disorder, a risk of harassment, alarm or distress or creating a “threat to the functioning of democracy”.

    A “risk of public disorder,” or a “risk of harassment alarm or distress.” Think about that for a second. Pretty much 90% of all speech could be classified as posing a risk to all of those things. It’s basically banning any criticism the government doesn’t like. Truly remarkable. Now here’s how the magnificent “democracy” of Great Britain plans on dealing with such “extremists.”

    They would include a ban on broadcasting and a requirement to submit to the police in advance any proposed publication on the web and social media or in print. The bill will also contain plans for banning orders for extremist organizations which seek to undermine democracy or use hate speech in public places, but it will fall short of banning on the grounds of provoking hatred.

    Although I’m not a British citizen and have never lived in the UK, I have spent some time writing about the disturbing trends happening across the pond due to the historic, cultural, geopolitical and linguistic ties between the U.S. and Great Britain. I warned all about these dangerous trends last fall in the post, The UK’s Conservative Party Declares War on YouTube, Twitter, Free Speech and Common Sense. Here are a few excerpts:

    Teresa May wants to “ban non-violent extremist groups that fall short of the current threshold for being banned as terrorist-related organizations.” Think about that very closely. Essentially, she is saying non-violent groups that are currently not breaking any laws should be criminalized by creating new laws. Once this process begins, it will continue to be expanded and expanded until pretty much every form of expression other than government propaganda will be banned.

     

    Secondly, she notes that the new laws are necessary to combat groups that undertake activities “for the purpose of overthrowing democracy.” Considering that the U.S. government changes the meanings of words at a moment’s notice, such as claiming that “imminent” doesn’t really mean “imminent,” I argue that an official government definition of democracy is necessary. Moreover, what if the UK is like the U.S., a state that claims to be a democracy, but in reality is an oligarchy? What are the rules about calling for the removal of an oligarchy?

    Have fun mates.



  • Are You Ready For The Coming Debt Revolution?

    Submitted by Bill Bonner via Bonner & Partners,

    There is a specter haunting America… and all the developed nations of the world. It is the specter of a debt revolution.

    We left off yesterday talking about how the economy of the last 30 years – and especially that of the last six years – has favored the old over the young.

    “Rise up, ye young’uns,” we as much as said, “you have nothing to lose but your parents’ debts.”

    We showed how the value of U.S. corporate equity, mainly held by older people, had multiplied by 28 times since 1981.

    That was no honest bull market in stocks; it was a market sent soaring by an explosion of credit.

    But what did it do for young people whose only assets are their time and their youthful energy?

    Alas, the real economy has increased by only five times over the same period.

    A Grim and Menacing Specter

    And when you look more closely at work and wages, the specter grows grimmer and more menacing. Average hourly wages have barely budged in the last 30 years. And average household incomes have fallen – from $57,000 to $52,000 – in the 21st century.

    But as our fingers came to rest yesterday, there was one question hanging in the air, like the smoke from an exploded hand grenade: Why? Was this huge shift – of trillions of dollars of wealth from young working people to old asset holders – an accident?

    Was it just the maturing of a market economy in the electronic age? Was it because China took the capitalist road in 1979? Or because robots were competing with young people for jobs?

    Nope… on all three counts.

    First, old people, not young people, control government. Ultra-wealthy campaign funders like Sheldon Adelman and the Koch brothers were all born in the 1930s. The big money comes from wealthy geezers like these, eager to buy candidates early in the season when they are still relatively cheap. Old companies fund most Washington lobbyists, too. And old people decide elections: There are a lot of them… and they vote. They know where the money is.

     

    Second, the government – doing the bidding of old people – restricts competition, subsidizes well-entrenched industries, raises the cost of employing young people, and directs its bailouts, cheap credit, and contracts to the graybeards.

     

    Third, the credit-based money system increases the profits and prices of existing capital. It encourages borrowing and spending. This rewards the current generation while pushing the costs into the future.

    Grandparents Prey on Grandchildren

    None of this was an accident. None of it would have happened without the active intervention of the old folks, using the government to get what they could never have gotten honestly.

    This is not the same as saying they were completely aware of what they were doing and what consequences their actions would have. We doubt the Nixon administration had any idea what would happen after it tore up the Bretton Woods monetary system in 1971. It was behind the eight ball, fearing foreign governments would call away America’s gold.

    Few in the White House realized they had made such a calamitous mistake when the president ended the convertibility of the dollar into gold.

    And yet it created a world in which parents and grandparents could prey on their grandchildren… for the next 44 years. And it’s still not over.

    The new credit money – which could be borrowed into existence with no need for any savings or gold backing – was just what old people needed.

    We have estimated that it increased spending by about $33 trillion over and above what the old, gold-backed system would have allowed. That spending lifted the value of the geezers’ assets and increased their living standards. Meanwhile, the average 25-year-old reporting for work in 2015 can’t expect a single dollar more in real hourly wages than his father did in 1980.

    The total value of outstanding U.S. corporate bonds was 17% of GDP in 1981. Now, it’s $11.6 trillion – or 65% of GDP.

    What did corporations use that money for?

    Some of it went into capital investment that made companies more productive and more profitable. But much of it went where you would expect it to go: to buy back shares… to acquire other companies at inflated prices… and to pay off executives as the value of their share options went up!

    Who did this benefit? Mostly people over 50.

    Government debt is even worse. Unlike most personal debt, it doesn’t go to the grave with the person who borrowed it. It sticks around to burden the next generation – who got nothing from it.

    Federal debt in 1980 was less than $1 trillion. Today, it is $18 trillion. That money was used to fund federal programs – few of which provided any benefit to young people.

    An accident? A mistake? Partly. But old people must have known what they were doing.

    Their lobbyists asked for the spending. Their politicians voted for it. Their companies enjoyed the revenues. And they pocketed much of the money. When the economy threatened a correction, they demanded more credit on easier terms to keep the money flowing. And when their credit balloon popped in 2008, they whined to the feds to protect their ill-gotten gains.

    Honest capitalism? Not if they could prevent it.

    Creative destruction? Not on their watch.

    Pay for what you get? Not if they could put the bills on the next generation.

    Young people of the world, unite!



  • China Creates Perpetual Leverage Machine After Dropping Debt Directive

    China is in a tough spot and it’s starting to show up in what look like contradictory policy decisions. The problem — as discussed at length in “How China’s Banks Hide Trillions In Credit Risk” and in “China’s Shadow Banking Grinds To A Halt As Bad Debt Surges” — goes something like this. In the interest of curbing systemic risk and decreasing the percentage of TSF comprised of off-balance sheet financing, China has moved to rein in the shadow banking boom that helped fuel the country’s meteoric growth. The effort to deleverage a system laboring under some $28 trillion in debt is complicated by the fact that the export-driven economy is growing at the slowest pace in 6 years (and that’s if you believe the official numbers), a scenario which calls for some manner of stimulus. Unfortunately, the yuan’s dollar peg has served to further pressure China’s exports while rising capital outflows (plus an IMF SDR bid) make currency devaluation an undesirable tool for boosting the economy. Beijing has thus resorted to slashing policy rates, cutting the benchmark lending rate three times in six months and RRR twice this year (and they aren’t done yet). This of course flies in the face of attempts to deleverage the system. That is, lowering real interest rates encourages more leverage, not less, but Beijing has little choice. It must walk the tightrope, because at some point, the deceleration in economic growth will become so readily apparent that China will no longer be able to stick to the (likely) fabricated 7% output figure. 

    Consider the following graphics which do a good job of illustrating how China has too much leverage and not enough leverage at the same time. The first chart shows that credit creation in China far outstrips EM and G4 countries…

    …while the second graphic shows that the ratio of TSF to new bank loans is near one, meaning almost all of new credit creation is in the form of traditional loans suggesting the shadow banking complex (the engine that has helped drive expansion) has indeed ground to a halt…

    As we discussed on Thursday, the country’s local government debt dilemma is a microcosm of the challenges facing the broader economy. Local governments used shadow banking conduits to skirt borrowing limits, accumulating a massive pile of high-yield debt in the process. The total debt burden for these localities sums to around 35% of GDP and because a non-trivial portion carries yields that are much higher than traditional muni bonds, the debt servicing costs have become unbearable. To remedy the situation, Beijing is implementing a debt swap program which allows local governments to swap their high-yielding loans for long-term bonds with lower coupons. In order to create demand for the new issues, the PBoC is allowing banks that purchase the new bonds to post them as collateral for cash that can then be re-lent to the broader economy, presumably at a healthy spread. So while the program is designed to help local governments deleverage by cutting hundreds of billions from debt servicing costs, the PBoC’s move to allow the new LGBs to be pledged for cash by the purchasing banks, means that on net, the entire refi program will actually add leverage to the system as banks use the cash they receive from repoing their LGBs to make new loans.

    In the end, it’s the same dilemma: China is attempting to deleverage and re-leverage at the same time. 

    Local government bond supply is expected to come in at around CNY1.6 trillion for the year (that includes CNY1 trillion of new bonds issued in connection with the debt swap program and another CNY600 billion to fill budget gaps). While that’s four times last year’s issuance, the increase in supply is tolerable because it’s supposedly for a good cause. That is, the lion’s share of new supply is part of the debt swap program and will thus go towards helping issuing local governments reduce their debt service burden and thus deleverage. Of course, as we said above, these bonds ultimately end up creating more leverage when they’re pledged by the purchasing banks for cash that’s then re-lent, but we’ll focus just on the effect the program has on local government finances for now and if we take that narrow view, the refi effort should help. Unless of course the PBoC does something stupid like lift the ban on local governments accumulating the same type of off-balance sheet debt that got them into their current predicament. 

    Via WSJ:

    China is reversing course on a major effort to tackle its hefty local government debt problem, marking a setback for a priority reform aimed at getting its financial house in order.

     

    The move could provide the economy with some short-term help. But it restores a backdoor way that enabled local governments to load up on debt in recent years, providing a drag on growth at a time when Beijing is looking for ways to rekindle it.

     

    According to an announcement made Friday by the State Council, China’s cabinet, the authorities relaxed controls on the ability of local governments to raise money by allowing them to tap government-sponsored financing companies—the very entities that have been blamed for a rapid run-up in China’s local debt load over the past few years.

     

    The move undermines an October policy intended to prevent those financing firms from taking on new debt.

     

    It comes as China’s long push toward financial reform—part of its broader effort to make the economy rely less on big investments but more on consumer spending—increasingly bumps up against a more pressing national goal: boosting growth.

     

    The latest move comes as the world’s second-largest economy endures slower-than-expected growth. A barrage of monetary-easing measures since last year has proved insufficient to counter a real-estate downturn and flagging factory output…

     

    Beijing heavily restricts the ability of local governments to borrow. In response, local officials around China have created thousands of finance companies called local-government financing vehicles that can borrow on their behalf. Such borrowing—which totals about $4 trillion by some estimates—is responsible for one-quarter of the buildup in China’s overall domestic debt since 2008, according to analysts. The International

    Monetary Fund says China’s debt is growing more rapidly than debt in Japan, South Korea and the U.S. did before they tumbled into recessions.

     

    Under the rule issued in October, those local financing vehicles were barred from borrowing additional funds starting this year, as the government sought to close what it dubbed “the back door” for localities to borrow.

     

    Instead, all borrowing would be done by the local governments themselves and be appropriately disclosed and reflected in their budget plans. The purpose was to rein in runaway local-debt growth and make local borrowings more transparent.

     

    According to the latest directive, local financing firms can continue to get loans from banks to fund ongoing projects. If the local firms have trouble repaying their bank debts, the rule says, their loan contracts should be “renegotiated and extended.” 

    Here’s Deutsche Bank with more color:

    The Ministry of Finance (MoF), the PBoC, and CBRC issued a policy guideline on May 11 and loosened control on the financing of local government financing vehicles (LGFV). This policy guideline has been made public today. We take this as a significant policy easing signal. The growth slowdown in Q1 was partly due to a crackdown on LGFV financing by MoF and the State Council who issued the “document 43” guideline in late 2014. The new guideline will likely make “document 43” less effective. This development is in line with our expectation, and it is consistent with the pickup of fiscal spending in April (see our note China: April fiscal data show first sign of stimulus on May 15). It reinforces our view that growth may rebound slightly in H2. 

     

    The guideline released on May 11 focuses on the financing of ongoing LGFV projects. It specifies several issues, including: 1: Banks should not stop lending to ongoing projects which started before end of 2014. If the ongoing projects have trouble repaying banks, the loan contracts may be renegotiated and extended. (ZH: we discussed forced roll overs just yesterday; this is NPL ‘management’) 2: Encourage new financing through fund raising from private sources. For projects where financing is not sufficient, new financing should be included into local government budget and financed through government bonds. 3. Encourage spending in rural water projects, public housing, urban transportation projects. 4. Local governments now have more authority to spend fiscal funds flexibly before local government bonds are issued.

     

    Note what China has done. They justified the implementation of LTROs by pointing to the need to jumpstart the refinancing program for local government debt accumulated off-balance sheet. The LTRO program will have the effect of creating more leverage, as purchased LGBs are pledged for PBoC cash that’s then re-lent. The net increase in leverage could be justified by the hundreds of billions local governments will save on interest expense. Meanwhile, local governments would not be allowed to use LGFVs to take on more debt because after all, taking out off-balance sheet loans was what got them into trouble in the first place, so tapping those channels again while simultaneously participating in the debt swap program would render the entire refi effort useless. Now, Beijing has done a complete 180 and will not only allow, but encourage local governments to accumulate more of the very same type of debt they are now swapping, meaning that even as the newly-issued debt-swap bonds decrease local governments’ debt servicing costs, new financing via LGFVs will invariably carry higher rates just as it did before, meaning the whole program is a wash. 

    Actually it’s worse than that. Because as we noted above, inserting an LTRO program into the equation means that every new debt-swap bond ultimately ends up creating a new loan for the broader economy and now that local governments are free to go right back to accumulating the same high interest loans which necessitated the creation of the debt swap program in the first place, the end result is simply the original scenario (i.e. local governments gorging themselves on off-balance sheet financing) only with the addition of an LTRO program.

    Better (or worse) still, one is certainly left to wonder what stops Beijing from allowing newly-acquired off-balance sheet debt to be swapped for still more newly issued muni bonds. In other words, the current plan seems to be to segregate legacy high-yield loans from new LGFV financing, with the former eligible for the debt swap program and the latter ineligible. While the policy guidelines call for new LGFV loans to be rolled over by lenders in the event local governments get into trouble, it’s not clear what stops Beijing from simply saying that these loans are also eligible for the debt swap.

    Should that happen, local governments would be free to borrow cash from whoever will lend it, at whatever interest rate the lender wishes to charge, because they know that ultimately, these loans can be swapped for low yielding muni bonds which will then be pledged by banks for cash that is in turn used to make loans to individuals and businesses.

    And that, ladies and gentlemen, is how you create a perpetual leverage machine disguised as a deleveraging program.



  • Before You Buy That Rothko – How The CIA Covertly Nurtured Modern Art As A Cold War "Weapon"

    Submitted by Mike Krieger via Liberty Blitzkrieg blog, 

    For decades in art circles it was either a rumour or a joke, but now it is confirmed as a fact. The Central Intelligence Agency used American modern art – including the works of such artists as Jackson Pollock, Robert Motherwell, Willem de Kooning and Mark Rothko – as a weapon in the Cold War. In the manner of a Renaissance prince – except that it acted secretly – the CIA fostered and promoted American Abstract Expressionist painting around the world for more than 20 years.

     

    Because Abstract Expressionism was expensive to move around and exhibit, millionaires and museums were called into play. Pre-eminent among these was Nelson Rockefeller, whose mother had co-founded the Museum of Modern Art in New York. As president of what he called “Mummy’s museum”, Rockefeller was one of the biggest backers of Abstract Expressionism (which he called “free enterprise painting”). His museum was contracted to the Congress for Cultural Freedom to organise and curate most of its important art shows.

     

    The museum was also linked to the CIA by several other bridges. William Paley, the president of CBS broadcasting and a founding father of the CIA, sat on the members’ board of the museum’s International Program. John Hay Whitney, who had served in the agency’s wartime predecessor, the OSS, was its chairman. And Tom Braden, first chief of the CIA’s International Organisations Division, was executive secretary of the museum in 1949.

     

    – From the excellent Independent article published in 1995: Modern Art Was CIA ‘Weapon’

    Most of you will be aware of the oligarch bidding wars for high end art at recent auctions held by Christie’s and Sotheby’s. In fact, the feeding frenzy was so extreme, the top 10 lots accounted for almost $800 million alone. Some of these paintings are breathtakingly beautiful, such as Vincent Van Gogh’s, “L’Allée des Alyscamps.” Others, not so much. Such as this one by Mark Rothko, which sold for $46.5 million.

    Screen Shot 2015-05-14 at 10.17.39 AM

    Unsurprisingly, the paintings which seem to be least inspiring were by artists who were covertly pushed by the CIA in the 1950’s as part of its cold war strategy. Mark Rothko, for example, was born in the Russian Empire in 1903 (modern day Latvia) and ended up in America in 1913. Being a Russian artist in America made him the perfect CIA tool, and apparently his art served that purpose unbeknownst to him. The CIA program was originally set up in 1947, under the not so covert division called the Propaganda Assets Inventory. You really can’t make this up.

    In one of the most interesting articles I’ve ever read, we learn from the UK Independent in a 1995 article:

    For decades in art circles it was either a rumour or a joke, but now it is confirmed as a fact. The Central Intelligence Agency used American modern art – including the works of such artists as Jackson Pollock, Robert Motherwell, Willem de Kooning and Mark Rothko – as a weapon in the Cold War. In the manner of a Renaissance prince – except that it acted secretly – the CIA fostered and promoted American Abstract Expressionist painting around the world for more than 20 years.

     

    The connection is improbable. This was a period, in the 1950s and 1960s, when the great majority of Americans disliked or even despised modern art – President Truman summed up the popular view when he said: “If that’s art, then I’m a Hottentot.” As for the artists themselves, many were ex- communists barely acceptable in the America of the McCarthyite era, and certainly not the sort of people normally likely to receive US government backing.

     

    Why did the CIA support them? Because in the propaganda war with the Soviet Union, this new artistic movement could be held up as proof of the creativity, the intellectual freedom, and the cultural power of the US. Russian art, strapped into the communist ideological straitjacket, could not compete.

     

    The existence of this policy, rumored and disputed for many years, has now been confirmed for the first time by former CIA officials. Unknown to the artists, the new American art was secretly promoted under a policy known as the “long leash” – arrangements similar in some ways to the indirect CIA backing of the journal Encounter, edited by Stephen Spender.

     

    The decision to include culture and art in the US Cold War arsenal was taken as soon as the CIA was founded in 1947. Dismayed at the appeal communism still had for many intellectuals and artists in the West, the new agency set up a division, the Propaganda Assets Inventory, which at its peak could influence more than 800 newspapers, magazines and public information organisations. They joked that it was like a Wurlitzer jukebox: when the CIA pushed a button it could hear whatever tune it wanted playing across the world.

     

    This was the “long leash”. The centerpiece of the CIA campaign became the Congress for Cultural Freedom, a vast jamboree of intellectuals, writers, historians, poets, and artists which was set up with CIA funds in 1950 and run by a CIA agent. It was the beach-head from which culture could be defended against the attacks of Moscow and its “fellow travelers” in the West. At its height, it had offices in 35 countries and published more than two dozen magazines, including Encounter.

     

    The Congress for Cultural Freedom also gave the CIA the ideal front to promote its covert interest in Abstract Expressionism. It would be the official sponsor of touring exhibitions; its magazines would provide useful platforms for critics favourable to the new American painting; and no one, the artists included, would be any the wiser.

     

    Because Abstract Expressionism was expensive to move around and exhibit, millionaires and museums were called into play. Pre-eminent among these was Nelson Rockefeller, whose mother had co-founded the Museum of Modern Art in New York. As president of what he called “Mummy’s museum”, Rockefeller was one of the biggest backers of Abstract Expressionism (which he called “free enterprise painting”). His museum was contracted to the Congress for Cultural Freedom to organise and curate most of its important art shows.

     

    The museum was also linked to the CIA by several other bridges. William Paley, the president of CBS broadcasting and a founding father of the CIA, sat on the members’ board of the museum’s International Program. John Hay Whitney, who had served in the agency’s wartime predecessor, the OSS, was its chairman. And Tom Braden, first chief of the CIA’s International Organizations Division, was executive secretary of the museum in 1949.

    Modern art fame, like so much else, was brought to you by the CIA, mainstream media and the Rockefellers.

    He confirmed that his division had acted secretly because of the public hostility to the avant-garde: “It was very difficult to get Congress to go along with some of the things we wanted to do – send art abroad, send symphonies abroad, publish magazines abroad. That’s one of the reasons it had to be done covertly. It had to be a secret. In order to encourage openness we had to be secret.”

     

    In 1958 the touring exhibition “The New American Painting”, including works by Pollock, de Kooning, Motherwell and others, was on show in Paris. The Tate Gallery was keen to have it next, but could not afford to bring it over. Late in the day, an American millionaire and art lover, Julius Fleischmann, stepped in with the cash and the show was brought to London.

     

    The money that Fleischmann provided, however, was not his but the CIA’s. It came through a body called the Farfield Foundation, of which Fleischmann was president, but far from being a millionaire’s charitable arm, the foundation was a secret conduit for CIA funds.

     

    So, unknown to the Tate, the public or the artists, the exhibition was transferred to London at American taxpayers’ expense to serve subtle Cold War propaganda purposes.

    Of course, this stuff is still going on as much as ever, if not more so, and we can only begin to imagine how much modern American society is being covertly manipulated, duped and scammed by CIA propagandists. In case you need a few examples…

    U.S. Officials Panic About Seymour Hersh Story; Then Deny His Claims Using Jedi Mind Tricks

    Bankers for Hire – Former Bank of Baltimore CEO Admits He Worked for the CIA

    Revelations from the Torture Report – CIA Lies, Nazi Methods and the $81 Million No-Bid Torture Contract

    “Non-Official Cover” – Respected German Journalist Blows Whistle on How the CIA Controls the Media

    Remember Zero Dark Thirty? Turns Out it was a CIA Propaganda Film After All

    Of course, that’s just the very tip of the iceberg.

     



  • Artist's Impression Of Mainstream Media This Week

    “Distract”-gate…

     

     

    Source: Townhall



  • America's Pitiful "Choice"

    Submitted by Pater Tenebrarum via Acting-Man.com,

    A Look Ahead to the Next (S)election

    We realize we are jumping the gun a bit here, after all, it isn’t yet certain which candidates will win the primaries and become presidential candidates. However, we are taking an educated guess here, based on past elections and primaries. The Democratic Party usually has a relatively non-competitive field. One or two candidates are most likely to get the nomination from the outset. Left-of-field candidates like e.g. Bernie Sanders may take part, but have no chance anyway. Last time around, Hillary Clinton faced quite a formidable opponent in Barrack Obama, who undoubtedly was a far more appealing choice from the perspective of the Democratic base.

     

    Military_Industrial_Complex

    We present to you the likely winner of the next election …

     

    This time around, it is hard to see who could possibly stop Hillary, except perhaps herself. She is as scandal-ridden as a stray dog in the slums of Lagos is flee-ridden. So she might trip over one of her scandals, but not if the US mainstream press has anything to say about it. This is actually a bit of a word play in a sense, since she usually gets away with stuff precisely because the mainstream press isn’t saying much about it. We also know from occasionally watching the discourse on Democratic grassroots sites that they are all rooting for her this time (we admittedly can’t understand it, but there it is).

    With respect to the Republicans, it seems likely that the primaries will once again see a large field of candidates competing. The only somewhat offbeat choice on the menu is Rand Paul, who is a bit like a version of Ron Paul who has shed a lot of Ron in order to become “electable”. We cannot fault him for this strategy – if he were as fiercely principled as his father, he’d have no chance whatsoever. Rand Paul is the best chance the libertarian wing of the Republican party has had in a very long time indeed. We can be 100% sure though that he is not the preferred choice of the Republican establishment – the bland, war-mongering professional political clique that is always pushing for an equally bland candidate. To wit, Mitt Romney last time around – how much more uninteresting a candidate could they have possibly picked? So who is the Republican “establishment candidate” this time? Like Hillary, he is part of what America has instead of a nobility: Jeb Bush.

     

    Paul-Ran

    Rand Paul – the only possible candidate not utterly committed to statism and hence unlikely to get the nomination

    Photo credit: WTVQ

    The two major parties might as well be one party. Both are statist to the core, with only their emphasis slightly differing. The Democratic Party leans more toward welfare statism, the Republicans more toward warfare statism. A slight exception may be the small paleo-conservative and libertarian wings of the Republican Party, which would long have become a third party if the US were Europe. In the US the system is extremely stacked in favor of the two established parties though. It is extremely difficult to even get one’s candidates on a ballot as a third party – in fact, it is far easier for a non-establishment group to get onto the ballots in Russia (yes, allegedly “authoritarian” Russia) than it is in the US. Hence many of the more off-beat candidates are joining one of the two big parties, picking the one that seems ideologically the closest to their own views.

    So here is the most likely “choice” in the next presidential selection:

     

    Jeb-and-Hillary

    Hillary and Jeb

     

    We know one interest group in the US that is already rubbing its hands at the prospect of these two butting heads, because it will win no matter which one of them becomes president: the war racketeers, a.k.a. the military-industrial complex.

     

    war-is-hell-cartoon

    These guys are eagerly looking forward to a Hillary vs. Jeb election

     

    Hillary the Neo-Con

    Investigative journalist Glenn Greenwald, who writes for the “Intercept” these days, is philosophically sympathetic to the misnamed liberals, or let us rather say he isn’t averse to “progressive” ideology. We generally prefer to call it what it is, namely socialism. However, he has never once hesitated to criticize powerful Democrats with just as much verve as he displayed back when his main targets were G.W. Bush and Dick Cheney, and we like him for his consistency. If they are evil, he’s saying so. Anyway, as someone who is generally sympathetic to the Democrats, he may be uniquely qualified to provide us with a critical appraisal of Hillary. His assessment is certainly free of partisan bias as you will see below.

    The quote is taken from an interview Greenwald gave to GQ:

    Hillary is banal, corrupted, drained of vibrancy and passion. I mean, she’s been around forever, the Clinton circle. She’s a f*cking hawk and like a neocon, practically. She’s surrounded by all these sleazy money types who are just corrupting everything everywhere. But she’s going to be the ?rst female president, and women in America are going to be completely invested in her candidacy. Opposition to her is going to be depicted as misogynistic, like opposition to Obama has been depicted as racist. It’s going to be this completely symbolic messaging that’s going to overshadow the fact that she’ll do nothing but continue everything in pursuit of her own power. They’ll probably have a gay person after Hillary who’s just going to do the same thing.

     

    I hope this happens so badly, because I think it’ll be so instructive in that regard. It’ll prove the point. Americans love to mock the idea of monarchy, and yet we have our own de facto monarchy. I think what these leaks did is, they demonstrated that there really is this government that just is the kind of permanent government that doesn’t get affected by election choices and that isn’t in any way accountable to any sort of democratic transparency and just creates its own world off on its own.”

     (emphasis added)

    Greenwald is of course not the first person to notice that Hillary is not only surrounded by “sleazy money types”, but is a war-mongering harpy ideologically indistinguishable from the neo-cons. Note here that the latter are not only America’s biggest warmongers – among their philosophical/ideological heroes are people like Leo Strauss and Leon Trotsky (yes, the communist – Justin Raimondo has written extensively about their elitist and leftist roots), and they are in love with playing the role of “philosopher kings” who are constantly pulling the wool over the public’s eyes to get what they want. They are certainly not in favor of the free market. In fact, their position vis-a-vis the unwashed masses is that anything that keeps them docile is good, hence they support not only warfare statism, but welfare statism as well. Hillary fits right in, in every respect. Hell, even the New York Times has noticed.

     

    Clinton_072713

    Strident harpy Hillary

    Photo credit: AP

    Jeb Bush Still Likes the Iraq War

    We didn’t know very much about Jeb Bush, except for the fact that he’s surrounded himself with the usual neo-con advisors that seem to be the main choice of every Republican establishmentarian. However, he is not only rightly suspected of being indistinguishable from Hillary in the foreign policy department, he just proved that as long as he can somehow get a war, he will be all for it, no matter how idiotic the choice is – even in hindsight! He might as well have announced that his middle name is “stupid”. Here is a recent Reuters article on the topic:

    “Potential Republican presidential candidate Jeb Bush said he would have authorized the 2003 invasion of Iraq, just as his brother George W. Bush had done. The former Florida governor, in an interview taped to air on Fox News on Monday, acknowledged the United States made mistakes in managing Iraq after ousting President Saddam Hussein, including lack of post-war security for Iraqis.

     

    “By the way, guess who thinks that those mistakes took place as well? George W. Bush,” he said. “Yes, I mean, so just for the news flash to the world, if they’re trying to find places where there’s big space between me and my brother, this might not be one of those.”

     

    Bush has said that he is “my own man” and not tied too closely to the policies of George W. or their father, former president George H.W. Bush. He also has said his brother advises him on the Middle East.

     

    The United States invaded Iraq after making a case to the United Nations that said Saddam had biological weapons. That case turned out to have been based on flawed intelligence.

     

    “I would have [authorized the invasion] and so would have Hillary Clinton, just to remind everybody,” Bush told Fox News. “And so would almost everybody that was confronted with the intelligence they got.”

    (emphasis added)

    Anyone who paid even the slightest attention at the time knew the so-called “intelligence” was cooked up by an administration eager to go to war against a helpless third world tinpot dictator, who incidentally happened to sit atop a lot of oil. The intelligence wasn’t just “flawed” – they made it all up from day one. Today everybody knows of course that their “intelligence” consisted mainly of stuff like the lies they were told by con-men like Ahmed Chalabi (who ironically was basically an Iranian plant). US and UK secret services were told in no uncertain terms “to fix the intelligence around the policy”. The whole affair was so transparent from the outset though, that one required an IQ below room temperature not to see through it. Anyone who as naïve enough to believe even one word of Powell’s UN presentation is high on the list of people we’d love to meet at a poker table.

    It isn’t a big surprise that Hillary did indeed vote in favor of the war, but what Jeb Bush is basically saying above is that he too would have been naïve enough to have believed in this so-called “intelligence” at the time (we will refrain from insinuating that he would have been party to cooking it up, we simply don’t know enough about him to come to any conclusions in this respect). Meanwhile, the fact that his brother is “advising him on the Middle East” is downright terrifying.

     

    Conclusion

    It would be both funny and tragic if indeed Hillary and Jeb were to end up facing off against each other in the next election (personally we would classify it as a nightmare actually). What it definitely wouldn’t be is a proper choice. We haven’t yet completely given up on Rand Paul’s chances though, so at the moment there is still a sliver of hope, tiny as it is. Maybe the fat cat seen below can still be deprived of its prize.

     

    Military-Fat-Cat-Complex-Cartoon

     



  • Execution By Anti-Aircraft Gun: The Photographic Evidence

    North Korean defense minister Hyon Yong Chol made a mistake: he fell asleep at an official event at which Supreme Leader Kim Jong Un was present. 

    Kim, keen on sending a strong message amid rumors that his grip on absolute power may be slipping, reportedly decided that the appropriate punishment for napping during a rally is execution by anti-aircraft gun. 

    If true, this would mark the latest in a series of “purges” which seem to lend some credence to the notion that Kim’s family name is no longer sufficient when it comes to securing absolute power and universal admiration both from his inner circle and from North Koreans in general. At a more basic level, executing someone with a ZPU-4 pretty much ensures that nobody will ever be caught napping at official events ever again.

    Since the story broke there have been a few competing accounts of what fate ultimately befell General Chol, but according to the Committee For Human Rights In North Korea, satellite images from last October confirm the defense minister might well have met his fate at the hands of four 14mm heavy machine guns normally used to shoot down helicopters. 

    Via HRNK:

    While examining satellite imagery of an area near the North Korean capital city, the Committee for Human Rights in North Korea (HRNK) and AllSource Analysis, Inc. (ASA) may have come across evidence of a ghastly sight: the public execution of several individuals by anti-aircraft machine gun fire.

     

    A military training area generally known as the Kanggon Military Training Area is located approximately 22 km north of the capital city Pyongyang (Pyongyang-si). Given the size, composition, and location of the training facility, it is likely used by both the students and staff of the elite Kanggon Military Academy (6 km to the southwest) and units from either the Pyongyang Defense Command or the Ministry of State Security. Encompassing approximately 12km2, the training area is composed of a number of dispersed small facilities. One of those facilities, located 1.5 km northeast of the small village of S?ngi-ri, is a small arms firing range (39. 13 48.64° N, 125. 45 29.03° E). This firing range is approximately 100 meters long by 60 meters wide and consists of 11 firing lanes. A range control/viewing gallery and parking area are located immediately south of the firing range. A small drainage ditch horizontally bisects the firing range. This firing range is typical of many ranges throughout North Korea and is designed for small arms training and maintaining proficiency for weapons ranging from pistols to light machine guns, and chambered for 7.62mm (the standard AK-47 rifle round) or less.

    Sometime on or about October 7th, 2014, some very unusual activity was noted on satellite imagery of the Kanggon small arms firing range. Instead of troops occupying the firing positions on the range there was a battery of six ZPU-4 anti-aircraft guns lined up between the firing positions and the range control/viewing gallery. The ZPU-4 is an anti-aircraft gun system consisting of four 14.5mm heavy machine guns (similar to a U.S. .50 caliber heavy machine gun) mounted on a towed wheeled chassis.

    And would anyone in full possession of their faculties fire an anti-aircraft gun at this small arms firing range? 

    It is neither safe nor practical to use such weapons on a small arms range, as the combined weight of fire from the six ZPU-4 (a total of 24 heavy machine guns) would quickly destroy the downrange backstop and necessitate reconstruction.


    A few meters behind the ZPU-4s there appears to be either a line of troops or equipment, while farther back are five trucks (of various sizes), one large trailer, and one bus. This suggests that senior officers or VIPs may have come to observe whatever activity was taking place. Most unusual in the image, perhaps, is what appears to be some sort of targets located only 30 meters downrange of the ZPU-4s.

    In case you are still skeptical, here is why those “some sort of targets” were likely human beings who we assume committed “some sort of” treason in Kim’s estimation:

    The satellite image appears to have been taken moments before an execution by ZPU-4 anti-aircraft machine guns. Busing in senior officers or VIPs to observe a ZPU-4 dry-fire training exercise at a small arms range amidst North Korea’s fuel shortages would make no sense. If the ZPU-4s were brought to the range solely to be sighted in, conducting this exercise at a 100 meter small arms firing range would be impractical. A live-fire exercise would be even more nonsensical. Rounds fired by a ZPU-4 have a range of 8,000 m and can reach a maximum altitude of 5,000 m. Positioning a battery of six ZPU-4s to fire horizontally at targets situated only 30 m downrange could have no conceivable utility from a military viewpoint. The most plausible explanation of the scene captured in the October 7th satellite image is a gruesome public execution.

    Just out of morbid curiosity, how might an execution by anti-aircraft fire unfold?

    Anyone who has witnessed the damage one single U.S. .50 caliber round does to the human body will shudder just trying to imagine a battery of 24 heavy machine guns being fired at human beings. Bodies would be nearly pulverized. The gut-wrenching viciousness of such an act would make “cruel and unusual punishment” sound like a gross understatement.

    We’ll close be reiterating what we said earlier this week. Even if General Chol was indeed an unwilling participant in a recreation of the scene which HRNK claims played out last October at the Kanggon Military Training Area, it could have been worse. He could have merely had a visit from a lethal drone operated out of Nevada, and disappeared in an unsourced explosion, with the same effect. 



  • Global Trade Is "In The Doldrums", BofAML Says

    We’ve spent a considerable amount of time discussing trends in global trade lately, touching on slumping metals demand and collapsing exports in China, sharp decreases in dry bulk trade, a prolonged period of depressed freight rates, and the emergence of a worldwide deflationary supply glut. 

    For their part, Goldman thinks China’s transition to a consumption-led economic model will be a drag on trade for years to come. “There are no other markets large and/or dynamic enough to offset a slowdown in China in the foreseeable future, and we forecast trade volumes to stabilize in the period to 2018,” the bank said, in a note out earlier this month. 

     

    As a reminder, here is our summary of the situation in China:

    Meanwhile, we’ve exhaustively documented the laundry list of signs that point to dramtically decelerating economic growth in China, including falling metals demand, collapsing rail freight volume, slumping exports, a war on pollution that may cost the country 40% in industrial production terms, and, most recently, a demographic shift that’s set to trigger a wholesale reversal of the factors which contributed to the country’s meteoric rise. All of this means that the world’s once-reliable engine of demand is set to stall in the years ahead. 

    Supporting the notion that global trade is severly impaired— an assertion we made back in March after observing a double-digit decline in freight rates from Asia to Northern Europe — is a new note from BofAML who offers the following unambiguously bad assessment: “Global trade of goods and services has been in the doldrums, and the poor streak seems to be extending into the second quarter.”

    Here’s more:

    Global trade of goods and services has been in the doldrums, and the poor streak seems to be extending into the second quarter. First-quarter GDP reports in the US and Germany showed surprisingly weak export growth, and the healthier run in Japanese exports has also cooled. In emerging markets, real exports have been expanding faster in Eastern Europe and Latin America but have been treading water in Asia.

     

    Is global trade wobbling due to feeble activity growth, or are structural issues to blame? The question has been recurring since 2011, when the ongoing soft patch began. If mostly cyclical in nature, trade growth could be expected to pick up once global GDP accelerates. But if predominantly structural, then EM economies should not count on meaningful demand boosts coming from above-trend growth in DM. With Fed rate hikes looming, a jammed trade channel means less growth offsets to the anticipated tightening in financial conditions.

     

    The income elasticity of global trade has indeed been declining, pointing to diminished trade spillovers. In particular, there has been a marked change in Asian supply chains in response to a maturing Chinese economy. 

     


     

    And on import growth as a leveraged play on GDP growth:

    The 10-year average of world import growth as share of GDP growth reached 2.2 in 2000, but the ratio has since entered a sustained decline. In 2014, global imports picked up only 1.2 times as much as global GDP growth. Unfortunately for trade-sensitive economies, global trade is no longer amplifying the pace of global activity.

     

    What is behind the drop in the income elasticity of global trade? It could reflect the changed composition of global final demand, more reliant on consumption rather than on export-intensive capex growth. 

     

     

    What this appears to suggest is that DM demand may be structurally (i.e. permanently) impaired which is bad news for export-driven economies (like China) and serves to underscore what we’ve been saying for quite sometime — namely that global trade has slowed to a crawl and may soon stall out altogether. 



  • Massively Levered Beta: Tepper Adds $1.3 Billion, Or 33% Of Long Equity AUM, In SPY, QQQ Calls

    Back in February, some were surprised to find that in the quarter (Q4 of 2014) in which Tepper again called the end of the bond bull market (incorrectly), dismissed Bill Gross’ PIMCO exit as irrelevant (incorrectly, now that PIMCO is no longer the world’s biggest bond fund as a result of relentless billions in outflows) and most notably, proclaiming that that stocks were inexpensive and multiples not high, Tepper dumped some 40% of his portfolio, taking his net long AUM to only $4 billion by selling among other things his entire AAPL stake just as the company went on to surge on a new bout of wearable euphoria.

    The same Tepper kept very quiet throughout all of Q1, without any public appearance all the way until May when he spoke at the Ira Sohn Conference. Why was he silent? Perhaps because while the market was topping out, Tepper was actively adding to his bullish exposure, but not in the form of many new stock positions, when in fact he partially unloaded 15 of his 38 positions, while adding 12 new positions. It was 2 of these new additions that were particularly notable: just like in early 2014, Tepper is once again back to index investing, having added a whopping $939 million in notional-equivalent SPY Calls, and $413 million in notional-equivalent QQQ Calls.

    In other words, Tepper is once again making a very levered beta bet that the market will resume climbing, and he can capture the upside through SPY and QQQ calls.

    Incidentally this is almost a carbon copy of what Tepper did a year ago, just before he said was “nervous” and unlike now, said “not to be too freakin’ long.” Recall:

    As of March 31, Tepper’s largest position is no longer just the SPY, or S&P500 ETF, which amounted to $2.1 billion in value as of December 31 followed by $765 million in the Nasdaq ETF, the QQQs, but rather calls on the S&P500, which at March 31, 2014 represented a notional equivalent of a whopping $1.1 billion, or 6 million shares! And perhaps even more notable: Tepper’s 6th largest position at the end of Q1, after the SPY Call, a cash position in SPY in second place, followed by $815 million in QQQs, and $492 million in Google and $480 million in Citi, is a new position in Nasdaq (QQQ) calls, amounting to a just as whopping $438 million share notional.

    In short, a massively beta levered deja vu.

    As for all of Tepper’s other less relevant additions, reductions and liquidations, you can find the breakdown below.

    So with Tepper adding in Q1 when he said nothing, one wonders what he was doing in Q2, when he appeared at the Ira Sohn conference and told listeners not to “fight four Feds” and that the S&P is trading a little “cheap” just days before the Fed Chairwoman said the market is largely overvalued. Something tells us he wasn’t selling Treasurys…



  • 5 Things To Ponder: Reading While Waiting List

    Submitted by Lance Roberts via STA Wealth Management,

    This past week has been much the same as the last couple of months – boring. It has been more interesting trying to count carpet fibers in my office than watching the markets.

    However, there has been some excitement in domestic bond yields that have SURGED over the last couple of weeks. Well, as I discussed earlier this week, its a surge alright, you just need a magnifying glass to actually see it.

    "The chart below is a 40-year history of the 10-year Treasury interest rate. The dashed red lines denote the long-term downtrend in interest rates."

    Interest-Rates-Surge-051315

    "The recent SURGE in interest rates is hardly noticeable when put into a long-term perspective. After rates dropped to their second lowest level in history of 1.68%, only exceeded by the "great debt ceiling default crisis of 2012" level of 1.46%, the recent bounce to 2.26% was expected"

    There also has been the divergence in economic data, some good, but mostly not. This has been good for the stock market as "bad news" means the Federal Reserve has no reason to raise rates in the near future. This is particularly the case with first quarter's GDP printing negative and second quarter's falling below 1%.

    This leaves investors in a precarious position of remaining invested as the financial markets levitate away from underlying economic realities. In fact, as recently pointed out by Tyler Durden at Zerohedge, the deviation of the markets from the economic data is one of the largest since the turn of the century.

    zero-hedge-051415

    For now, however, we wait for the market to decide its next action. Will be a resumption of the "bull run" as the vast majority expect or will the contrarian side of the markets finally prevail? I think we will have that answer very soon.

    While we await that answer, I have compiled a this week's reading list to include a smattering of articles on everything from the markets, to investing, to the Fed to the economy.


    1) Bond Rout Puts Bears On Wrong Side Of Fed by Simon Kennedy via Bloomberg Business

    "Keeping monetary policy loose is still justified to economists at JPMorgan Chase & Co. They reckon global economic growth of 1.2 percent in the first quarter was the second weakest outside of a recession in the past 25 years and worldwide inflation of 0.4 percent was the lowest.

     

    Torsten Slok, chief international economist at Deutsche Bank AG, told clients that "the QE trade is not over" and yields should soon reverse their rise once markets stabilize.

     

    'What we have seen in markets over the past two weeks has been triggered by fear and not by a change in the outlook for economic fundamentals,' said Slok. 'I continue to see U.S. rates under downward pressure as a result of money printing abroad.'"

    Read Also: 4 Charts Why The Fed Not Likely To Raise Rates This Year via Streettalklive

     

    2) High Share of Part-Time Workers Explain Weak Wage Growth by Kathleen Madigan via WSJ

    "One possible explanation is that more companies have restructured their staffing to focus on part-time workers. Because of that, there is slightly more slack in the labor markets than the jobless rate indicates. And these part-timers have less bargaining power to negotiate higher wages.

     

    To be sure, most of the jobs created in this expansion (as reported in the household survey) are full-time positions. But part-time spots, less than 35 hours a week, now account for a larger share of total employment than they did before the recession. That's true for total part-time workers and for part-time workers who would prefer a full-time position."

    Employment-Slack

    Read Also: Riddle Me This: Difference Between Headlines & Reality by Streettalklive

     

    3) The Federal Reserve's Asset Bubble Machine by Ruchir Sharma via WSJ Opinion

    "At Morgan Stanley Investment Management, we have analyzed data going back two centuries and found that until the past decade no major central bank had ever before set short-term interest rates at zero, even in periods of deflation.

     

    To critics who warn that pumping trillions of dollars into the economy in a short period is bound to drive up inflation, today's central bankers point to stagnant consumer prices and say, 'Look, Ma, no inflation.' But this ignores the fact that when money is nominally free, strange things happen, and today record-low rates are fueling an unprecedented bout of inflation across asset prices."

    Read Also: What Equity Market Bubble by Scott Grannis via Califia Beach Pundit

     

    4) Even Among The Richest, Fortunes Diverge by Annie Lowrey via NY Times

    "It found that in 2012, the average household in the bottom 90 percent of the income distribution earned about $30,997. For the average household in the top 1 percent, the figure is $1,264,065, and for the top 0.1 percent, about $6,373,782.

     

    Put another way, our 0.1 percent household made about 206 times, and our 1 percent household about 41 times, what our average household did. That gap has yawned over time. In 1990, for instance, the same multiples were 87 and 21. In 1980, they were 47 and 14."

    Super-Rich-vs-Rich

    Read Also:  Consumer Recession Arrives As Retail Sales Fail To Emerge by Jeffrey Snider via Alhambra Partners

    Read Also:  How We Will Cope With Another Downturn by Buttonwood via The Economist

     

    5) The Cardinal Sin – Missing Out by Charlie Bilello via Pension Partners

    (Note: This could also be titled: Why you will be hammered during the next downturn)

    'The greatest fear in the investment management industry is not what one might expect. It is not losing money but the fear of not making enough money when the market is moving relentlessly higher. This "fear of missing out" strikes terror into the heart of portfolio managers as clients will simply not tolerate it; it is the cardinal sin of the business.

     

    The thinking was explained to me as follows. Lose money when the markets are going down and everyone else is suffering and you'll be just fine. But fail to capture maximum upside during a raging bull market and you'll soon be out of a job."

    Read Also: Bulls Should Not Expect Help From The Fed by Cam Hui via Humble Student Of The Markets


    OTHER INTERESTING STUFF

    A Dozen Things I Learned From Julian Robertson About Investing via 25iq

    "A colleague of Robertson once said: 'When he is convinced that he is right, Julian bets the farm.' George Soros and Stanley Druckenmiller are similar. Big mispriced bets don't appear very often and when they do people like Julian Robertson bet big. This is not what he has called a 'gun slinging' approach, but rather a patient approach which seeks bets with odds that are substantially in his favor. Research and critical analysis are critical for Julian Robertson. Being patient, disciplined and yet aggressive is a rare combination and Robertson has proven he has each of these qualities."

    What Peter Schiff Said To Ben Bernanke by Tyler Durden via ZeroHedge

     

    Moore's Law Turns 50 by Thomas L. Friedman via WSJ Opinion

    "But what an exponential it's been. In introducing the evening, Intel's C.E.O., Brian Krzanich summarized where Moore's Law has taken us. If you took Intel's first generation microchip, the 1971 4004, and the latest chip Intel has on the market today, the fifth-generation Core i5 processor, he said, you can see the power of Moore's Law at work: Intel's latest chip offers 3,500 times more performance, is 90,000 times more energy efficient and about 60,000 times lower cost."


    "If you think nobody cares if you're alive, try missing a couple of car payments." – Earl Wilson

    Have a great weekend.



  • Dear Bureau Of Labor Statistics, About Those Plunging Gasoline Prices…

    One of the major reasons for yesterday’s market surge to new record highs was the surprise drop and miss in the April wholesale inflation report, or rather make that deflation, when the BLS announced that PPI in April had dropped by 0.4%, far below expectation of a 0.1% increase, of which the BLS said “over 30 percent can be attributed to the index for gasoline, which decreased 4.7 percent.”

    The implication, of course, being that with the US drifting ever further from the Fed’s desired 2% inflation threshold, not only is the probability of a June rate hike negligible, but the last time US macro data was this bad, the Fed launched QE2 (and Operation Twist… and QE3).

    Which is all great, we just have one question for the BLS: just what “data” are you looking at?

    Because a quick reality check reveals April gasoline prices not only did not drop 4.7%, they rose by 8%!

     

    … leading to the following grtesque divergence between “data” from the US Department of Truth and, well, the real world.

     

    And just to put it in perspective, at this rate in a few weeks gasoline prices in America’s most auto-dependent state, California, will be at or above levels seen from last year. In fact, the surge in California gas prices in 2015 is the fastest on record. As Larry Kudlow would call it “unambiguously bad.

     

    So, dear BLS, we are all ears about that explanation.



  • Gold & Silver Surge As Bond-Buying Bonanza Stalls Stocks

    What goes up, must come down and while stocks have yet to factor in the Fed's anti-gravity gun will end one day, bond yields roundtripped in the most dramatic way in 2 years this week. Quite a ride…

     

    A reminder (after 5 macro misses today)

    And (h/t @ImpartialExamin) from "Money, Bank Credit, and Economic Cycles"…

    OK – with that off our chest. It was quite a week in general as consensus trades swinging around…

    • Silver 3rd best week in 15 months
    • Gold 2nd best week in 15 months
    • USDollar worst 5-week run since Oct 2010
    • WTI Crude was rescued last minute to its 9th up week in a row – first time since 1999
    • Bund yields up 4th week in a row (first time since June 2012)
    • 30Y Treasury yields dropped the most since Jan 6th in the last 2 days (2nd most in over 2 years)
    • Trannies in 2015 -5.9% worst start since 2009 (Down 11 of last 20 weeks, 5 of last 8)

    Volume was awful the last two days…

     

    After collapsing through Wednesday, bonds tore lower in yield today – all the way back to unchanged on the week...the biggest drop in yields in over 4 months.

     

    The plunge in bond yields appears to be  catch up trade from the anti-correlation yesterday… very odd

     

    Stocks held on to yesterday's volumeless gains but rolled over after OPEX struck early…

     

    Futures markets show the swings a little more effectively… from Friday's payrolls print…

     

    On the day, Trannies outperformed (after being the week's loser into that)…

     

    Shale stocks continue their slide – though bounced today…

     

    The momo names remain battered, squeezed, and bruised…

     

    The dollar tumbled on the week with today's wild swings – selling EUR in Europe's session then dumping USDs as US macro data disappointed… Bad data sparked USD selling…

     

    Commodities were all higher on the week led by Silver's surge…

     

    But crude was rescued off $59.50 support into the green for the 9th week in a row…

     

    This was odd though…

     

    Charts: Bloomberg



  • Stock Indicator Suggests Big Move (Lower?) Coming

    Via Dana Lyons Tumblr,

    We don’t talk too often (because we don’t use them) about traditional technical analysis indicators. We have nothing against them; it’s just that we have our own methodologies and processes that work for us. One indicator we do like to keep an eye on is the ADX, or Average Directional Index. It is essentially an indicator of the strength (or lack of strength) of the prevailing trend over a specified period, regardless of the trend’s direction. A high number indicates a strongly trending market and a low number reflects a lack of trend. The traditional default look-back period is 14 days so we tend to stick with that. Interestingly, recent readings of the 14-day ADX applied to the S&P 500 have been among the lowest of the last 65 years, indicating an extremely “trendless” market.

    Given the recent range-bound action in U.S. stocks (which we’ve covered extensively), this isn’t too much of a surprise. Indeed, it is another way of measuring the existence, and persistence, of a trading range. As mentioned, though, this lack of trend has been especially noteworthy. On several days over the past 2 weeks, the ADX reached a reading of 9. Since 1950, there have been just 42 total days – or ¼ of 1% – that saw the ADX that low. Expanding the net to readings of 10 or lower yields 145 days, still less than 0.9% of all days since 1950.

     

     

    What is the significance of ADX readings this low, besides obviously that the market has been trendless over the recent period? Well, they say that low-volatility markets beget high-volatility markets. And while that sounds like another trite Wall Street cliche, it does seem to have some validity. Witness the ultra-low volatility periods in the U.S. Dollar and the Shanghai Composite early last year which led to explosive moves. Therefore, a market wound this tightly – like a coiled spring – may be setting up for an especially big move, one way or another.

    We say one way or another, but a look the historical precedents suggests a strong possibility that the move will be lower. For while a low ADX signifies lack of trend in either direction, historically, the moves following such readings have been surprisingly skewed to the downside – or at least below average. Here are the returns in the S&P 500 following ADX readings of 10 or less since 1950 (138 instances before the recent readings).

     

    image

     

    What accounts for such poor returns following low ADX readings?  Well, it is probably a function of when such low ADX readings tend to occur rather than a byproduct of the low readings. That is, these trendless markets often occur near transitional “topping” periods. During these periods, volatility (or at least, movement) is extremely low in contrast with bottoming periods, which tend to be volatilie, whippy type affairs.

    We often filter these studies to look at the results for markets that were trading near the 52-week high. This study makes that extra step unnecessary as that characteristic is true for most of the readings. Of the 145 ADX readings of 10 or less since 1950, the median distance of the S&P 500 from its 52-week high was just 1.9%. And just 7 of the 145 days saw the S&P 500 further than 10% from its 52-week high.

    There were a few exceptions to the weaker-than-normal returns following these readings. Like many of the studies we’ve looked at recently, those exceptions came during the mid-1990′s and in the post-2013 era. The S&P 500 saw healthy gains after such instances. Again, though, those were the exception rather than the rule. Many more of the readings, historically, have come near tops of intermediate to cyclical significance, including 1956, 1959, 1969, 1976, 1981, 1983, 2000, 2001 and 2007. Thus, the weight of the evidence is heavily skewed to a negative outcome.

    The Average Directional Index, or ADX, is an indicator of “trend strength”, regardless of direction. Recently, coincident with the range-bound trade, the ADX registered among the lowest readings on record. This directionless coiling up of the market suggests that is is about to move one way or the other in perhaps a big way. Historical readings like this, however, have been more consistent in leading to poor performance in the S&P 500 rather than necessarily an out-sized move in some direction. The signal hasn’t been unanimous in foretelling weak performance, but it has certainly been the norm over the past 65 years, and to a statistically significant degree. Thus, we would consider this another negative facing the stock market at the present time.



  • Wall Street Demands Exemption From Punishment In Exchange For Guilty Pleas In FX Rigging

    Just three days ago in “Wall Street To Enter Hollow Guilty Plea On FX Rigging, Return To Business As Usual,” we lamented the fact that the Justice Department’s latest attempt to convince an incredulous public that the government is willing to prosecute white collar crime at TBTF institutions (which includes an amusing ‘crack down’ on UBS which we outlined herewill ultimately end in nothing more than the payment of a token fine before it’s back to business as usual. We also noted that there are actually SEC regulations in place specifically designed to ensure that so-called “bad actors” are punished in a way that is actually meaningful to them and as such serves to deter the type of behavior that results in the buildup of systemic risk and the rigging, fixing and manipulation of every market and -BOR on the face of the earth. Specifically, we said the following:

    Even after Wall Street firms essentially admit to committing egregious fraud by ponying up billions to settle allegations of manipulation, policies put in place to ensure that deep pockets don’t allow big banks to simply sweep scandals under the rug once settlements are doled out are systematically skirted. The latest example of this was Deutsche Bank, who, after paying $2.5 billion to settle allegations its traders conspired to manipulate all manner of -BORs, worked with the CFTC to have language inserted in the settlement agreement exempting the bank from a Dodd Frank rule that restricts so-called “bad actors” from taking advantage of exempt securities transactions.

    The excuse for allowing Wall Street to skirt the very penalties that were put in place as a result of the very things for which the banks are now being prosecuted is two-fold: 1) there’s the so-called ‘Arthur Andersen effect’ whereby the decade-old collapse of an accounting firm and the layoffs that accompanied it are somehow supposed to represent what would happen if a Wall Street bank were not able to claim seasoned issuer status, and 2) curtailing a major bank’s ability to issue capital “speedily and efficiently”, participate in private placements, and manage mutual funds represents a systemic risk.

    We’ll leave it to readers to determine the extent to which any of that is an accurate portrayal of what would happen if big banks were unable to obtain waivers, but rest assured the waivers will be obtained as the following from Reuters makes abundantly clear:

    Banks want assurances from U.S. regulators that they will not be barred from certain businesses before agreeing to plead guilty to criminal charges over the manipulation of foreign exchange rates, causing a delay in multibillion-dollar settlements, people familiar with the matter said…

     

    The banks are also scrambling to line up exemptions or waivers from the Securities and Exchanges Commission and other federal regulators because criminal pleas trigger consequences such as removing the ability to manage retirement plans or raise capital easily…

     

    Negotiating some of the waivers among the SEC’s five commissioners could prove challenging because many of these banks have broken criminal or civil laws in the past that triggered the need for waivers.

     

    Many of the banks want an SEC waiver to continue operating as “well-known seasoned issuers” so they can sell stocks and debt efficiently, people familiar with the matter said. Such a designation allows public companies to bypass SEC approval and raise capital “off the shelf” – a process that is speedier and more convenient.

     

    Several of the people said another waiver being sought by some banks is the ability to retain a safe harbor that shields them from class action lawsuits when they make forward-looking statements.

    The banks involved are also seeking waivers that will allow them to continue operating in the mutual fund business, sources said.

     

    The plea deals could be announced as soon as next week, two of the people said, adding that not all the penalties had been finalized yet.

     

    Peter Carr, a spokesman for the U.S. Justice Department, declined comment on the timing or reason for a possible delay of any agreements. Citi, JPMorgan, RBS and UBS did not respond to requests for comment. A Barclays spokesman declined to comment.

    Note that the original version of this story said that plea deals could be announced as soon as … well, as soon as two days ago, but just as we predicted, none of the banks will enter guilty pleas without a guarantee from the government that no actual penalties (because monetary fines don’t count when you’ve got access to cheap Fed cash) will apply.

    You can expect The Justice Department to cave to these demands in relatively short order because while we know that TBTF guilty pleas represent but a pyrrhic victory (at best) for a regulatory regime that fell asleep at the wheel and allowed Wall Street to run the entire financial system into the ground, there will be no shortage of fanfare and congratulatory handshakes when the DOJ ‘proves’ how very serious it is by sending a few TBTF logos (but no actual people) to prison.



  • "The People" Vs. Piketty

    Submitted by Erico Matias Tavares via Sinclair & Co.,

    Thomas Piketty is getting a lot of attention these days. The French economist has seen the recognition for his lifelong work on the study of inequality skyrocket after publishing “Capital in the Twenty-First Century” in August 2013. The book is a best-seller, which is quite an achievement for anything with 696 pages on economics (even if by some accounts the majority of readers don’t make it much beyond page 12).

    Here’s what Paul Krugman, the don of neo-Keynesian economics, had to say about Piketty’s book back in April 2014:

    “Other books on economics have been best sellers, but Mr. Piketty’s contribution is serious, discourse-changing scholarship in a way most best sellers aren’t. And conservatives are terrified. (…)The really striking thing about the debate so far is that the right seems unable to mount any kind of substantive counterattack to Mr. Piketty’s thesis.”

    That turned out to be incorrect. Barely a month after his glowing review of Piketty’s opus magnum, Krugman had to come out in his defense after several scholars and commentators highlighted some “clear errors” in facts and figures.

    And it wasn’t just from the right either. Yanis Varoufakis, economics professor turned finance minister of Greece – and self-proclaimed Marxist – is also a critic of Piketty’s work.

    Undeterred, Piketty has joined forces with other like-minded economists to come up with actual proposals to tackle the inequality issues he wrote so extensively about.

    As that brave intellectual effort takes shape, we would venture a sneak preview: assemble a huge ledger of all financial transactions, tax the “rich” and their unfair capital gains and make sure that they leave nothing for their kids.

    This of course is music to any politician’s ears. It provides an aura of tackling one of humanity's great problems, while providing yet another reason to tax private property.

    So in spite of all the publicity, there are two sides of the story here. Should we the People be in favor or against Piketty’s argument?

    Inequality and Economic Systems

    Where would you prefer to live: in a society with obvious economic and social inequalities but with an abundance of choices and opportunities, or in another with much greater equality and less choices?

    The answer greatly influences why societies end up adopting a particular economic and political system – although not always by choice. Of course there are societies that neither feature equality nor opportunity, but in most cases there is a prevalence of one over the other.

    To see why we can use a simple example that illustrates this dynamic. An economic system is in fact a set of incentives that drive behaviour, with varying degrees of personal input and liberty. Let’s assume that there are four tribes in a large forest (we did say it was simple) trying to get from point A to point B. Each tribe has the same mix of individuals with different physical and psychological attributes but decides to adopt a different economic system in pursuit of their goal:

    • The first tribe adopts capitalism in its “rawest” form: those who can run the fastest (or by sheer luck find a great shortcut) are allowed to get ahead quickly, while the others in spite of their efforts are progressively left behind. This is how inequality is measured in this example: basically the distance between those who are ahead versus hose who are behind. This tribe on the whole will cover a lot of ground, although very unevenly: the fast runners will get very far (possibly even well beyond point B, if they so desire), while the ones in the back hope that the trail which has been blazed before them will somehow help them get through.
    • The second tribe adopts similar principles, but with more inclusive incentives. People still largely run in accordance with their capabilities, but the fast runners are encouraged to help those further out in the back through social and financial rewards. They will likely not get as far as the fast runners of the first tribe, but the group as a whole will be much more compact.
    • The third tribe adopts socialism. Those who run fast must pay a penalty in favor of those further behind (they are just lucky to have those genes after all). Now the fast runners have to think twice about how fast they should run, because the quicker they run the bigger the penalty. They may end up resenting the slow runners as a result, who may resent them in turn because they should be doing more to help them move along. That tribe will move forward at a more even pace, although clearly slower than the first two tribes and arguably less harmoniously. It's unlikely that anyone will try to go past point B.
    • Finally, the fourth tribe adopts communism, where everyone is running in accordance with the same beat. There is no broad inequality since most cover the same ground. However, the fast runners must either accept a much slower pace or, if they dissent, “take one for the team”. The slow ones are not necessarily better off either. If the leaders (the guys beating the drums) want to enhance their collective pace to match the other tribes they may not be able to make it after all.

    This was a long way of saying that inequality arises in economic systems where individuals are largely given the freedom to act in accordance with their capabilities and desires. We can certainly force society to be more equal, but this will come at some cost to individual freedoms and opportunities in general.

    The fact is that we are all born with different capabilities and attributes. So when someone starts complaining about inequality, we need to understand what they are talking about. Is it because some are more capable than others? Luckier? More cunning? Are they obligated to bring everybody along?

    We can say it is unfair that some of us are world class football players, others Hall of Fame actors, and others top tier fund managers. We can complain that they make way too much money. But this is a consequence of the economic system we have adopted in the West. And we're not necessarily poorer because these folks are richer.

    In other societies they may have not fared as well. The best baseball players in Cuba are clearly much worse off on a relative basis in comparison to their peers in the US (and many are just as good). And since there are no savings (i.e. capital) there aren’t any fund managers either.

    So there, much less inequality, but would you want to live in Cuba?

    Piketty’s Argument

    Having seen that freer societies tend to have greater inequalities, let’s quickly review Piketty’s argument (especially if you also haven’t made it beyond page 12 of his book).

    As a disclaimer, for sure a lot of work went into the book and far from us wanting to oversimplify or denigrate what appears to be an honest attempt to tackle a recurring concern of society (over thousands of years in fact). On the whole Piketty comes across as a decent and sincere fellow.

    But being sincere does not mean he's right; anyone can be sincerely wrong. And because of the fame bestowed upon him, his ideas may get widely accepted without due scrutiny or, as we shall see, little basis on fact. Worse, they can serve as justification for some truly repressive and appalling economic policies, which should concern us all.

    So here’s the main thrust of Capitalism’s 696 pages: examining over 200 years of return on capital data in twenty Western world countries, Piketty concluded that because such returns have historically exceeded the rate of economic growth the holders of capital will get rich faster than anybody else.

    In other words, inequality does not stem from differences in individual ability and achievement as we have discussed above, but rather through the mere ownership of capital. The system is rigged. Moreover, because capital can be inherited, this inequality can persist over many generations.

    Piketty claims that the inevitable outcome from capitalism is perpetual misery, social violence and wars.

    Incidentally (or not), this is eerily similar to the argument that John Maynard Keynes put forward to advocate the euthanasia of the “rentiers” in the 1930s (a great example of a repressive economic theory that has been adopted by the world’s central bankers and is now causing misery to millions of people, particularly to our elderly). Plus ça change Monsieur Piketty.

    We would also have liked to pinpoint the similarities with Karl Marx's thinking (although his bag was mostly the perpetual exploitation of labor by capital, or something like that) but we also never got past page 12 of his book. Apparently a lot of pages are needed to explain something that should have been obvious to us all.

    In a June 2014 interview with the jovial Stephen Colbert, Piketty provided some context to his thinking. People like Colbert became rich because capitalism is unfair; and because he became rich Colbert is depriving others from the opportunity to also become rich. The rich are out to get us! Not to worry, the French economist has a solution: tax all earnings above US$500,000 at 80%.

    We can start getting a sense as to why Facebook and Spanx were created and mass-adopted in the “unequal” US and not “egalitarian” France, Piketty’s home country. Let's look at some facts.

    The Unequal Land of the Free

    Without even getting into the time-tested damage an 80% tax rate does to an economy, the US – the habitual poster child for inequality – provides robust evidence that inequality is oftentimes ephemeral and generally misunderstood. This is where facts start getting in the way of Piketty's grand vision for society.

    Thomas Sowell, the prominent American economist from the Chicago School, has extensively researched this topic. He found that 56% of US households will join the richest 10% at some point in their lives, usually when they are older. So much for the rich versus the poor; this is much more likely a debate with our own selves at different stages of our lives.

    When looking into the composition of the much vilified 1%, the statistics are even more revealing: over the course of a decade, the great majority of Americans only stay at that level for one year, and less than 13% for two years. Basically these are temporary spikes in wealth from things like asset sales. It certainly doesn’t seem like the wealthiest 1% are out to screw everyone else.

    We have also written about inequality in the past. The Pikettys of the world obsess about the dispersion of income levels, where we believe that a much better measure of general prosperity is the percentage of people earning above a minimal threshold that achieves the fulfilment of basic needs (and then some). Using this metric US prosperity peaked in 1999, but the subsequent decline is certainly not attributable to ownership of capital.

    History shows us that prosperity is best achieved in societies with a strong rule of law, enforceable property rights, good education and… access to capital!!! Try starting a business with no money and see how far you get. To vilify capital and the people who own it is truly myopic, not to say misguided.

    So what if dozens of new Mark Zuckerbergs and Sara Blakelys also emerge from that system and greatly distort the income statistics because of their phenomenal wealth? But according to Piketty, Zuckerberg’s “fair” compensation for co-founding Facebook, a social media vehicle used by over a billion people around the world, and Blakely for starting Spanx, which sells undergarments to millions of women, should be a little over US$500,000 per year. Does this sound fair to you?

    For all its virtues, we are not saying that the US is a perfect country. Many millions of people are still struggling after the last recession, and for them the American Dream is proving to be ever more elusive. Our point is that whatever valid grievances we may have with inequality, the ownership of capital is not the culprit. And hurting the people most likely to create it is not a solution either.

    The Poor vs Piketty

    One of the most robust critiques we have seen of Piketty’s work comes from Hernando de Soto, the Peruvian economist. His critique is not based on models or theory but rather on hard facts accumulated by his research team in the very countries where Piketty’s perpetual scourges of inequality – misery, social violence and wars – are prevalent.

    He used Egypt as an example, which in 2011 was undergoing a profound social change with the emergence of the Arab Spring movement. What better testing ground to assess people's grievances? His findings were the polar opposite of what Piketty contends: people in those countries “actually want more rather than less capital, and they want their capital to be real and not fictitious”.

    In fact, de Soto even points out that the very first "martyrs" of this movement were mostly small entrepreneurs desperate because they did not have access to the capital to sustain their businesses.

    Piketty did not have reliable data for developing countries, but rather than conducting his own on-the-ground research he merely extrapolated his findings to the whole globe using data from Western countries. And voilá!

    How was Muhammad Yunus able to improve the livelihoods of thousands of families in his native Bangladesh? By providing microcredit to them; in other words, access to capital.

    How did China become such an economic powerhouse? Certainly not by restricting its citizens' access to capital and taxing them at 80%. On the contrary, it sucked as much foreign capital and know-how as it possibly could. At the start of their great march towards prosperity in the 1980s, Deng Xiaoping (supposedly) proclaimed "to get rich is glorious". They were tired of Mao-Tse Tung wanting to make everyone equal.

    Piketty clearly knows something people in emerging markets don't. Or maybe what he was really describing is capital in the nineteenth century, not the twenty-first.

    Unintended but Predictable Consequences

    We have rich people, poor people, right-wing economists, left-wing economists and even revolutionaries, all contesting Piketty’s argument. It seems we the People do have a point against him. But will it prevail?

    We’re not optimistic on this one. It is far more likely that Piketty's ideas will gain traction rather than fade away. Why? Because it gives politicians and their Keynesian consorts yet another framework and justification as to why the state should be the key allocator of resources in society.

    In other words, it’s another "soak the rich" argument, this time propagated by a soft-spoken best-selling author. And to think that the state will be any more benevolent and altruistic when it is done soaking them is another example of academic theory which is contradicted by the historical record. Power corrupts everything, especially a more aggressive and intrusive state. Perhaps unintended, but clearly a predictable consequence.

    The state does play a very important role in society, but not how Piketty, Krugman and their pals envisage it. Unfortunately, it seems we may be saddled with yet another set of dubious economic ideologies governing our lives and our livelihoods.

    If you are one of those fast runners, we can only wish you the best of luck in your journey across the forest



  • Boston Marathon Bomber Dzhokhar Tsarnaev Sentenced To Death – Live Feed

    UPDATE: *BOSTON MARATHON BOMBER TSARNAEV SENTENCED TO DEATH

    Just over 2 years after the devastating explosions that killed and maimed many during The Boston Marathon, Dzhokhar Tsarnaev is about to face his penalty. The jury of seven women and five men convicted Mr. Tsarnaev, 21, last month of all 30 charges against him, including 17 counts that carry the death penalty. After 14.5 hours of deliberation, the jury will announce at 3pmET whether he will face death or life in prison.

    As The NY Times reports,

    A death sentence would be the first for a federal jury of a terrorist in the post 9/11 era, according to Kevin McNally, director of the Federal Death Penalty Resource Counsel Project, which coordinates the defense of capital punishment cases. The last terrorist sentenced to death was Timothy McVeigh, the Oklahoma City bomber, who was convicted and sentenced in 1997 and executed by lethal injection in 2001.

     

    The alternative is sending Mr. Tsarnaev to prison for the rest of his life with no chance of release, where he would join other terrorists on so-called Bomber’s Row at the federal supermax prison in Colorado.

    *  *  *

    Live Feed (via CBS Boston)

    * * *



Digest powered by RSS Digest

‘WE THE PEOPLE’ NEED TO CIRCLE THE WAGONS: THE GOVERNMENT IS ON THE WARPATH

How many Americans have actually bothered to read the Constitution?

John W. Whitehead (Rutherford Institute)

“The government is merely a servant―merely a temporary servant; it cannot be its prerogative to determine what is right and what is wrong, and decide who is a patriot and who isn’t. Its function is to obey orders, not originate them.”
― Mark Twain

How many Americans have actually bothered to read the Constitution, let alone the first ten amendments to the Constitution, the Bill of Rights (a quick read at 462 words)?

Take a few minutes and read those words for yourself—rather than having some court or politician translate them for you—and you will be under no illusion about where to draw the line when it comes to speaking your mind, criticizing your government, defending what is yours, doing whatever you want on your own property, and keeping the government’s nose out of your private affairs.

In an age of overcriminalization, where the average citizen unknowingly commits three crimes a day, and even the most mundane activities such as fishing and gardening are regulated, government officials are constantly telling Americans what not to do. Yet it was not always this way. It used to be “we the people” telling the government what it could and could not do. Indeed, the three words used most frequently throughout the Bill of Rights in regards to the government are “no,” “not” and “nor.”

Compare the following list of “don’ts” the government is prohibited from doing with the growing list of abuses to which “we the people” are subjected on a daily basis, and you will find that we have reached a state of crisis wherein the government is routinely breaking the law and violating its contractual obligations.

For instance, the government is NOT allowed to restrict free speech, press, assembly or the citizenry’s ability to protest and correct government wrongdoing. Nevertheless, the government continues to prosecute whistleblowers, persecute journalists, cage protesters, criminalize expressive activities, crack down on large gatherings of citizens mobilizing to voice their discontent with government policies, and insulate itself and its agents from any charges of wrongdoing (or what the courts refer to as “qualified immunity”).

The government may NOT infringe on a citizen’s right to defend himself. Nevertheless, in many states, it’s against the law to carry a concealed weapon (gun, knife or even pepper spray), and the average citizen is permitted little self-defense against militarized police officers who shoot first and ask questions later.

The government may NOT enter or occupy a citizen’s house without his consent (the quartering of soldiers). Nevertheless, government soldiers (i.e., militarized police) carry out more than 80,000 no-knock raids on private homes every year, while maiming children, killing dogs and shooting citizens.

The government may NOT carry out unreasonable searches and seizures on the citizenry or their possessions. NOR can government officials issue warrants without some evidence of wrongdoing (probable cause). Unfortunately, what is unreasonable to the average American is completely reasonable to a government agent, for whom the ends justify the means. In such a climate, we have no protection against roadside strip searches, blood draws, DNA collection, SWAT team raids, surveillance or any other privacy-stripping indignity to which the government chooses to subject us.

The government is NOT to deprive anyone of life, liberty or property without due process. Nevertheless, the government continues to incarcerate tens of thousands of Americans whose greatest crime is being poor and brown-skinned. The same goes for those who are put to death, some erroneously, by a system weighted in favor of class and wealth.

The government may NOT take private property for public use without just compensation. Nevertheless, under the guise of the “greater public interest,” the government often hides behind eminent domain laws in order to allow mega corporations to tear down homes occupied by less prosperous citizens in order to build high-priced resorts and shopping malls.

Government agents may NOT force a citizen to testify against himself. Yet what is the government’s extensive surveillance network that spies on all of our communications but a thinly veiled attempt at using our own words against us?

The government is NOT allowed to impose excessive fines on the citizenry or inflict cruel and unusual punishments upon them. Nevertheless Americans are subjected to egregious fines and outrageous punishments for minor traffic violations, student tardiness and absence from school, and generally having the misfortune of being warm bodies capable of filling privatized, profit-driven jails.

The government is NOT permitted to claim any powers that are not expressly granted to them by the Constitution. This prohibition has become downright laughable as the government continues to claim for itself every authority that serves to swell its coffers, cement its dominion, and expand its reach.

Despite what some special interest groups have suggested to the contrary, the problems we’re experiencing today did not arise because the Constitution has outlived its usefulness or become irrelevant, nor will they be solved by a convention of states or a ratification of the Constitution.

No, as I document in my new book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, the problem goes far deeper. It can be traced back to the point at which “we the people” were overthrown as the center of the government. As a result, our supremacy has been undone, our authority undermined, and our experiment in democratic self-governance left in ruins. No longer are we the rulers of this land. We have long since been deposed and dethroned, replaced by corporate figureheads with no regard for our sovereignty, no thought for our happiness, and no respect for our rights.

In other words, without our say-so and lacking any mandate, the point of view of the Constitution has been shifted from “we the people” to “we the government.” Our taxpayer-funded employees—our appointed servants—have stopped looking upon us as their superiors and started viewing as their inferiors. Unfortunately, we’ve gotten so used to being dictated to by government agents, bureaucrats and militarized police alike that we’ve forgotten that WE are supposed to be the ones calling the shots and determining what is just, reasonable and necessary.

Then again, we’re not the only ones guilty of forgetting that the government was established to serve us as well as obey us. Every branch of government, from the Executive to the Judicial and Legislative, seems to be suffering this same form of amnesia. Certainly, when government programs are interpreted from the government’s point of view (i.e., the courts and legislatures), there is little the government CANNOT do in its quest for power and control.

We’ve been so brainwashed and indoctrinated into believing that the government is actually looking out for our best interests, when in fact the only compelling interesting driving government programs is maintain power and control by taking away our money and control. This vital truth, that the government exists for our benefit and operates at our behest, seems to have been lost in translation over two centuries dominated by government expansion, endless wars and centralized federal power.

Have you ever wondered why the Constitution begins with those three words “we the people”? It was intended to be a powerful reminder that everything flows from the citizenry. We the people are the center of the government and the source of its power. That “we” is crucial because it reminds us that there is power and safety in numbers, provided we stand united. We can accomplish nothing alone.

This is the underlying lesson of the Constitution, which outlines the duties and responsibilities of government. It was a mutual agreement formed by early Americans in order to ensure that when problems arose, they could address them together.

It’s like the wagon trains of the Old West, comprised of individual groups of pioneers. They rarely ventured out alone but instead traveled as convoys. And when faced with a threat, these early Americans formed their wagons into a tight circle in order to defend against invaders. In doing so, they presented a unified front and provided protection against an outside attack. In much the same way, the Constitution was intended to work as an institutionalized version of the wagon circle, serving as a communal shield against those who would harm us.

Unfortunately, we have been ousted from that protected circle, left to fend for ourselves in the wilderness that is the American frontier today. Those who did the ousting—the courts, the politicians, and the corporations—have since replaced us with yes-men, shills who dance to the tune of an elite ruling class. In doing so, they have set themselves as the central source of power and the arbiters of what is just and reasonable.

Once again we’re forced to navigate hostile terrain, unsure of how to protect ourselves and our loved ones from militarized police, weaponized drones, fusion centers, Stingray devices, SWAT team raids, the ongoing military drills on American soil, the government stockpiling of ammunition, the erection of mass detention centers across the country, and all other manner of abuses.

Read the smoke signals, and the warning is clear: It’s time to circle the wagons, folks. The government is on the warpath, and if we are to have any hope of surviving whatever is coming at us, we’ll need to keep our wits about us and present a unified front. Most of all, we need to restore “we the people” to our rightful place at the center of government. How we do that depends largely on each community’s willingness to get past their partisan politics and blind allegiance to uniformed government officials and find common ground.

To put it a little more bluntly, stop thinking like mindless government robots and start acting like a powerhouse of citizens vested with the power to say “enough is enough.” We have the numbers to stand our ground. Now we just need the will.

Today’s News May 15, 2015

  • Why Not Tell Greece How To Run A Democracy?

    Submitted by Raul Ilargi Meijer via The Automatic Earth blog,

    I know I’ve talked about this before, but it just keeps coming and it keeps being crzay. Bloomberg ‘reports’ that the ‘German Finance Ministry’, let me get this right, “is supporting the idea of a vote by Greek citizens to either accept the economic reforms being sought by creditors to receive a payout from the country’s bailout program or ultimately opt to leave the euro.” And that’s it.

    They ‘report’ this as if it has some sort of actual value, as if it’s a real thing. Whereas in reality, it has the exact same value as Greek Finance Minister Varoufakis suggesting a referendum in Germany. Or Washington, for that matter. Something that Bloomberg wouldn’t even dream of ‘reporting’ in any kind of serious way, though the political value would be identical.

    Apparently there is some kind of consensus in the international press – Bloomberg was by no means the only ‘news service’ that ‘reported’ this – that Germany has obtained the right to meddle in the internal politics of other eurozone member nations. And let’s get this one thing very clear: it has not.

    No more than the Greek government has somehow acquired the right to even vent its opinions on German domestic issues. It is a no-go area for all European Union countries. More than that, it’s no-go for all nations in the world, and certainly in cases where governments have been democratically elected.

    So why do Bloomberg and Reuters and all the others disregard such simple principles? All I can think is they entirely lost track of reality, and they live in a world where reality is what they say it is.

    Now, I know that Schäuble ‘merely’ said – I quote Bloomberg -: “If the Greek government thinks it should hold a referendum, it should hold a referendum.. Maybe it would even be the right measure to let the Greek people decide whether they’re ready to accept what needs to be done.”

    That’s admittedly not the same thing that Bloomberg makes of it, though it’s possible that the ‘reporter’ got some additional background information from the German Finance Ministry, and that that’s the reason the ministry gets mentioned, instead of just Schäuble.

    But that still doesn’t make it alright by any stretch of the imagination. The EU, and the eurozone, are made up of sovereign nations. Who function in a system of equal partners, certainly from a political point of view. So the German FinMin has no business even talking about a Greek referendum, no more than the Greeks have talking about a German referendums. And Angela Merkel should be on his case for this. But she’s not. At least not in public.

    Whether or not Greece has a referendum -about the euro or anything else- is up to the Greek people, and first of all to the government they elected only 3.5 months ago. It has absolutely nothing to do with whoever is in charge in Berlin, or Paris, or even in the EU headquarters in Brussels. It’s a fatal mistake to think otherwise. Bloomberg has made that fatal mistake. Schäuble has come so close Athens should file a complaint against him.

    Granted, all parties involved may be influenced by what happened 4 years ago -more Bloomberg-:

    Schaeuble’s stance on a Greek plebiscite is a departure from Germany’s position in 2011. Back then, Prime Minister George Papandreou dropped his plan for a referendum after Chancellor Angela Merkel and French President Nicolas Sarkozy urged him not to hold the vote.

    That referendum involved a haircut on Greek debt ‘negotiated’ by the troika, which Papandreou wanted the Greek people to vote on. And Merkel and Sarkozy did much more than ‘urge’ Papandreou not to hold the vote. They were afraid it would drive Greece from the eurozone, and scared the sh*t out of him so much he withdrew the plan a few days after proposing it.

    Which is just another case of Euro nations meddling in the internal affairs of a fellow member nation. Something for which there wasn’t then, and still isn’t now, any political or legal support or framework inside the EU. Still, Brussels, Berlin and Paris applied similar pressure on Italy PM Berlusconi in those days, and installed – helped install – a technocrat PM, Mario Monti. In Greece, they got Papademos. Both Papandreou and Berlusconi were gone soon after the ‘pressure’ was applied.

    That’s how Europe operates. And they have no legal right to do it. But that you won’t read at Bloomberg. The whole thing is so accepted that not even Syriza tells the Germans – or Bloomberg for that matter – to shut their traps. Even though they would have a lot more right to do that than Schäuble has to comment on internal Greek affairs.

    And from where I’m sitting that means that Ashoka Mody’s piece for Bruegel is too little too late. Nice try but..

    Europe’s Integration Overdrive

    The problems will worsen in Greece and, will inevitably, arise elsewhere. The economic and political costs of breaking the Eurozone are so horrendous that the imperfect monetary union will be held together. Instead, the cost of the ill-judged rush to the euro and mismanagement of Greece will eventually be a substantial forgiveness of Greek debt.

     

    But this is a good moment to step back and loosen European ties. As Schuman said, “Europe will not be built according to one plan.” The task is to create a de facto solidarity—not to force a fragile embrace. A new architecture should scale back the corrosive power relationships of centralized economic surveillance. Let nations manage their affairs according to their priorities.

     

    And put on notice private creditors that they will bear losses for reckless lending. The European fabric -held together by commercial ties- is fraying as European businesses seek faster growing markets elsewhere. That fabric could tear if political discord and economic woes persist. History and Schuman will be watching.

    Things have moved way beyond where Mody thinks they are at present. The secret ingredient is simply the crisis. The way the eurozone was hastily slapped together allows only for good times. The idea was that as long as things go well, nobody would notice the cracks. But Europe has been nothing but cracks for 7 years now, and there’s no end in sight.

    The Greek people can vote all they want to end the misery Europe has inflicted on them, it doesn’t matter to the major powers in the union. They simply blame it all on the same Greeks, and judging from how Bloomberg approaches the issue, they have the upper hand. They live above their means, they’re wasteful and they’re lazy. That’s the portrait painted, and that’s how 90% of the world therefore sees them.

    It makes no difference whether it is true or not. It’s all just about who has more money and power and press; they get to decide what people think about other people.

    Does the euro have a future? If it does, it won’t look anything like it does today. The eurozone has only ever been a mechanism to make more money flow from the south to the north. And now the north will have to come up with a measure of solidarity, of being an actual union, and they bluntly refuse.

    Rich European countries are all led by politicians who want to win their next elections. And these are national elections, not European elections. Those hardly matter. Because Europe is made up of sovereign nations. And that’s why the European Union in its present shape is doomed to fail.

    Brussels will always clamor for a closer union, politically, fiscally, economically. But the way Germany et al has treated Greece and Italy and Spain over the past 7 years makes abundantly clear that such a close union will never come to fruition. These are all countries that are proudly independent, that commemorate battles from hundreds of years ago where their ancestors shed the blood and gave the lives that made them independent.

    They’re not going to let Germany and France and Holland call the shots in their economies and countries now. Not a chance.

    Europe only has a -peaceful- future as a continent of independent nations that work together where they can. To get there, they will need to abolish the euro and completely redo the union project, from scratch, close down all offices in Brussels, and they will have to do it soon, or there will be no peace.

    Meanwhile, what’s left for Greece in Brussels that is beneficial to the country? I don’t see it. It makes me think more of a Stockholm syndrome by the hour. Get out, get your own currency, negotiate a treaty with Italy and Spain, maybe France. But don’t stay in a ‘union’ with outsiders who think they can tell you, Greeks, how to run a democracy, or when to hold a referendum. That can only be a road to nowhere.



  • UBS Shocked To Learn Ratting Out Fellow Criminals Doesn't Buy DOJ Immunity

    Back in 2012, when the first massive marketwide-rigging scandal made the front pages, that of Libor (one which Zero Hedge discussed first in January 2009 withThis Makes No Sense: LIBOR By Bank and for which we won early points in the “you are a fringe tinfoil blog” category until proven correct as usual) the prosecution’s case was handed on a silver platter by one bank which hoped it would squeeze through the prosecutorial cracks by ratting out all of its heretofore complicit partners in crime: UBS.

    And sure enough, UBS did indeed get away with a paltry fine, and the whole affair was quietly swept under the rug with a December 2012 settlement, in which the U.S. agreed not to prosecute the bank on the condition that it “commit no United States crime whatsoever” for the two-year term of the agreement, subsequently extended by an extra year.

    Unfortunately for UBS, its reputation as a ratting squealer was all for nothing, because just over one year later UBS as well as virtually all the same banks that were manipulating Libor, were caught rigging that other massive, global market in secret online chatrooms such as the “Bandits” and the “Cartel“: foreign currency rates.

    And also unfortunately for UBS which had sworn to commit no US crimes, it had just been caught committing at least one US crime. As a result, as Bloomberg reported earlier this week and as WSJ reported tonight, the US “Justice” Department is now tearing up and voiding the UBS 2012 settlement.

    Actually, make that two crimes: “UBS also was viewed by the Justice Department as a repeat offender, having reached previous settlements including one in 2011 related to antitrust violations in the municipal-bond investments market.”

    Actually, make that three crimes: “[Justice Department criminal division head Leslie] Caldwell’s message in the talks was stern: UBS was a recidivist having previously settled with the Justice Department over antitrust violations and had also obtained a deferred-prosecution agreement in 2009 to resolve charges it helped American taxpayers hide money overseas.”

    Sure enough, UBS is shocked, shocked to find out there was criminal gambling going on in its world’s largest trading floor in Stamford, CT which is on its way to becoming a mini golf course. And again. And again.

    UBS officials are confounded by the outcome, some of the people familiar with the negotiations said. The bank believes it provided early cooperation which helped prosecutors break open the foreign-exchange investigations and, as a result, was promised immunity by the antitrust division of the Justice Department.

     

    But for prosecutors the punishment is seen as justified, the people said: The bank promised not to break the law in its 2012 deal and it violated those terms when its traders engaged in the currency-market misconduct after the 2012 agreement, they said. Prosecutors have been investigating whether traders colluded to move currency rates to benefit themselves to the detriment of clients.

    We too would be shocked to learn that ratting out all our former peers and colleagues doesn’t pay off in the end.

    The WSJ also adds, “the negotiations with the Justice Department are expected next week to result in UBS paying a fine of about $200 million to the Justice Department and pleading guilty to allegations that UBS traders manipulated the London interbank offered rate, or Libor, prior to 2012, according to some of the people.”

    While the fine is paltry, the guilty plea will open the bank to a myriad of lawsuits from around the globe, which will surely result in billions of new recurring, non one-time “one-time, non recurring” legal fees, charges and further settlements as UBS is now open to litigation by anyone and everyone.

    And while we applaud the DO”J” for doing its job for once, will it be too much just once not to assume everyone is an idiot and that clearly the DO”J” has a bias against foreign banks who are used as a buffer to avoid prosecution of domestic banks, which have mysteriously gotten away with virtually every criminal act known to man and mafia.

    Such as JP Morgan for example. The same JP Morgan whose luck may have run out, because according to the WSJ, in addition to UBS, Barclays, Citigroup, RBS, and J.P. Morgan “are expected to plead guilty to criminal antitrust charges and pay between $500 million and more than $1 billion in penalties to various government entities, according to company disclosures and people familiar with the talks. On Thursday, J.P. Morgan disclosed in a financial filing that “any resolution acceptable to DOJ would require that the Firm plead guilty to an antitrust charge.

    Curiously, it is none other than JPMorgan who courtesy of Troy Rohrbaugh happens to be the Chairman of the Fed’s Foreign Exchange Committee.

     

    We are confident, however, that JPMorgan admiting guilt to a criminal anti-trust FX rigging charge will have zero impact on, and no conflicts of interest whatsoever with it remaining head advisor to the NY Fed on all issues FX.

    And while there are several things we can be absolutely certain of i) the banks will pay a few more billion in settlements here and there, and maybe UBS will be barred from competing with Goldman and JPM in fields in which the US banks feel there is “too much competition” (because a Lehman-type raid on a key competitor would not quite work out just now), and ii) nobody will actually go to prison, we have one question: just which umbrella agreement with US prosecutors will UBS use for that “other other other” market UBS was most recently caught rigging: gold.

    Actually, if UBS made the price of gold drop with its gold-rigging, it may well be that the Swiss bank just may get a commendation by the US DO”J” for that one.



  • George Orwell's Final Warning

    “…something like 1984 could very well happen; this is the direction the world is going in at the present time. In our world, there will be no emotions except fear, rage, triumph, and self-abasement… but always there will be the intoxication of power…if you want a picture of the future, imagine a boot stomping on a human face… forever.”

     

     

    h/t The Burning Platform



  • The Regulatory State: Central Planning & Bureaucracy On A Rampage

    Submitted by Pater Tenebrarum via Acting-Man.com,

    The New 10,000 Commandments Report – It’s Worse than Ever

    Before we begin, we should mention that the US economy has long been one of the least regulated among the major regulatory States of the so-called “free” world, and to a large extent this actually still remains true. This introductory remark should give readers an idea of how terrible the situation is in many of the socialist Utopias elsewhere.

     

    climbing_in_bureaucracy__alfredo_martirena

    Even in the US though, today’s economic system is light years away from free market capitalism or anything even remotely resembling a “laissez faire” system. We are almost literally drowning in regulations. The extent of this regulatory Moloch and that the very real costs it imposes is seriously retarding economic progress. It is precisely as Bill Bonner recently said: the government’s main job is to look toward the future in order to prevent it from happening.

    A great many of today’s regulations have only one goal: to protect established interest groups. Regulations that are ostensibly detrimental to certain unpopular corporatist interests are no different. Among these is e.g. the truly monstrous and nigh impenetrable thicket of financial rules invented after the 2008 crash in a valiant effort to close the barn door long after the horse had escaped. They are unlikely to bother the established large banking interests in the least. The banking cartel is probably elated that it has become virtually impossible for start-ups to ever seriously compete with it. The same is true of many other business regulations; their main effect is to protect the biggest established companies from competition.

     

    bureaucracy...

     

    The Competitive Enterprise Institute (CEI) – evidently named after a species close to extinction – has just released its 2015 report on the regulatory State, entitled “The 10,000 Commandments” (download link at the end of the article). Here is a summary of the grisly highlights (now would be a good time to get the barf bags out):

    “Federal regulation and intervention cost American consumers and businesses an estimated $1.88 trillion in 2014 in lost economic productivity and higher prices.

     

    If U.S. federal regulation was a country, it would be the world’s 10th largest economy, ranking behind Russia and ahead of India.

     

    Economy-wide regulatory costs amount to an average of $14,976 per household – around 29 percent of an average family budget of $51,100. Although not paid directly by individuals, this “cost” of regulation exceeds the amount an average family spends on health care, food and transportation.

     

    The “Unconstitutionality Index” is the ratio of regulations issued by unelected agency officials compared to legislation enacted by Congress in a given year. In 2014, agencies issued  16 new regulations for every law — that’s 3,554 new regulations compared to 224 new laws.

     

    Many Americans complain about taxes, but regulatory compliance costs exceed what the IRS is expected to collect in both individual and corporate income taxes for last year—by more than $160 billion.

     

    Some 60 federal departments, agencies and commissions have 3,415 regulations in development at various stages in the pipeline. The top six federal rule making agencies account for 48 percent of all federal regulations. These are the Departments of the Treasury, Commerce, Interior, Health and Human Services and Transportation and the Environmental Protection Agency.

     

    The 2014 Federal Register contains 77,687 pages, the sixth highest page count in its history. Among the six all-time-high Federal Register total page counts, five occurred under President Obama.

     

    The George W. Bush administra­tion averaged 62 major regulations annually over eight years, while the Obama administration has averaged 81 major regulations annually over six years.

    (emphasis added)

     

    1-cost of regulation

    Look at it and weep: the estimated cost of federal regulations and interventions alone in 2015 – click to enlarge.

     

    If one adds taxes and the damage done by the Fed’s incessant money printing to these regulatory costs, it is a miracle the economy hasn’t imploded yet. Note the deeply undemocratic nature of the regulatory process: The vast majority of the rules – all of which have the power of law – is concocted by unelected bureaucrats in the form of “administrative law”. It would otherwise simply be impossible to make up thousands of new rules every year. As unproductive as the bureaucracy is, it is still smothering the economy with this onslaught. This will probably never change, unless the entire system collapses one day. After all, the people tasked with making the rules need something to do.

     

    2-Cost per household

    The cost of federal regulation per US household, compared to various major household expenditure items – click to enlarge.

     

    Growing Like a Weed

     

    assistant director

     

    A look at the Federal Register shows that the growth in regulations is essentially a permanent feature. There are no longer any significant time periods during which the number of rules actually declines. It is probably no coincidence that the charts below are eerily reminiscent of charts showing total federal debt or charts depicting the growth in the money supply. The only thing that is no longer showing any respectable growth is the economy. Of course, no-one should be surprised by this.

    Federal Register pages per decade. One wonders how people survived the practically lawless 1940 – 1970 period. Note that if we were to go back in time by another 30 years, we would see that the federal government wasn’t even a footnote in most people’s lives.

     

    3-Federal Register

    Over the past 22 years, almost 91,000 final rules and regulations were published cumulatively. We are just guessing here, but we believe that between the time the average citizen gets out of bed until shortly after he has slurped his morning coffee, he has violated at least five laws or regulations already – click to enlarge.

     

    4-Cumulative rules

    Cumulative regulations published in the Federal Register – almost 91,000 in the past 22 years alone – click to enlarge.

     

    Monetary costs are just one aspect to this. There is also the wasted effort and psychic cost that is incurred when people realize that there are many things they simply cannot do, even though they would harm no-one and would actually provide a service to their fellow men. It will often prove extremely difficult to fight the red tape and still establish a successful business venture at the same time. Certain sectors of the economy have been closed off to the private sector completely (see the example of roads below). Very often start-ups with little capital cannot hope to compete in certain business sectors, as the regulatory obstacles are simply impossible to overcome.

    Recently a US trucking organization has penned a manifesto in which it is bitterly complaining about crumbling roads and bridges across the US and urging the government to “do something”. The authors should take a long, hard look at their sad collection of statistics and realize that this is what actually happens when the government monopolizes a sector of the economy.

    Another aspect is of course social control. By making a criminal or a potential criminal out of everybody, the mountain of laws and regulations can always be brought to bear against citizens or organizations that have somehow displeased government officials or managed to attract their wrath. One can see a variation of this principle at work in modern-day criminal court cases. People who are indicted for a crime are usually faced with a whole plethora of charges apart from the main charge. The intention is to force them to accept a plea deal whether or not they are innocent. The point is obviously not to serve the cause of justice.

    However, we don’t want to digress too much here. The purely economic cost on which the CEI report focuses is distressing enough all by itself. One only has to think the problem properly through. Similar to other government interventions such as interest rate and money supply manipulations by the central bank, these enormous costs hamper the economy to such an extent that economic progress is slowed to a crawl. Who knows what we could have achieved by now if this were not the case? Perhaps people would already be able to reach the ripe old age of 150 and still feel like spring chickens in their early 100ds. Concerns over material well-being that continue to bedevil so many people today may already be orders of magnitude smaller. As Israel Kirzner once remarked in this context:

    “We are not able to chart the future of capitalism in any specificity. Our reason for this incapability is precisely that which assures us . . . the economic future of capitalism will be one of progress and advance. The circumstance that precludes our viewing the future of capitalism as a determinate one is the very circumstance in which, with entrepreneurship at work, we are no longer confined by any scarcity framework.”

    However, for this to be true, free market capitalism must be able to breathe. We won’t be able to enjoy the fruits of entrepreneurship if it is smothered at every opportunity.

     

    dilbert-steering-committee

     

    Conclusion

    As revolting as the full picture is, we recommend reading the entire “10,000 Commandments” report, which can be downloaded here (pdf). Above we show only a very small selection of the charts and data contained in the complete report. One thing should be clear to everyone reading it: This is a major problem that deserves a lot more attention than it usually seems to get.

    bureaucracy-2

     



  • Chinese Tech Company's 3,000% Post-IPO Gain Takes Unthinkable 4% Hit

    Two weeks ago, we brought you the story of Beijing Baoefung Technology which in many ways exemplifies everything that’s wrong (or right, depending on whether you, like Japan’s Economics Minister Akira Amari, have come to believe that bubbles are good) with today’s capital markets. The online video company’s shares posted a remarkable post-IPO run amid China’s red-hot equity mania, but as FT reports, something went terribly wrong on Thursday: the stock fell.

    This column’s favorite stock for the past month has been Beijing Baofeng Technology, which offers online videos in China. Baofeng means “storm”, and it has been a near-perfect performer: its shares traded limit-up every day from its March IPO in Shenzhen apart from one, and opened up the maximum 10 per cent on Thursday, too.

     

    It looks like the storm has now broken. Its shares ended the day down for the first time, falling 4.4 per cent after news of a copyright dispute over content. 


     

    There’s no need to panic though because “the stock [is] up 3,285 per cent from the offer price.”

    In other words:



  • The Trouble with Cash

    Submitted by Alasdair Macleod via GoldMoney.com,

    When interest rates are zero and it costs a bank to look after your money it becomes an unattractive asset. Banks in some jurisdictions (such as Switzerland, Denmark and Sweden) are even charging customers interest on cash and deposits. And if you go to your bank and withdraw large amounts in the form of folding notes to avoid these charges you will be lucky if you are not treated as a sort of pariah. For the moment, at least, these problems do not extend to sound money, in other words gold.
     
    There are two distinct issues involved with government-issued currency: zero-to-negative interest rates, which all but eliminate any interest turn on deposits for the banks; and a systemic issue that arises if too many people withdraw their money from the banking system. The problems with the latter would become significant if enough people decide to effectively opt out of holding money in the banks.
     
    Conversion of bank deposits into physical cash increases reserve ratios, restricting the banks’ ability to create credit. However, while the banks are contractually obliged to supply physical cash to anyone who wants it, a drawdown on bank deposits is a bad thing from a central bank’s point of view. A desire for physical cash is, therefore, discouraged. Instead, if the option of owning physical cash was removed and there was only electronic money, deposits would simply be transferred from one bank to another and any imbalances between the banks resolved through the money markets, with or without the assistance of a central bank. The destabilising effects of bank runs would be eliminated entirely.
     
    In the current financial climate demand for cash does not originate so much from loss of confidence in banks, with some notable exceptions such as in Greece. Instead it is a consequence of ultra-low or even negative interest rates. The desire for cash is therefore an unintended consequence of central banks attempting to inject confidence into the economy. The rights of ordinary individuals to turn deposits into physical cash are therefore resisted by central banks, which are focused instead on managing zero interest rate policies and suppressing any side effects.
     
    Central banks can take this logic one step further. Monetary policy is primarily intended to foster investor confidence, so any tendency for investors to liquidate investments is, therefore, to be discouraged. However, with financial markets getting progressively more expensive central bankers will suspect the relative attraction of cash balances are increasing. And because banks are making cash deposits more costly, this is bound to increase demand for physical notes.
     
    Monetary policy has now become like a pressure cooker with a defective safety-valve. Central bankers realise it and investors are slowly beginning to as well. Add into this mix a faltering global economy, a fact that is becoming impossible to ignore, and a dash-for-cash becomes a serious potential risk to both monetary policy and the banking system.
     
    There is an obvious alternative to cash, and that is to buy physical gold. This does not constitute a run on the banking system, because a buyer of gold uses electronic money that transfers to the seller. The problem with physical gold is a separate issue: it challenges the raison d’être of the banking system and of government currencies as well.
     
    This is why we can still buy gold instead of encashing our deposits, for the moment at least. It can only be a matter of time before people realise that with the cash option closing this is the only way to escape an increasingly dysfunctional financial system.



  • How China's Banks Hide Trillions In Credit Risk: Full Frontal

    On Monday, we noted that NPLs in China saw their biggest quarterly increase on record in Q1, jumping 141 billion yuan sequentially to 983 billion. We also discussed why the proliferation of property loans is spreading real estate risk to the larger economy before outlining several reasons why the “official” data on bad loans may severely understate credit risk in much the same way that “official” data out of Beijing on economic output probably grossly overstates GDP growth. As a reminder, here is what we said:

    One might be tempted, upon reading this, to point to “official” data on bad loans at Chinese banks on the way to concluding that “modest loss-absorption capacity” or not, sub-2% NPL ratios certainly do not seem to portend an imminent catastrophe. However, given the official figure is just 1.39%, and given what we know about the state of China’s economy, one could be forgiven for wondering if NPLs at China’s biggest lenders are grossly understated. To let Fitch tell it, determining the true extent of China’s NPL problem is complicated by a number of factors and the ‘real’ data might be just as hard to get at as an accurate reading on Chinese GDP.

    In order to truly understand how exposed China’s lenders are to potentially toxic “assets”, it’s worth taking a closer look at all of the different non-standard channels through which the banks have taken on credit risk. 

    At the outset it should be noted that it is virtually impossible to determine how many of the traditional loans banks carry on their books would actually be impaired were it not for what Fitch calls “centrally managed NPLs.” Put simply, the government has a tendency to ‘influence’ banks’ decisions when it comes to rolling over problem loans. Here’s Fitch:

    It is not uncommon for the authorities (central or provincial government, PBOC, or China Banking Regulatory Commission; CBRC) to encourage banks to roll over loans to support the broader economy. Such influence from the regulators is common in China, but less so in more developed markets as it runs counter to the principle of strict prudential oversight. (In addition, in some cases in China the regulator has lowered risk weights to encourage banks to lend to potentially riskier borrowers.)…

    Where a bank agrees to provide additional funding to prevent default, i.e. by rolling over the loans and requiring more collateral as credit enhancement, this exposure and/or other loan exposures relating to the same borrower may not be recognised as impaired. The level of disclosure of widely reported corporate defaults (or near defaults) is low, and there is no information available on the amount of debt renegotiations that are unreported by the media. 

    In other words, there’s no way to know how pervasive Beijing’s practice of forcing banks to roll-over problem loans truly is, meaning that even if we ignore the fact that quite a bit of credit risk is obscured by the practice of shifting it around, moving it off balance sheet, and reclassifying it, (i.e. if we just look at traditional loans) it’s still difficult to know what percentage of loans are actually impaired because it’s entirely possible that a non-trivial percentage of sour debt is forcibly restructured and thus never makes it into the official NPL figures. 

    Fitch goes on to note what we mentioned earlier this week, namely that the percentage of  loans which are not yet classified as non-performing but which are nonetheless doubtful is much higher than the headline NPL figure and in fact, the ratings agency seems to suggest that some Chinese banks (notably the largest lenders) may be under-reporting their special mention loans:

    Banks in China have remarkably similar NPL ratios and performance trends, which suggests little or no difference in risk appetite despite large differences in ownership and systemic importance, and varying levels of investment in their risk-management systems. However, state banks’ capital adequacy ratios have clearly benefited from having greater access to capital markets due to their much larger franchises. 

     

    There are more notable differences in special-mention and overdue loan trends, implying that loan classification standards, which in principal are on a par with international practice, may not be applied consistently and uniformly across all banks in China. For example, loans overdue for more than three months are not always classified as NPLs at some banks. The only common trend is that all banks’ provision coverage ratios fell during 2014 as the increase in loan provisioning was insufficient to offset the NPL increases, even as NPLs have been partly offset by write-offs and/or disposals.

     

    Interestingly, it appears that when overdue loans are included, the banking sector’s loan loss reserves aren’t sufficient…

    The sector’s provision coverage declined to 232% at end-2014 from 283% a year before, even though the reported NPL ratio only rose marginally to 1.25% from 1.0% over the same period (Fitch-rated banks’ reported NPLs rose another 14% quarter on quarter in 1Q15). This ratio would fall to 66.5% at end-2014 if special-mention loans were included. This means China’s loan-loss reserve, equivalent to 2.9% of loans at end-2014, is insufficient to cover both NPLs (1.25% of loans) and “special-mention” loans (3.1% of loans). 

    …but ultimately it’s irrelevant because between bad assets that are ultimately transferred to AMCs, loans that are channeled through non-bank financial institutions and carried as “investments classified as receivables”, and off-balance sheet financing, nearly 40% of credit risk is carried outside of traditional loans, rendering official NPL data essentially meaningless in terms of assessing the severity of the problem:

    China’s four major AMCs were set up in 1999 to absorb CNY1.4trn in bad assets at par value from China Development Bank and the big four banks (Industrial and Commercial Bank of China, China Construction Bank, Bank of China and Agricultural Bank of China) before their restructuring. NPL disposals to AMCs have increased in recent years as more banks have come under pressure to manage their reported NPL levels…

     

    Banks work with non-bank financial institutions (ie trust companies, securities firms, other financial subsidiaries and/or affiliates to the banks) to channel credit to sectors that have restricted access to traditional banks loans. This is usually called “channel” business in China. The banks may put together these transactions themselves, in which case the borrower could be an existing bank customer, or the non-bank financial institution may help the bank identify profitable lending opportunities. Some of this credit is sold to investors as WMPs, but banks are increasingly holding it on their own books as “financial assets held under repurchase agreements” or “investments classified as receivables”…

     

    The amount of informal loans channelled through non-bank financial institutions and accounted as “investments classified as receivables” has increased from close to zero in 2010 to CNY4.4trn at end-2014 for Fitch-rated commercial banks, equivalent to 8% of total loans. 

     

    Off-balance-sheet financing (I.e. trust loans, entrusted loans, acceptances and bills) accounted for 18% of official TSF stock at end-2014, up from less than 2% just over a decade ago. Of the off-balance-sheet exposure reported at individual banks, this is equivalent to 15% of total assets for state commercial banks and 25% for mid-tier commercial banks, on a weighted average basis. These ratios would be even higher if we included entrusted loans (see Figure 2), although this information is not disclosed at all banks.

    Fitch estimates that around 38% of credit is outside bank loans.

     


    *  *  *

    There are several takeaways here. First — and most obvious — is the fact that accurately assessing credit risk in Chna is extraordinarily difficult. What we do know, is that between forced roll-overs, the practice of carrying channel loans as “investments” and “receivables”, inconsistent application of loan classification norms, and the dramatic increase in off balance sheet financing, the ‘real’ ratio of non-performing loans to total loans is likey far higher than the headline number, meaning that as economic growth grinds consistently lower, the country’s lenders could find themselves in deep trouble especially considering the fact that loan loss reserves aren’t even sufficient to cover NPLs + special mention loans, let alone defaults on a portion of the 38% of credit risk carried off the books.

    The irony though is that while China clearly has a debt problem (282% of GDP), it’s also embarking on a concerted effort to slash policy rates in an effort to drive down real rates and stimulate the flagging economy, meaning the country is caught between the fallout from a shadow banking boom and the need to keep conditions loose because said boom has now gone bust, dragging credit growth down with it.

    In other words, the country is trying to deleverage and re-leverage at the same time.

    A picture perfect example of this is the PBoC’s effort to facilitate a multi-trillion yuan refi program for China’s heavily-indebted local governments. The idea is to swap existing high yield loans (accumulated via shadow banking conduits as localities sought to skirt borrowing limits) for traditional muni bonds that will carry far lower interest rates. So while the program is designed to help local governments deleverage by cutting hundreds of billions from debt servicing costs, the CNY1 trillion in new LGB issuance (the pilot program is capped at 1 trillion yuan) represents a 150% increase in supply over 2014. Those bonds will be pledged as collateral to the PBoC for cheap cash which, if the central bank has its way, will be lent out to the real economy. So again, deleveraging and re-leveraging at the same time.

    This is just one of many ‘rock-hard place’ dynamics confronting the country as it marks a difficult transition from a centrally planned economy based on credit and investment to a consumption-driven model characterized by the liberalization of interest and exchange rates. 



  • 3 Things: The Labor Hoarding Effect

    Submitted by Lance Roberts via STA Wealth Management,

    The Claims Problem

    This morning initial jobless claims plunged to the lowest level in the last 42 years. The chart below shows the weekly claims as compared to the 4-week moving average.

    Jobless-Claims-051415

    Surely, this must be a sign that the economy has turned the proverbial corner as full-employment has finally been obtained. Right? Maybe not.

    As discussed earlier this week:

    "That really is the point that the majority of analysis misses when they point to jobless claims and the U-3 or U-6 unemployment rates. IF, and that is a big IF, employment was as strong as suggested by headlines then wage growth would be rising sharply and economic growth would be running near levels historically associated with 'full employment rates.'

     

    However, the chart below, which is the labor force participation rate of 16-54-year-olds as a percentage of just that age group, is representative of the real problem. Just because the BLS chooses not to "count" those individuals, it DOES NOT mean that they have ceased to exist.(The percentage of workers participating in this age group as has fallen for the past 3 months.)"

    Employment-16-54-051115

    However, I am not suggesting there has been NO JOB growth. There has. However, it has been a function of hiring due to the increases in population growth, which creates incremental demand, rather than an organically driven surge in overall economic growth and prosperity.

    It is there that we find the problem with the reports on jobless claims and the actual economy.

     

    Labor Hoarding

    Since the end of the financial crisis, businesses have been increasing bottom line profitability by massive cost cuts rather than increases in revenue. Of course, one of the highest "costs" to any business is labor. One way that we can measure this view is by looking at corporate profits on a per employee basis. Currently, that ratio is near its highest level on record. (Scale below is inverted for clarity)

    Wages-Profits-Ratio-051215

    The problem that businesses are beginning to face is while they have slashed labor costs to the bone there is a point where businesses simply cannot cut further. At this point businesses have to begin to "hoard" what labor they have, maximize that labor force's productivity (increase output with minimal increases in labor costs) and hire additional labor, primarily temporary, only when demand forces expansion.

    This issue of "labor hoarding" also explains the sharp drop in initial weekly jobless claims. In order to file for unemployment benefits, an individual must have been first terminated, by layoff or discharge, from their previous employer. An individual who "quits" a job cannot, in theory, file for unemployment insurance. However, as companies begin to layoff or discharge fewer workers the number of individuals filing for initial claims decline. This is shown in the chart below which shows the 4-month average of layoff and discharges versus the 4-week average of initial jobless claims.

    JOLTS-Layoffs-JoblessClaims-051415

    However, the mistake is assuming that just because initial claims are declining, the economy and specifically full-time employment is markedly improving. The next chart shows initial jobless claims versus the full-time employment to population ratio.

    Employment-FullTime-Claims-051415

     

    Obscuring Reality

    The issue of "labor hoarding" is an important phenomenon that is likely obscuring the real weakness in the underlying economy. Without an increase in the demand part of the economic equation, businesses will continue resorting to productivity increases to stretch the current labor force farther to protect profitability. The effect is a decline in real median incomes which negatively impacts future demand.

    Personal-Income-Annual-Real-051415

    While massive binges in stock buybacks and accounting gimmicks have continued to blur the actual profitability of businesses, the decline in jobless claims suggests that there is little room from further reductions in body counts. However, that does not mean that businesses must begin rapidly increasing employment and wages.

    The "good news" is that for those that are currently employed – job safety is high. Businesses are indeed hiring, but prefer to hire from the "currently employed" labor pool rather than the unemployed masses. The "bad news" is that for those unemployed, full-time employment remains elusive, and wages remain suppressed due to the high competition for available work.

    The current detachment between the financial markets and the real economy continues. The Federal Reserve's interventions continues to create a wealth effect for market participants. However, it is unfortunate that such a wealth effect is only enjoyed by a small minority of the total population – those at the upper end of the pay scale that have jobs.



  • The Greatest Water Crisis In The History Of The United States

    Submitted by Michael Snyder via The Economic Collapse blog,

    What are we going to do once all the water is gone?  Thanks to the worst drought in more than 1,000 years, the western third of the country is facing the greatest water crisis that the United States has ever seen.  Lake Mead is now the lowest that it has ever been since the Hoover Dam was finished in the 1930s, mandatory water restrictions have already been implemented in the state of California, and there are already widespread reports of people stealing water in some of the worst hit areas.  But this is just the beginning.

    Right now, in a desperate attempt to maintain somewhat “normal” levels of activity, water is being pumped out of the ground in the western half of the nation at an absolutely staggering pace.  Once that irreplaceable groundwater is gone, that is when the real crisis will begin.  If this multi-year drought stretches on and becomes the “megadrought” that a lot of scientists are now warning about, life as we know it in much of the country is going to be fundamentally transformed and millions of Americans may be forced to find somewhere else to live.

    Simply put, this is not a normal drought.  What the western half of the nation is experiencing right now is highly unusual.  In fact, scientists tell us that California has not seen anything quite like this in at least 1,200 years

    Analyzing tree rings that date back to 800 A.D. — a time when Vikings were marauding Europe and the Chinese were inventing gunpowder — there is no three-year period when California’s rainfall has been as low and its temperatures as hot as they have been from 2012 to 2014, the researchers found.

    Much of the state of California was once a desert, and much of it is now turning back into a desert The same thing can also be said about much of Arizona and much of Nevada.  We never really should have built massive, sprawling cities such as Las Vegas and Phoenix in the middle of the desert.  But the 20th century was the wettest century for western North America in about 1,000 years, and we got lulled into a false sense of security.

    At this point, the water level in Lake Mead has hit a brand new record low, and authorities are warning that official water rationing could soon begin for both Arizona and Nevada…

    Lake Mead, the largest reservoir in the US, has hit its lowest level ever. Feeding California, Nevada and Arizona, it can hold a mind-boggling 35 cubic kilometres of water. But it has been many years since it was at capacity, and the situation is only getting worse.

     

    “We’re only at 38 percent full. Lake Mead hasn’t been this low since we were filling it in the 1930s,” said a spokeswoman for the US Bureau of Reclamation in Las Vegas.

     

    If it gets much lower – and with summer approaching and a dwindling snowpack available to replenish it, that looks likely – official rationing will begin for Arizona and Nevada.

    And did you know that the once mighty Colorado River no longer even reaches the ocean?  Over 40 million people depend upon this one river, and because the Colorado is slowly dying an enormous amount of water is being pumped out of the ground in a crazed attempt to carry on with business as usual

    The Colorado River currently supplies water to more than 40 million people from Denver to Los Angeles (as well as Las Vegas, Phoenix, Tucson, San Diego, Salt Lake City, Albuquerque, and Santa Fe—none of which lie directly on the river). According to one recent study, 16 million jobs and $1.4 trillion in annual economic activity across the West depend on the Colorado. As the river dries up, farmers and cities have turned to pumping groundwater. In just the last 10 years, the Colorado Basin has lost 15.6 cubic miles of subsurface freshwater, an amount researchers called “shocking.” Once an official shortage is declared, Arizona farmers will increase their rate of pumping even further, to blunt the effect of an anticipated sharp cutback.

    The same kind of thing is going on in the middle part of the country.  Farmers are pumping water out of the rapidly shrinking Ogallala Aquifer so fast that a major crisis in the years ahead is virtually guaranteed

    Farther east, the Ogallala Aquifer under the High Plains is also shrinking because of too much demand. When the Dust Bowl overtook the Great Plains in the 1930s, the Ogallala had been discovered only recently, and for the most part it wasn’t tapped then to help ease the drought. But large-scale center-pivot irrigation transformed crop production on the plains after World War II, allowing water-thirsty crops like corn and alfalfa for feeding livestock.

     

    But severe drought threatens the southern plains again, and water is being unsustainably drawn from the southern Ogallala Aquifer. The northern Ogallala, found near the surface in Nebraska, is replenished by surface runoff from rivers originating in the Rockies. But farther south in Texas and New Mexico, water lies hundreds of feet below the surface, and does not recharge. Sandra Postel wrote here last month that the Ogallala Aquifer water level in the Texas Panhandle has dropped by up to 15 feet in the past decade, with more than three-quarters of that loss having come during the drought of the past five years. A recent Kansas State University study said that if farmers in Kansas keep irrigating at present rates, 69 percent of the Ogallala Aquifer will be gone in 50 years.

    At one time, most of us took water completely for granted.

    But now that it is becoming “the new oil”, people are starting to look at water much differently.  Sadly, this even includes thieves

    With the state of California mired in its fourth year of drought and a mandatory 25 percent reduction in water usage in place, reports of water theft have become common.

     

    In April, The Associated Press reported that huge amounts of water went missing from the Sacramento-San Joaquin Delta and a state investigation was launched.

     

    The delta is a vital body of water, serving 23 million Californians as well as millions of farm acres, according to the Association for California Water Agencies.

     

    The AP reported in February that a number of homeowners in Modesto, California, were fined $1,500 for allegedly taking water from a canal. In another instance, thieves in the town of North San Juan stole hundreds of gallons of water from a fire department tank.

    In case you are wondering, of course this emerging water crisis is going to deeply affect our food supply.  More than 40 percent of all our fruits and vegetables are grown in the state of California, so this drought is going to end up hitting all of us in the wallet one way or another.

    And this water crisis is not the only major threat that our food supply is facing at the moment.  A horrific outbreak of the bird flu has already killed more than 20 million turkeys and chickens, and the price of eggs has already gone up substantially

    The cost of a carton of large eggs in the Midwest has jumped nearly 17 percent to $1.39 a dozen from $1.19 since mid-April when the virus began appearing in Iowa’s chicken flocks and farmers culled their flocks to contain any spread.

     

    A much bigger increase has emerged in the eggs used as ingredients in processed products like cake mix and mayonnaise, which account for the majority of what Iowa produces. Those eggs have jumped 63 percent to $1.03 a dozen from 63 cents in the last three weeks, said Rick Brown, senior vice president of Urner Barry, a commodity market analysis firm.

    Most of us are accustomed to thinking of the United States as a land of seemingly endless resources, but now we are really starting to bump up against some of our limitations.

    Despite all of our technology, the truth is that we are still exceedingly dependent on the weather patterns that produce rain and snow for us.

    For years, I have been warning that Dust Bowl conditions would be returning to the western half of the country, and thanks to this multi-year drought we can now see it slowly happening all around us.

    And if this drought continues to stretch on, things are going to get worse than this.

    Much worse.



  • Seymour Hersh Slams Establishment Media: "I Am Not Backing Off Anything I Said"

    Authored by Isaac Chotiner, originally posted at Slate.com,

    In a blockbuster 10,000-word story for the London Review of Books this week, longtime New Yorker investigative journalist Seymour Hersh called into question the official account of the American raid that killed Osama Bin Laden, and argued that what is arguably seen as the apex of Barack Obama’s presidency is actually built on a lie.

     

    Hersh’s piece claims that Bin Laden was being held prisoner by the Pakistani military and intelligence service (the ISI), who were using him as a means to control Taliban and al-Qaida elements, and hoping to use him as leverage in their relationship with the United States. According to Hersh, who relied largely on an anonymous intelligence source, the Obama administration found out that Pakistan had Bin Laden, and eventually convinced Pakistani military leaders to allow a raid on the compound where Bin Laden was being held. The plan, Hersh writes, was to say publicly that Bin Laden was killed not in the raid but in a drone strike. The White House, however, supposedly broke this deal because of the political value of making the details of the raid public.

     

    Hersh’s story has been much debated over the past several days, with many calling it into question and (a comparable few) others applauding its willingness to undercut the official narrative. NBC News and the AFP have both backed up small elements of Hersh’s story, although both outlets have also called other elements of his piece into question (and NBC later backed away from its original reporting). And no news source has supported Hersh’s largest claim—that the president lied about the raid.

     

    I spoke to Hersh by phone this week. Here is a transcript of our conversation, which has been slightly condensed and edited for clarity.

    Isaac Chotiner: If the plan until the night of the raid was to use the cover story that he had not been killed in a raid but in a drone strike, then why have the raid at all?  Why not just have the Pakistanis kill him? Why risk Obama’s presidency?

    Seymour Hersh: Of course there is no answer there because I haven’t talked to any of the principals. But I can just give you what the people who were in the process believed to be so, which is that for [Gens.] Pasha and Kayani, the chance of something like that getting leaked out would be devastating. America was then running at about 8 percent popularity in Pakistan, and Bin Laden was running at 60, 70 percent. He was very popular. [Editor’s note: This 2010 opinion poll says that Bin Laden’s popularity was at 18 percent in Pakistan.] You couldn’t just take a chance, because if someone ratted you out—I can only give you a basic theory.

    Chotiner: It just seems like a huge raid with Pakistani complicity brings up just as many problems for the Pakistanis.

    Hersh: If you believe, as a smart guy said to me, if anybody, if anyone didn’t think the president was going to fuck [the Pakistani military] they are out of their mind. He was always going to fuck them.

    Chotiner: OK. In your piece you call into question that the Americans got valuable documents in the raid. But Ayman al-Zawahiri, the current head of al-Qaida, himself seemed to confirm that this was true. How do you handle that contradiction?

    Hersh: I handle it pretty easy. [Laughs] The issue for me is the treasure trove issue. Did the SEALS take out piles of computers? There were claims they found computers and disks and sticks, what do they call those sticks?

    Chotiner: I don’t know.

    Hersh: You’re not as old as I am. You should know that. Anyway, the SEALs mission was to go kill the guy. They did pick up some papers, but most of the papers were delivered by the ISI. He was a prisoner under their control. He wasn’t beaten and could walk around but it was a prison. He couldn’t get out. They kept encouraging him to write stuff. And he did. But I am bothered by the contradictions. [The] president said it was a treasure trove so there had to be a treasure trove. Is it real? I don’t know. It was used in a trial. Is it real? Is it not? I don’t know.

    Chotiner: You seem slightly annoyed that Obama double-crossed the Pakistanis.

    Hersh: Double-crossed is your word.

    Chotiner: OK fine. I want to understand why you seem bothered by that, aside from the lying. Turning our back on the worst elements in Pakistan who we have long nurtured doesn’t seem so bad. We have supported them forever.

    Hersh: Why do we do that?

    Chotiner: Because we see it as being in our own interest.

    Hersh: Well no, we do it for nukes.

    Chotiner: Fine, we see that as being in our interest.

    Hersh: In my experience in the last 30 years, one of the major worries was about the “Islamic bomb,” about Pakistan. If you knew the lengths to which we go, working with the ISI, to make sure some ultranationalist or ultrajihadist doesn’t get [control of nukes].

    Chotiner: Yes, although you could argue that if we hadn’t nurtured these elements for so long, the country would be less of a threat.

    Hersh: You could argue anything.

    Chotiner: I want to—

    Hersh: Swing away fella.

    Chotiner: You sent me—

    Hersh: You probably don’t know that NBC reported, and now they have reported it on one of these dopey afternoon shows with that woman, what’s her name, the NBC woman who claims to have some knowledge of foreign policy, married to Alan Greenspan.

    Chotiner: Andrea Mitchell.

    Hersh: She’s comical. On her show the administration is acknowledging walk-ins but saying the walk-ins aren’t necessarily linked to Bin Laden.

    Chotiner: The AFP piece, which you sent me approvingly, says the same thing, that there is no evidence the walk-in led to Bin Laden, and that the walk-in did not even know the target was Bin Laden.

    Hersh: Uh huh, OK.

    Chotiner: OK but here is my question about journalism, since you have been doing this longer than I have—

    Hersh: Oh poor you, you don’t know anything. It is amazing you can speak the God’s English.

    Chotiner: Are you hoping with this piece to say that you made no mistakes, or that OK there were mistakes because I am getting the ball rolling? You have quoted two pieces very approvingly, from NBC and AFP, that differ from key points in your own story. I want to know how accurate you think your story now is.

    Hersh: [Laughs loudly] Well I will tell you one thing: At one point a copy editor in England confronted me about the SEALs training in Nevada and changed it to Utah, and the line made it because according to her they were sort of the same.

    Chotiner: The AFP piece contradicts your piece but you aren’t running around worried about that.

    Hersh: I sent it approvingly because it crossed my desk and it does say there were walk-ins. [Laughs] You can read it any way you want. The White House has been very clever about this. They have gone after me personally. They don’t like me boo hoo hoo. But they have been very careful to hedge everything, they quote Peter Bergen. Bergen or Berger, is that his name?

    Chotiner: Bergen.

    Hersh: They quote him. He views himself as the trustee of all things Bin Laden.

    Chotiner: I just want to talk to you about your piece and journalism.

    Hersh: What difference does it make what the fuck I think about journalism? I don’t think much of the journalism that I see. If you think I write stories where it is all right to just be good enough, are you kidding? You think I have a cavalier attitude on throwing stuff out? Are you kidding? I am not cavalier about what I do for a living.

    Chotiner: I don’t think you are cavalier. That was not my question.

    Hersh: Whatever it is, it’s an impossible question. It’s almost like you are asking me to say that there are flaws in everybody. Yes. Do I acknowledge that not everybody can be perfect? But I am not backing off anything I said.

    Chotiner: Well let’s talk about sources. A lot of the reporting that got us into the last stupid war was based on bad and often anonymous sources. Is there a problem with journalists having a limited number of sources, just generally speaking? Is this a problem? With unnamed sources—

    Hersh: Are you kidding me? Unnamed sources? You are smarter than that. This is too boring.

    Chotiner: Let me finish my question and then you can yell at me.

    Hersh: I am done yelling.

    Chotiner: Is there some sort of journalistic standard that reporters should try to meet to prevent more errors?

    Hersh: Let me say something to you. There was a practice at the New Yorker that continued at the London Review of Books. The reason I like the LRB is that it isn’t tied down to Americana. It is more open to being … In Europe people think this story makes sense. There is not the quibbling. It is a different approach. By that I mean that the view of America is less cheery abroad but the standards are the same. The people at the London Review knew whom I talked to. It is the same at the New Yorker. David Remnick knows who I talk to. I do have sources, which is a problem for a lot of people that don’t.

    Chotiner: OK well it seems like the upshot of what you are saying, and correct me if this is wrong—

    Hersh: I just said what I said. I don’t want to hear what the upshot is. If you have another question then ask it. This is going on too long. I am too old and too cranky and too tired. I have been doing this fucking thing for a day. I told you, I warned you, that I am really irritable.

    Chotiner: OK so if both places check your sources, and the New Yorker—

    Hersh: Now you are restating it. In Europe it is an easier path. The notion that somehow America—I have one slight layer less. Believe me. I don’t know if you know who Mary-Kay Wilmers is. You probably don’t.

    Chotiner: She is the editor of the LRB.

    Hersh: Do you know how smart she is?

    Chotiner: I have heard stories.

    Hersh: She is fantastic. She is as good as they say. They go gaga over her. She was married to Stephen Frears. She is tenacious. But believe me this piece took a long time to get into print. A lot of questions. A lot of nasty questions.

    Chotiner: OK—

    Hersh: Don’t turn this into some sort of profound anti-American statement.

    Chotiner: It seems like you are hinting the New Yorker rejected it for reasons having to do with politics.

    Hersh: Would you care to hear the truth? Would you care to hear something that didn’t come from Vox, whoever Vox is? I am not sure you are that interested in it. I am doing a book. Within four or five days I hear that there are problems with the [official] OBL story. A lot of problems. And I have good friends in Pakistan. Really good friends. I go there a lot. Hold on, I just walked out of a two-room suite and the fucking movie crew. The fucking movie crew just leaves the desk. God dammit. [A film crew had been in Hersh’s office.] Anyway. First of all, you may get some suggestion of this. Maybe I am not an easy guy.

    Chotiner: I wouldn’t dream of suggesting that.

    Hersh: There was a point with the New Yorker where I thought they should rename the fucking magazine the Seymour Hersh Weekly. David Remnick has his own theories and opinions. He is not cowed by me. We have a lot of fights. We have a lot of disagreements. I don’t find that so shocking. I like him a lot, he is brilliant, he is great. I think he is even a better writer than editor. I have always been a freelancer. I always work for myself.

    Chotiner: I get that.

    Hersh: So, all that happens is I tell him about the story, and his initial approach was to say do a blog item. Go fuck yourself! A blog? I have done a couple blogs when it is 1,000 words but this is worth more. At that point it was very early. So I was on contract for a book and said fuck it … You want to make a lot out of it? David always says he welcomes another view. I am the guy who said fuck it, I will do what I want to do. [Editor’s note: Other news sources have reported that the New Yorker declined to publish a version of the story.]

    [Hersh picks up other phone]: Yeah. Yeah. Oh no, fuck no … I don’t want to do it there! Go fuck—

    Hersh: You there?

    Chotiner: Yes.

    Hersh: Fucking TV interview sets up in the hall of my office building. It’s a lawyer’s building.

    Chotiner: I was just asking—

    Hersh: You want to write about this totally tedious shit? Yes, I am a huge pain in the ass. I am the one that decided to publish it wherever the hell I please. That’s the story. You want to listen to hall gossip about me? Go ahead. [Sarcastic voice] It is so immensely important to so many people to know where I published. I can’t believe it.

    Chotiner: Can I tell you why?

    Hersh: I don’t want to hear why. You think there is a different standard in London?

    Chotiner: I wish you would listen.

    Hersh: All right, maybe I will listen, but I gotta hang up.

    Chotiner: If people here are turning down stories because of certain politics—you yourself said it was easier in Europe—that is a story that should be written.

    Hersh: Now you said the first intelligent thing you have said. If you had asked whether he didn’t run this because he is in love with Obama and all that stuff that people think, no … It is a very good question. Although we have huge disagreements. My children and I have huge disagreements. I have a huge disagreement with my dog. We have a lot of disagreements and there are times when he will call me and I will not answer the call. Oh fuck hold on. He always has said to me he welcomes any information and it was I who said fuck it.

    Chotiner: OK but you have talked about the New Yorker’s Americana and said my question was a good one, so is there something to it?

    Hersh: I think it is a great question.

    Chotiner: So what do you think of it?

    Hersh: I just told you what I think. In the case of the Bin Laden story, he is open for anything. It was I who made the decision.

    Chotiner: I feel like you are telling me two different things. One is that you get less pressure in Europe, and the other is that this story would have been fine at the New Yorker.

    Hersh: So fine, I am glad you are confused. Write whichever one makes you happy.

    Chotiner: OK.

    Hersh: I don’t mean to yell at you but I feel good doing it. Goodbye.



  • McCain Joins Ukraine Advisory Committee Headed By Georgia's Fugitive Ex-President

    John McCain — everyone’s favorite possibly senile senator who Vladimir Putin thinks may have gone nuts in ‘Nam and who has had quite a difficult time shaking rumors about his past dealings with “brave” Syrian ‘freedom fights’ who may have gone on to become ISIS militants — is ‘back in the (former) USSR.’

    Earlier this year, McCain expressed his disappointment in the glacial pace at which Washington is moving on the path to World War III, saying he is “ashamed” of the President, the country, and of himself, for not “doing more to help those people.” By “those people” McCain meant Ukrainians and by “more to help” he meant sending lethal aid to Kiev so the Ukrainian army can turn the on-again-off-again “conflict” with Russia into a proper war that self-respecting hawks can be proud of.

    McCain is no stranger to Ukrainian politics. In 2013 he spoke to a crowd of protesters in the wake of then-President Viktor Yanukovich’s (who was once the victim of an attempted assassination-by-egg and who famously fled the country amid widespread protests last year) decision to lean Russian on trade, telling the crowd that “the free world is with you, America is with you, I am with.” It appears McCain is taking that pledge quite literally because as you can see from the following official release from the Ukrainian government, the Senator has been added to Poroshenko’s International Advisory Board. 

    APPROVED

    Decree of President of Ukraine on May 13, 2015

     

    REGULATIONS of the International Advisory Council reform International Advisory Board Reform (hereinafter – the Council) is a consultative body under the President of Ukraine, whose main task is to provide suggestions and recommendations for the implementation of reforms in Ukraine based on the best international practices.

     

    COMPOSITION

    International Advisory Board Reform

     

    Miheil Saakashvili – President of Georgia in 2004-2007 and 2008 -2013 years, chairman (by consent)

     

    Carl Bildt – Prime Minister of the Kingdom of Sweden in 1991 – 1994 years, Minister of Foreign Affairs of the Kingdom of Sweden in 2006 – 2014 years (by consent)

     

    Elmar Brok – Chairman of the European Parliament Committee on Foreign Affairs (the agreement)

     

    Mikulas Dzurinda – Prime Minister of the Slovak Republic in 1998 – 2006 years (by consent)

    Andrius Kubilius – Prime Minister of the Republic of Lithuania in 1999 – 2000 and 2008 – 2012 years (by consent)

     

    John McCain – United States Senator, Chairman of the Committee on Armed Services of the Senate of the United States (by consent)

     

    Anders Aslund – Senior Fellow, Peterson Institute for International Economics (United States), Professor (by consent)

     

    Jacek Saryusz-Wolski – Member of the European Parliament (by consent).

    Note that former Georgian President Miheil Saakashvili also made the list, which is notable because .. well, he’s an international fugitive. Here’s RT:

    Saakashvili has been appointed as head of the new advisory group, says the statement on Ukraine’s presidential website…

     

    Back in February Saakashvili was appointed as a non-staff adviser to Poroshenko. The ex-Georgian president, who was in power from 2004 to 2013, faces numerous charges at home, including embezzlement of over $5 million, corruption and brutality against protesters during demonstrations in 2007. Georgia’s Chief Prosecutor’s Office launched proceedings to indict Saakashvili and place him on the international most wanted list, but Kiev refused to hand over the fugitive president, despite an existing extradition agreement between Ukraine and Georgia.

     

    Saakashvili is known for his strong anti-Russian stance, which garnered heavy US support. In August 2008 during his term in office Georgia launched an offensive against South Ossetia, killing dozens of civilians and Russian peacekeepers stationed in the republic. Georgia’s shelling of Tskhinval prompted Russia to conduct a military operation to fend off the offensive. Despite Saakashvili’s claims that the conflict was “Russian aggression,” the 2010 EU Independent Fact Finding Mission Report ruled that Tbilisi was responsible for the attack…

     

    Following the new Kiev authorities’ attempt to suppress dissent in the east of the country and Crimea’s ascension into the Russian Federation, McCain became the main engine of lobbying for lethal arms supplies to Ukrainian forces to “defend themselves” and Europe from “Russian aggression.”


     

    “The Ukrainian people don’t want US or Western troops to fight for them; they are simply asking for the right tools to defend themselves and their country,” he said late last month at a hearing on US security policy in Europe. “Russia’s invasion and dismemberment of Ukraine should remind everyone of the true nature of Putin’s ambitions and the fragility of peace in Europe.”

    Yes, the “fragility of peace in Europe,” which is of course made infinitely more fragile by the type of snap drills, troop buildups and NATO sabre rattling that the good senator so ardently supports. But as anxious as McCain may be to do his part to help the “poor” people of Ukraine by plunging them into a bloody civil war, he’s still keen to express the proper deference to ethics, the law, and “that kind of stuff“: 

    “I was asked to do it both by Ukraine and Saakashvili and I said I would be inclined to do it, but I said I needed to look at all the nuances of it, whether it’s legal under our ethics and all that kind of stuff.”

    We’re sure the makeup of this new “advisory council” will do wonders to promote peace in Eastern Europe. And as if on cue (via Bloomberg just hours ago):

    Senate Armed Services Cmte approves bill on 22-4 vote, says Sen. Jack Reed, ranking Democrat on cmte.

     

    Bill would preserve A-10 close-air combat plane; authorizes arms to Ukraine, McCain says.

     



  • Yet Another Chart That Whimpers "Recession"

    Submitted by Charles Hugh-Smith via OfTwoMinds blog,

    It's worthwhile recalling that mainstream economists, the Federal Reserve, government agencies and the mainstream financial media all deny the economy is in recession until it falls off a cliff. 

     
    Back in March I published unambiguously recessionary charts of new orders and per capita energy consumption: New Orders Look Recessionary (March 9, 2015)
     
     
    Zero Hedge recently published an overview of charts that also spell recession: The US Is In Recession According To These 7 Charts.
     
    Mish has provided evidence that a recession has already started: Household Spending Growth Expectations Plunge; Recession Already Started?
     
    For those who want yet more quantitative evidence of recession, here is another chart, courtesy of longtime contributor B.C. This is a chart of the Chicago Fed's National Financial Conditions Index (NFCI):
     
    Because U.S. economic and financial conditions tend to be highly correlated, we also present an alternative index, the adjusted NFCI (ANFCI). This index isolates a component of financial conditions uncorrelated with economic conditions to provide an update on financial conditions relative to current economic conditions.
     
    The chart also displays the spread between Baa-rated corporate bond yields (Baa bonds are just above junk bonds, which are typically rated BB or lower) and 10-year Treasury bond yields.
     
    Widening spreads between corporate bonds and Treasuries are associated with recessions, as are ANFCI readings above zero. The current reading is .20, a level that correlates to deteriorating financial conditions and the early stages of recessions.
     
    The more dependent the economy is on financialization, the greater the impact of deteriorating financial conditions. To a large degree, the U.S. economy's apparent strength is an illusion based on extremes of financialization: rampant Fed monetization of Treasury debt and mortgages, extremes of leverage and speculation that have inflated asset bubbles that have created a wealth effect that is limited to the top 10% of households, and is highly concentrated in the top .01% of households.
     
     
     
    Here is the ANFCI and the Fed Funds rate, which has been near-zero for years. What can we say about an economy that requires zero-interest rates as the New Normal? How can anyone claim this is a healthy, robust economy if tepid expansion depends entirely on unprecedented zero rates, unprecedented Federal Reserve monetization/asset purchases and a highly asymmetric wealth effect that has widened income and wealth inequality?
     
     
    At this juncture, it's worthwhile recalling that mainstream economists, the Federal Reserve, government agencies and the mainstream financial media all deny the economy is in recession until it falls off a cliff. Only after a recession can no longer be denied will the organs of propaganda concede that the economy is indeed mired in a recession.
     
    When the organs of propaganda finally concede that the economy is in recession, they inevitably fight the last war: whatever worked in the past is repeated, even though the next recession will be an entirely new financial battlefield. Repeating what worked in late 2008-early 2009 will fail, and fail catastrophically, because conditions have changed.



  • Caught In The Act: Government Hackers

    But… what difference does it make…

     

     

    Source: Townhall



  • Miami Beach Cops Caught Exchanging 100s Of Racist, Pornographic Emails

    Just as race relations in America leave the front-pages for a day – as the news cycle briefly and sadly focuses on Amtrak – Miami Beach police department drags the nation back into debate. According to Miami-Dade State Attorney Katherine Fernandez Rundle, more than a dozen Miami Beach Police officers exchanged numerous racist and pornographic emails. "This is a very sad day for Miami Beach," Mayor Levine concluded, after Rundle explained that the officers are involved in 540 cases, with about 30% of them involving black defendants.

     

    Coming just months after four Fort Lauderdale Police officers lost their jobs over a racist video and racist text messages (where dozens of cases linked to those officers have been dropped), NBC Miami reports,

    "Minorities and women were being demeaned in these emails that were sent between the officers, nude photographs were passed around and emails portraying offensive sexual acts were disseminated," Fernandez Rundle said.

     

    Prosecutors are reviewing the cases of 16 officers who sent or received the emails, Fernandez Rundle said.

     

    The officers are involved in 540 cases, with about 30 percent of them involving black defendants.

     

    "Our job and our commitment is to ensure that we will do everything that we can to make sure that we do not prosecute cases that have been tainted by racial prejudice and racial insensitivity," Fernandez Rundle said.

     

    Chief Oates said the major senders of the emails were a major who left the department in July and a captain who had been demoted and was fired Thursday morning.

     

    "This is a very sad day for Miami Beach," Mayor Levine said. "I can assure the public that we've made all the necessary steps, and will continue to do so, because situations like this we will never sweep under the rug."

     

    According to Oates, most of the material was sent between 2010 and 2012. Oates joined the department in June 2014 and found out about the material in July 2014.

    About one million emails were examined and about 230 were found to be offensive, Oates said. Hundreds of pornographic images were given to the National Center for Missing and Exploited Children to ensure none of the images were of minors, Oates said.

    m Bpd Racist Emails

    *  *  *

    As Chief Oates concludes, "at the very top, there was a tolerance for bad behavior," placing the blame on his predecessor, former Police Chief Ray Martinez who, as MiamiNewTimes reports, retired last year and took a cushy gig as the head of security for Ultra Music Festival.



  • Market Melts Up To Record Highs, Bonds & Bullion Bid

    Record Highs… why the f##k not!!

    Before we get started, this…WTF!!

     

    OK – having got that idiocy off our chest. It is OPEX tomorrow, BATS Options and NYSE Arca broke this morning and volume was terrible… so what more do you expect than this!

     

    It seems pretty clear that there is only one thing that matters now… keeping The Dow in positive territory for 2015…

     

     

    VIX banged back under 13… (it has the 'give the market the finger' pattern to it)

     

    And the gap open cash markets did not look back..

     

    On the week, Trannies weak – rest all green again now…

     

    Bonds & Stocks decoupled today…(or recoupled with the old normal)

     

    Bonds rallied on the day but Treasury yields majorly diverging on the week – 2Y -2bps, 30Y +16bps!

     

    Curves are different for now…

     

    The USDollar retraced its early losses to end the day almost unchanged – USDJPY absolutely dead.

     

    Crude and copper slipped lower as precious metals boomed once again today…

     

    Crude closed back below $60…

     

    But it was gold & Silver that really ripped again

     

    Wheat soared… its biggest day in almost 6 months…

     

    Charts: Bloomberg

    Bonus Chart: AVP WTF

     

    Bonus Bonus Chart: SHAK Shook



  • President Obama Explains How Well The Meeting With Persian Gulf "Allies" Went – Live Feed

    This should be good… as we explained earlier, analysts have pointed to a growing rift between the Obama administration and the Gulf’s Sunni states over the emerging nuclear deal with Iran as a chief reason for the snub, though the Saudi king, as well as his Bahraini counterpart, have denied such assertions.

     

     

    President Obama Q&A due to start around 1730ET…(after a statement)



  • Ray Dalio: "If You Don't Own Gold, You Know Neither History Nor Economics"

    Bridgewater's Ray Dalio explains in under 120 seconds why everyone should allocate some of their portfolio to gold:

    "If you dont own gold…there is no sensible reason other than you dont know history or you dont know the economics of it…"

     

    Of course, few 'status quo' believers will pay heed to the $150 billion AUM fund manager, despite his imploring everyone that to be successful, one must "Think Independently, Stay Humble"



  • Even The FDIC Admits It's Not Ready For The Next Banking Crisis

    Submitted by Simon Black via Sovereign Man blog,

    We have entered a most bizarre and unprecedented age in the financial system where there’s risk in just about everything that we do.

    Indiscriminately investing in stocks at their all-time highs carries enormous risk, and financial history is unkind to people who fail to learn that lesson.

    To buy bonds, on the other hand, means loaning money to insolvent governments at rates that are either below inflation or even outright negative.

    Real estate markets in many parts of the world are right back at the frothy highs they experienced prior to the last financial crisis.

    And if Pablo Picasso is any indicator, even an asset class like fine art is booming at all-time highs.

    The normal approach in an era of so much financial risk would be to do nothing; gather your capital, sit on the sidelines, and wait for a crash.

    Yet now the act of doing nothing and holding your money in a bank also brings an orgy of risk.

    Most banks in the West are extremely illiquid, and are in many cases insolvent. But few people ever give thought to the financial condition of their bank.

    In the United States, for example, people are indoctrinated almost from birth that banks are safe and somehow infallible.

    Banks inter themselves in the most expensive locations with ornate lobbies and cornerstones that proudly inform the world they are backed by the full faith and credit of the United States government.

    But that barely counts given that the US government is itself insolvent with a negative equity of minus $17.7 trillion according to their own financial statements.

    Then there’s the FDIC, which insures deposits in the US banking system.

    In its 2014 annual report the FDIC itself points out that its whole insurance fund constitutes just a fraction of a percent of all deposits in the system, and that its ‘reserve ratio’ is just 1.01%.

    With a reserve so low, the FDIC not only lacks any meaningful teeth to insure the system, but it actually fails to meet the minimum level that is required by law.

    This quasi-government regulatory agency fails to meet the government regulatory requirement and is in worse shape than the banks that it’s supposed to insure.

    Perhaps even more important, the FDIC doesn’t expect to meet this statutory minimum until at least 2020.

    To me this begs an obvious question. Do we really have another 5+ years before there’s another major crisis in the US banking system?

    Most US banks today are just as illiquid as they were before the crisis, holding just a tiny portion of deposits in reserve and gambling away the rest.

    And the most popular place that they invest their customers’ deposits today is exactly the same as in 2008: mortgage-backed securities.

    Curiously, the FDIC’s reserves today are actually far lower than they were prior to the crisis.

    On top of that, back then the FDIC only insured $100,000 worth of your deposits per financial institution. Now it’s $250,000.

    So essentially the FDIC is on the hook to pay more than twice as much money to depositors. Yet it has a lower reserve to support an even larger system that is up to the same precarious practices as before.

    This doesn’t exactly inspire confidence.

    But don’t take my word for it.

    In a recent announcement, the FDIC tells us how banks have grown far larger and even more complex since 2008, and that “[s]uch trends have not only continued, they accelerated as a result of the crisis.”

     

    The FDIC goes on to suggest that its current tools and business model are “not sufficient to mitigate the complexities of large institution failures.”

     

    But even though they’re not equipped to handle it, they’re not entirely sure what to do.

     

    That’s why the FDIC is “seeking comment on what additional regulatory action should be taken. . .”

     

    In other words, they’re asking the public for suggestions about how to handle a major US bank failure. Hardly encouraging.

    Bottom line– your bank is potentially in the same boat it was in 2008. The FDIC is worse off. And the federal government is totally insolvent.

    These are not risks you should assume away. Give great care to the decision of where you hold your savings.

    And definitely look abroad.

    There’s an entire laundry list of offshore banks that are in great financial condition and located in strong, stable foreign countries.

    It’s hard to imagine that you’ll be worse off for holding a portion of your savings in a country with no debt at a healthy bank that’s 5x more capitalized and 10x more liquid than where you currently bank.



  • "Obama's Tax-The-Rich Plan Is Futile" Druckenmiller Warns, America's Aging Population Is A "Massive, Massive Problem"

    "Young people are not going to be talking about cutting back," exclaims billionaire hedge fund manager Stanley Druckenmiller, ominously concluding "there will be nothing to cut back." The reason he is so doom-full about the future – an aging population will present a "massive, massive problem" for the U.S. in 15 years – as Bloomberg reports, because of demographics, "we're just using more and more of society’s resources to fend for the old people," warning that Obama's plans to tax the rich to pay for more social services for the poor would be futile.

    “We’re going to go from five workers of working age supporting every elderly person to two and a half because of demographics,” said Druckenmiller.

     

    “We’re just using more and more of society’s resources to fend for the old people.”

    As Bloomberg reports, Druckenmiller, 61, has argued for several years that the mushrooming costs of Social Security, Medicare and Medicaid will bankrupt the nation’s youth and eventually result in a crisis worse than the financial meltdown of 2008. The government will have to reduce payments to the elderly, he said at the event.

    …an aging population will present a “massive, massive problem” for the U.S. in 15 years.

     

    “The young people are not going to be talking about cutting back,” Druckenmiller said Wednesday night in New York at an event hosted by Addepar, a technology company that provides software to financial advisers, fund managers and family offices. “There will be nothing to cut back.”

    *  *  *

    Druckenmiller also had some comments on the share buyback debacle in US equity markets…

    Druckenmiller criticized companies for borrowing money to pursue corporate buybacks.

     

    “I think it’s nuts,” he said. “If you’re running a business for the long term, the last thing you should be doing is borrowing money to buy back stock.”

    Finally, Druckenmiller concludes,

    President Barack Obama’s proposals to tax the rich to pay for more social services for the poor would be futile.

     

    “That’s not where the money is,” he said, instead pointing to spending on entitlements.

    But then again – when did futility stop the governmenmt?



Digest powered by RSS Digest

America’s Achilles’ Heel

Dmitry Orlov

Last Saturday, a massive Victory Parade was held in Moscow commemorating the 70-year anniversary of the surrender of Nazi Germany to the Red Army and the erection of the Soviet flag atop the Reichstag in Berlin. There were a few unusual aspects to this parade, which I would like to point out, because they conflict with the western official propaganda narrative.

First, it wasn’t just Russian troops that marched in the parade: the troops of 10 other nations took part in it, including the Chinese honor guard and a contingent of Grenadiers from India. Dignitaries from these nations were present in the stands, and the Chinese President Xi Jinping and his wife were seated next to President Vladimir Putin, who, in his speech at the start of the parade, warned against attempts to create a unipolar world—sharp words aimed squarely at the United States and its western allies.

Second, a look at the military hardware that rolled through Red Square or flew over it would indicate that, short of an outright nuclear mutual self-annihilation, there isn’t much that the US military could throw at Russia that Russia couldn’t neutralize.

It would appear that American attempts to isolate Russia have resulted in the exact opposite: if 10 nations, among them the world’s largest economy, comprising some 3 billion people, are willing to set aside their differences and stand shoulder to shoulder with the Russians to counter American attempts at global dominance, then clearly the American plan isn’t going to work at all. Western media focused on the fact that western leaders declined to attend the celebration, either in a fit of pique or because so ordered by the Obama administration, but this only highlights their combined irrelevance, be it in defeating Hitler, or in commemorating his defeat 70 years later. Nevertheless, in his speech Putin specifically thanked the French, the British and the Americans for their contribution to the war effort. I am sorry that he left out the Belgians, who had been so helpful at Dunkirk.

One small detail about the parade is nevertheless stunning: Defense Minister Sergei Shoigu, a Tuvan Buddhist and one of the most respected Russian leaders, who presided over the Emergencies Ministry prior to becoming the Defense Minister, did something none of his predecessors ever did: at the beginning of the ceremony, he made the sign of the cross, in the Russian Orthodox manner. This simple gesture transformed the parade from a display of military pomp to a sacred ritual. Then followed the slow march with two flags side by side: the Russian flag, and the Soviet flag that flew on top of the Reichstag in Berlin on Victory Day 70 years ago. The march was accompanied by a popular World War II song? Its title? “The Sacred War.” The message is clear: the Russian military, and the Russian people, have put themselves in God’s hands, to do God’s work, to once again sacrifice themselves to save the world from the ravages of an evil empire.

If you try to dismiss any of this as Russian state propaganda, then here is something else you should be aware of. Did you hear of the spontaneously organized procession in which, after the official parade, half a million people marched through Moscow with portraits of their relatives who died in World War II? The event was called “The Eternal Regiment” (??????????? ????). Similar processions took place in many cities throughout Russia, and the total number of participants is estimated at around 4 million. Western press either panned it or billed it as an attempt by Putin to whip up anti-western sentiment. Now that sort of “press coverage,” my fellow space travelers, is pure propaganda! No, it was an enthusiastic, spontaneous outpouring of genuine public sentiment. If you think about it just a tiny bit, nothing on this scale could be contrived artificially, and the thought that millions of people would prostitute their dead for propaganda purposes is, frankly, both cynical and insulting.

* * *

Instead of collapsing quietly, the US has decided to pick a fight with Russia. It appears to have already lost the fight, but a question remains: How many more countries will the US manage to destroy before the reality of its inevitable defeat and disintegration finally catches up with it?

As Putin said last summer when speaking at the Seliger youth forum, “I get the feeling that no matter what the Americans touch, they end up with Libya or Iraq.” Indeed, the Americans have been on a tear, destroying one country after another. Iraq has been dismembered, Libya is a no-go zone, Syria is a humanitarian disaster, Egypt is a military dictatorship executing a program of mass imprisonment. The latest fiasco is Yemen, where the pro-American government was recently overthrown, and the American nationals who found themselves trapped there had to wait for the Russians and the Chinese to extract them and send them home. But it was the previous American foreign policy fiasco, in the Ukraine, which prompted the Russians, along with the Chinese, to signal that the US has taken a step too far, and that all further steps will result in automatic escalation.

The Russian plan, along with China, India, and much of the rest of the world, is to prepare for war with the US, but to do everything possible to avoid it. Time is on their side, because with each passing day they become stronger while America grows weaker. But while this process runs its course, America might “touch” a few more countries, turning them into a Libya or an Iraq. Is Greece next on the list? What about throwing under the bus the Baltic states (Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania), which are now NATO members (i.e., sacrificial lambs)? Estonia is a short drive from Russia’s second-largest city, St. Petersburg, it has a large Russian population, it has a majority-Russian capital city, and it has a rabidly anti-Russian government. Of those four facts, just one is incongruous. Is it being set up to self-destruct? Some Central Asian republics, in Russia’s ticklish underbelly, might be ripe for being “touched” too.

There is no question that the Americans will continue to try to create mischief around the world, “touching” vulnerable, exploitable countries, for as long as they can. But there is another question that deserves to be asked: Do the Americans “touch” themselves? Because if they do, then the next candidate for extreme makeover into a bombed-out wasteland might be the United States itself. Let’s consider this option.

As the events in Ferguson, and more recently in Baltimore, have indicated, the tensions between African-Americans and the police have escalated to a point where explosions become likely. The American “war on drugs” has been essentially a war on young black (and Latino) men; about a third of young blacks are behind bars. They also run a high risk of being shot by the police. To be fair, the police also run a high risk of getting shot by young black males, causing them to be jumpy and to overreact. Given the gradually collapsing economy—close to 100 million working-age Americans are unemployed (“outside the labor force,” if you wish to split hairs)—it would seem that for an ever-increasing chunk of the population cooperating with the authorities is no longer a useful strategy: you get locked up or killed anyway, but you get none of the temporary benefits that come from ignoring the law.

There is an interesting asymmetry in the American media’s ability to block out information about civil unrest and insurgency: if it is happening overseas, then news of it can be carefully calibrated or suppressed outright. (Did American television tell you about the recent resumption of shelling of civilian districts by the Ukrainian military? Of course not!) This is possible because Americans are notoriously narcissistic and largely indifferent to the rest of the world, of which most of them know little, and what they think they know is often wrong. But if the unrest is within the US itself, then the various media outlets find themselves competing against each other in who can sensationalize it better, in order to get more viewership, and more advertising revenue. The mainstream media in the US is tightly controlled by a handful of large conglomerates, making it one big monopoly on information, but at the level of selling advertising market principles still prevail.

Thus there is the potential for a positive feedback loop: more civil unrest generates more sensationalized news coverage, which in turn amplifies the civil unrest, which further sensationalizes the news coverage. And there is a second positive feedback loop as well: the more civil unrest there is, the more the police overreact in trying to control the situation, thereby generating more rage, amplifying the civil unrest. These two positive feedback loops can continue to run out of control for a while, but the end result, in all such recent incidents, is the same: the introduction of National Guard troops and the imposition of curfew and martial law.

The swift introduction of the military might seem a bit odd, considering that most police departments, even small-town ones, have been heavily militarized in recent years, and even the security people at some school districts now have military vehicles and machine guns. But the progression is a natural one. On the one hand, when people who habitually resort to brute force find that it isn’t working, they naturally assume that this is because they aren’t using enough of it. On the other hand, if the criminal justice system is already a travesty and a shambles, then why not just cut through the red tape and impose martial law?

There is an awful lot of weapons of all sorts in the US already, and more will come in all the time as the US is forced to close overseas military bases due to lack of funds. And they will probably get used, for the same reason and in the same fashion that red bricks came to be used in Boston. You see, plenty of red bricks kept coming into Boston aboard British ships, where they were used as ballast for the return trip. This created the impetus to do something with them. But putting up brick buildings is a difficult, demanding process, especially if laborers are always drunk. And so the solution was to use the bricks to pave sidewalks—something one can do on one’s hands and knees. Similarly with the military hardware sloshing back into the US from abroad. It will be used, because it’s there; and it will be used in the stupidest way possible: shooting at one’s own people.

But bad things happen to militaries when they are ordered to shoot at their own people. It is one thing to shoot at “towel-heads” in a far-away land; it is quite another to be ordered shoot at somebody who could be your own brother down the street from where you grew up. Such orders result in fragging (shooting your own officers), in refusal to follow orders, and in attempts to stand up for the other side.

And that’s where things get interesting. Because, you see, if you shoot at, imprison, and otherwise abuse a defenseless civilian population long enough, what you get in response is an armed insurgency. The place insurgencies are easiest to organize is in prison. For instance, ISIS, or the Islamic Caliphate, was masterminded by people who had previously worked for Saddam Hussein, while they were imprisoned by the Americans. They took this opportunity to work out an efficient organizational structure and, upon release, found each other and got down to work. Having a third of young American blacks locked up gives them all the opportunity they need to organize an effective insurgency.

To be effective, an insurgency needs lots of weapons. Here, again, there is a procedure for acquiring military technology that has become almost routine. What weapons are being used by ISIS? Why, of course, American ones, which the Americans provided to the regime in Baghdad, and which ISIS took as trophies when the Iraqi army refused to fight and ran away. And what weapons are being used by the Houthi rebels in Yemen? Why, of course, the American ones, which the Americans provided to the now overthrown pro-American regime there. And what are some of the weapons being used by the Syrian regime of Bashar Assad? Why, of course, American ones, sold to them by the Ukrainian government, which got them from the Americans. There is a pattern here: it seems that whenever Americans arm, train and equip an army, that army stands a really big chance of simply melting away, with the weapons falling into the hands of those who want to use them against American interests. It is hard to see why this same pattern wouldn’t hold once the US places much of itself under military occupation.

And that’s where things get really interesting: a well-armed, well-organized insurgency composed of thoroughly radicalized, outraged people who have absolutely nothing to lose and are fighting for their home turf and their families squaring off against a demoralized, defeated US military that has just failed spectacularly in every country it “touched.”

They say that “You can’t fight city hall.” But what if you have a tank battalion that can control four intersections all around city hall, turrets pointed in all directions, firing at anything that moves? And what if you have enough infantry to go around and ring the doorbells of all the key city hall bureaucrats? Wouldn’t that change one’s odds of victory in fighting city hall?

The US might get to “touch” a few more countries before this scenario unfolds, but it seems likely that (excepting the possibility of all-out war) eventually America will “touch” itself, and then all those countries whose troops marched through Red Square last Saturday won’t have America to kick around any more.

Today’s News May 14, 2015

  • Chinese Iron Ore Prices Plunge After CISA Warns Of Persistent Overcapacity

    Having rebounded along with practically every other risk-asset class in the world over the last month or so, Chinese Iron Ore futures are collapsing tonight. Despite the promise of Chinese LTROs expanding credit (just like they didn’t in Europe), iron ore prices are down around 4% – the biggest drop in over 2 years – to as low as CNY419 (or around $62) as China Iron & Steel Association warns that overcapacity in the seaborne iron ore market will persist through to at least 2019 as the world’s largest suppliers expand production further.

    Iron Ore prices are down the most in over 2 years…

     

    “Low-cost seaborne supply entering the market is not only displacing high-cost Chinese production, but also high-cost seaborne supply,” Alan Chirgwin, BHP iron ore marketing vice president, told the conference. Supply will rise by about 100 million to 110 million tons this year, exceeding modest demand growth of about 30 million to 40 million tons, he said.

    Major producers remain intent on expansions and a battle for market share is under way as miners attempt to reduce their costs faster than prices are dropping, according to Credit Suisse Group AG.

     

    Source: Bloomberg



  • The US Is In Recession According To These 7 Charts

    The evidence continues to mount…

    "Most since Lehman" has become the new meme for macro-economic data in the US as day after day brings another lacklustre superlative to be dismissed with some excuse by the cognoscenti of sell-side economists…

     

     Of course, that is aside from anything related to aggregate jobs that is spewed by the government's official ministries of truth… (do not look at this chart)

    *  *  *

    So here are seven charts that scream "recession" is here…

    Retail Sales are weak – extremely weak. Retail Sales have not dropped this much YoY outside of a recession…

     

    And if Retail Sales are weak, then Wholesalers are seeing sales plunge at a pace not seen outside of recession…

     

    Which means Factory Orders are collapsing at a pace only seen in recession…

     

    And Durable Goods New Orders are negative YoY once again – strongly indicative of a recessionary environment…

     

    Which is not going to improve anytime soon since inventories have not been this high relative to sales outside of a recession

     

    In fact, the last time durable goods orders fell this much, The Fed launched QE3 – indicating clearly why they desperately want to raise rates imminently… in order to have some non-ZIRP/NIRP ammo when the next recession hits.

    *  *  *

    And just in case you figured that if domestic prosperity won't goose the economy, Chinese and Japanese stimulus means the rest of the world will save us… nope!! Export growth is now negative… as seen in the last 2 recessions.

     

    And deflationary pressures (Import Prices ex-fuel) are washing upon America's shores at a pace not seen outside of a recession

     

    *  *  *

    But apart from that, given that US equities are at record highs, everything must be great in the US economy…

     

    Wait a minute.



  • "We The People" Need To Circle The Wagons: The Government Is On The Warpath

    Submitted by John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    “The government is merely a servant?merely a temporary servant; it cannot be its prerogative to determine what is right and what is wrong, and decide who is a patriot and who isn’t. Its function is to obey orders, not originate them.” ? Mark Twain

    How many Americans have actually bothered to read the Constitution, let alone the first ten amendments to the Constitution, the Bill of Rights (a quick read at 462 words)?

    Take a few minutes and read those words for yourself—rather than having some court or politician translate them for you—and you will be under no illusion about where to draw the line when it comes to speaking your mind, criticizing your government, defending what is yours, doing whatever you want on your own property, and keeping the government’s nose out of your private affairs.

    In an age of overcriminalization, where the average citizen unknowingly commits three crimes a day, and even the most mundane activities such as fishing and gardening are regulated, government officials are constantly telling Americans what not to do. Yet it was not always this way. It used to be “we the people” telling the government what it could and could not do. Indeed, the three words used most frequently throughout the Bill of Rights in regards to the government are “no,” “not” and “nor.”

    Compare the following list of “don’ts” the government is prohibited from doing with the growing list of abuses to which “we the people” are subjected on a daily basis, and you will find that we have reached a state of crisis wherein the government is routinely breaking the law and violating its contractual obligations.

    For instance, the government is NOT allowed to restrict free speech, press, assembly or the citizenry’s ability to protest and correct government wrongdoing. Nevertheless, the government continues to prosecute whistleblowers, persecute journalists, cage protesters, criminalize expressive activities, crack down on large gatherings of citizens mobilizing to voice their discontent with government policies, and insulate itself and its agents from any charges of wrongdoing (or what the courts refer to as “qualified immunity”).

     

    The government may NOT infringe on a citizen’s right to defend himself. Nevertheless, in many states, it’s against the law to carry a concealed weapon (gun, knife or even pepper spray), and the average citizen is permitted little self-defense against militarized police officers who shoot first and ask questions later.

     

    The government may NOT enter or occupy a citizen’s house without his consent (the quartering of soldiers). Nevertheless, government soldiers (i.e., militarized police) carry out more than 80,000 no-knock raids on private homes every year, while maiming children, killing dogs and shooting citizens.

     

    The government may NOT carry out unreasonable searches and seizures on the citizenry or their possessions. NOR can government officials issue warrants without some evidence of wrongdoing (probable cause). Unfortunately, what is unreasonable to the average American is completely reasonable to a government agent, for whom the ends justify the means. In such a climate, we have no protection against roadside strip searches, blood draws, DNA collection, SWAT team raids, surveillance or any other privacy-stripping indignity to which the government chooses to subject us.

     

    The government is NOT to deprive anyone of life, liberty or property without due process. Nevertheless, the government continues to incarcerate tens of thousands of Americans whose greatest crime is being poor and brown-skinned. The same goes for those who are put to death, some erroneously, by a system weighted in favor of class and wealth.

     

    The government may NOT take private property for public use without just compensation. Nevertheless, under the guise of the “greater public interest,” the government often hides behind eminent domain laws in order to allow megacorporations to tear down homes occupied by less prosperous citizens in order to build high-priced resorts and shopping malls.

     

    Government agents may NOT force a citizen to testify against himself. Yet what is the government’s extensive surveillance network that spies on all of our communications but a thinly veiled attempt at using our own words against us?

     

    The government is NOT allowed to impose excessive fines on the citizenry or inflict cruel and unusual punishments upon them. Nevertheless Americans are subjected to egregious fines and outrageous punishments for minor traffic violations, student tardiness and absence from school, and generally having the misfortune of being warm bodies capable of filling privatized, profit-driven jails.

     

    The government is NOT permitted to claim any powers that are not expressly granted to them by the Constitution. This prohibition has become downright laughable as the government continues to claim for itself every authority that serves to swell its coffers, cement its dominion, and expand its reach.

    Despite what some special interest groups have suggested to the contrary, the problems we’re experiencing today did not arise because the Constitution has outlived its usefulness or become irrelevant, nor will they be solved by a convention of states or a ratification of the Constitution.

    No, as I document in my new book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, the problem goes far deeper. It can be traced back to the point at which “we the people” were overthrown as the center of the government. As a result, our supremacy has been undone, our authority undermined, and our experiment in democratic self-governance left in ruins. No longer are we the rulers of this land. We have long since been deposed and dethroned, replaced by corporate figureheads with no regard for our sovereignty, no thought for our happiness, and no respect for our rights.

    In other words, without our say-so and lacking any mandate, the point of view of the Constitution has been shifted from “we the people” to “we the government.” Our taxpayer-funded employees—our appointed servants—have stopped looking upon us as their superiors and started viewing as their inferiors. Unfortunately, we’ve gotten so used to being dictated to by government agents, bureaucrats and militarized police alike that we’ve forgotten that WE are supposed to be the ones calling the shots and determining what is just, reasonable and necessary.

    Then again, we’re not the only ones guilty of forgetting that the government was established to serve us as well as obey us. Every branch of government, from the Executive to the Judicial and Legislative, seems to be suffering this same form of amnesia. Certainly, when government programs are interpreted from the government’s point of view (i.e., the courts and legislatures), there is little the government CANNOT do in its quest for power and control.

    We’ve been so brainwashed and indoctrinated into believing that the government is actually looking out for our best interests, when in fact the only compelling interesting driving government programs is maintain power and control by taking away our money and control. This vital truth, that the government exists for our benefit and operates at our behest, seems to have been lost in translation over two centuries dominated by government expansion, endless wars and centralized federal power.

    Have you ever wondered why the Constitution begins with those three words “we the people”? It was intended to be a powerful reminder that everything flows from the citizenry. We the people are the center of the government and the source of its power. That “we” is crucial because it reminds us that there is power and safety in numbers, provided we stand united. We can accomplish nothing alone.

    This is the underlying lesson of the Constitution, which outlines the duties and responsibilities of government. It was a mutual agreement formed by early Americans in order to ensure that when problems arose, they could address them together.

    It’s like the wagon trains of the Old West, comprised of individual groups of pioneers. They rarely ventured out alone but instead traveled as convoys. And when faced with a threat, these early Americans formed their wagons into a tight circle in order to defend against invaders. In doing so, they presented a unified front and provided protection against an outside attack. In much the same way, the Constitution was intended to work as an institutionalized version of the wagon circle, serving as a communal shield against those who would harm us.

    Unfortunately, we have been ousted from that protected circle, left to fend for ourselves in the wilderness that is the American frontier today. Those who did the ousting—the courts, the politicians, and the corporations—have since replaced us with yes-men, shills who dance to the tune of an elite ruling class. In doing so, they have set themselves as the central source of power and the arbiters of what is just and reasonable.

    Once again we’re forced to navigate hostile terrain, unsure of how to protect ourselves and our loved ones from militarized police, weaponized drones, fusion centers, Stingray devices, SWAT team raids, the ongoing military drills on American soil, the government stockpiling of ammunition, the erection of mass detention centers across the country, and all other manner of abuses.

    Read the smoke signals, and the warning is clear: It’s time to circle the wagons, folks. The government is on the warpath, and if we are to have any hope of surviving whatever is coming at us, we’ll need to keep our wits about us and present a unified front. Most of all, we need to restore “we the people” to our rightful place at the center of government. How we do that depends largely on each community’s willingness to get past their partisan politics and blind allegiance to uniformed government officials and find common ground.

    To put it a little more bluntly, stop thinking like mindless government robots and start acting like a powerhouse of citizens vested with the power to say “enough is enough.” We have the numbers to stand our ground. Now we just need the will



  • It's Official: The BoJ Has Broken The Japanese Stock Market

    As those who follow such things are no doubt aware, The Bank of Japan often says some very funny things about inflation expectations and monetary policy. Essentially, the bank is forced to constantly defend its QE program because as it turns out, monetizing the entirety of gross JGB issuance and amassing an equity portfolio worth just shy of $100 billion on the way to cornering the ETF market comes across as insanely irresponsible even in a world that is now defined by insanely irresponsible central banks.

    Perhaps the best example of the BoJ’s absurd rhetoric came in late March when Governor Haruhiko Kuroda said the following about the bank’s 10 trillion yen equity portfolio:

    • KURODA: BOJ’S ETF PURCHASES AREN’T LARGE

    As we noted at the time, either we don’t know what large means, or Kuroda is simply making things up as he goes along. Meanwhile, the BoJ continues to provide Nikkei plunge protection on an almost daily basis. Here’s what we said in March:

    The world has now officially given up any pretensions that Japan’s elephantine QE program isn’t underwriting the rally in Japanese stocks. Not only is the Bank of Japan buying ETFs, they’re targeting their purchases to (literally) ensure that stocks can’t fall by stepping in when things look weak at the open. Unfortunately, Kuroda looks set to run up against the extremely inconvenient fact that while, in his lunacy, he can print a theoretically unlimited amount of money, the universe of purchasable ETFs is limited and so eventually, the BoJ will own the entire market.

    As recent gyrations in Bund, Treasury, and JGB markets have made abundantly clear, when central banks corner markets, liquidity suffers and the seeds for sudden spikes in volatility are  sown. Given this, and given what we know about the BoJ’s equity buying binge, we were not surprised to learn that now, Kuroda has not only broken the JGB market but the Japanese the stock market as well. Here’s more from Nikkei:

    The Bank of Japan’s massive purchases of exchange-traded funds, part of its monetary easing program, could be contributing to sharp stock price swings by draining liquidity from the market…

     

    Though the ETF-buying program had altered the balance by reducing supply, market players are noticing side effects.

     

    Lately, “orders for some stocks have fallen, so it’s gotten harder to complete trades,” observed Kyoya Okazawa at BNP Paribas Securities (Japan).

     

    Fanuc offers one example. The issue’s volatility relative to the Nikkei average on a 25-day moving average basis bottomed out around spring 2013 and has been on an uptrend since. Coincidentally, the BOJ announced its unprecedented easing program in April 2013. The central bank’s ETF purchases may have reduced liquidity, leading to sharper price movements.

     

    Fanuc’s 1.27% climb Tuesday was well above the Nikkei average’s 0.02% increase. Its recent price movements probably have been influenced by growing momentum fueled by the company’s plans to boost shareholder returns.

    And here’s a bit of color which explains just how large Kuroda’s “not large” purchases are:

    The bank has bought ETFs 32 times so far in 2015. This translates to about once per 2.7 days, compared with 4.3 days in 2013 before the easing began and 11.3 days in 2012 under former Gov. Masaaki Shirakawa. The average amount per purchase also roughly doubled to around 35 billion yen this year from just over 17 billion yen in 2014.

     

    To put the BOJ’s moves into perspective, if a new stock fund raised 35 billion yen, it would be the talk of the market. The central bank is making such purchases once every three days.

    Finally, for those wondering whether the bank is still timing its purchases to prop up the market at the first sign of weakness, here is your answer:

    The Nikkei Stock Average closed slightly higher Tuesday. Selling prevailed in the morning on weakness in U.S. and European stocks the previous day, but the benchmark index trimmed its losses in the afternoon and moved into positive territory shortly before the closing bell.

     

    After the Nikkei average briefly dropped more than 150 points to fall below 19,500, many market players were certain the BOJ would step in. And after trading closed, the central bank said it had bought 36.1 billion yen ($297 million) in ETFs. These developments signal a growing sense of dependence on the BOJ.

    There you have it. The BoJ has officially broken the stock market. The truly alarming part of Kuroda’s endeavor is that the larger the BoJ’s equity portfolio becomes, the more resolute the bank will need to be in terms of preventing stocks from falling because after all, you can’t designate your stock portfolio as “held to maturity.”

    We believe the following clip does a nice job of summing up how the BoJ sees its QE program vis-a-vis other central banks:

     



  • Collectivists Hate Individuality, Tribalism, And 'Fast And Furious 7'?

    Submitted by Brandon Smith via Alt-Market.com,

    Sometimes in the liberty movement — with discussions of potential collapse, war, revolution, social destabilization, etc. — it is easy to get so caught up in the peripheral conflict between the elites and the citizenry that we forget what the whole thing is really about. That is to say, we tend to overlook the very core of the conflict that is shaping our epoch.

    Some would say that it is a simple matter of good versus evil. I don’t necessarily disagree, but good and evil are not defined methodologies; rather, they are inherent archetypes — facts born in the minds and hearts of all men. It’s a gift of comprehension from something greater than ourselves. They are felt, rather than defined, and attempts by institutions (religious, scientific, legal or otherwise) to force morality away from intuitive reason and into a realm of artificial hierarchical and mathematical standards tend to lead only to even more imbalance, destruction, innocent deaths and general immorality.

    There have been many nightmare regimes throughout history that have claimed to understand and obey moral “laws” and standards while at the same time having no personal or spiritual connection to those standards. In other words, some of the most heinous acts of immorality are often stamped with the approval of supposedly moral social and governmental institutions.

    This is why a person who calls himself a moral Christian, a moral Muslim, a moral atheist, a moral legislator, a moral conservative, a moral liberal, a moral social justice warrior, etc. is not necessarily a person who ultimately acts with moral conviction. It is not enough for one to memorize and follow the code of a belief system or legal system blindly. One must also understand the tenets of inborn natural law and of the human soul that make those codes meaningful (if they have retained any meaning), or he will eventually fall prey to the vicious calamities of dogma and the collective shadow.

    If I were to examine the core methodologies that are at odds in our society today, I would have to say that the whole fight comes down not only to good versus evil, but to collectivism versus individualism. The same demands of understanding also apply to this dichotomy.

    Nearly all human beings naturally gravitate toward social structures. This is not under debate. The best of us seek to work with others for the betterment of our own position in terms of survival and success, but also the betterment of our species as a whole, if possible. Beyond this, people often find solace and a sense of epiphany when discovering connections to others; the act of recognition and shared experience that is in itself a religious experience. This is what I would call “community,” as opposed to “collectivism.”

    Collectivism is a bastardization and manipulation of the inherent desire most people have to build connections to those around them. It takes the concept of community to the extreme end of the spectrum, and in the process, removes all that was originally good about it. In a collectivist system, individualism becomes a threat and a detriment to the functionality of society. In a community, individualism is seen as a valuable resource that brings a diversity of ideas, skills and unique views, making the group stronger. Collectivism believes the hive mind is more efficient. Community believes voluntary action and individual achievement makes society healthier in the long run.

    Our culture in general today is being bombarded with messages that aggrandize collectivism and stigmatize community and individualism. This is not by mere chance; it is in fact a program of indoctrination. I came across a rather strange and in some ways hilarious example of this while sifting through the propaganda platform known as Reuters.

    As most liberty movement activists are well aware, Reuters is a longtime haven for Fabian socialists who despise honest reporting (to them media is a means of controlling the populace, not informing it) and who consistently inject concepts of collectivist (i.e., globalist) ideology into their articles.

    The Reuters opinion piece linked here and written by Lynn Stuart Parramore presents itself as a kind of social examination of film and its reflection of the decline of American civilization. Rather oddly, the film chosen as a litmus test was “Fast And Furious 7.” Yes, that’s right. The “Fast and Furious” franchise apparently contains social commentary so disturbing to Reuters’ contributing “cultural theorists” that they felt compelled to write a short thesis on it.

    First, I would like to point out that when I first read the article the original title was “‘Fast decline of postwar America & furious desire to cling to ‘family.’”

    It appears that Reuters has since “amended” the title to stand out a little less as a collectivist expose. Just to be clear, I have no interest in discussing the content of the “Furious 7″ film. My commentary will focus not on the film but on Reuters’ commentary regarding the film…if that makes sense to you.

    So what about the newest Furious film has the collectivists so concerned? As the article states, “something alarming lurks at the heart of ‘Furious 7.'” The film’s depiction of America as an economically wounded nation in which good men cannot find a means to make an honest and adequate living doesn’t seem to bother them as much as the response of the main characters to such circumstances. The article almost revels in the postwar degradation of American living standards, outlining how fiscal decline has led to the disruption of the American family and posits that the golden era of the 1950’s economic boom is a relic, erased by the rise of a severe “haves and have-nots” division in the American class sphere. This is, of course, a decidedly simplistic view that appeals more to Marxists than to anyone with true knowledge of the breakdown of the U.S.

    Reuters takes issue with “Furious 7″ because of what it refers to as the “1950’s fantasy” narrative it clings to, in which the heroes long for a return to the middle-class dream, turning away from the corrupt structure of the system and reverting to the “tribalism” of families and posses. The “myth of the posse,” they state, “ignores the interconnectedness of the broader society” and “the idea of a common culture of citizenship recedes into the background, as does faith in a society based on shared principles of justice.”

    I find this conclusion rather fascinating in its collectivist bias. We are led to believe by Parramore’s article that it is the “Ayn Randian” code of contemporary economics and market efficiency that has led America astray. To put it simply, the free market did this to us.

    This is the great lie promoted ad nauseam by collectivists today — collectivists who would like to divert blame for economic failure on more individualistic market ideals. The reality is that America has NOT supported free market methods for at least a century. The advent of parasitic central banking as an economic core in the Federal Reserve and constant government intervention and regulation that have only destroyed small business rather than kept large businesses in check has caused the very negative financial environment that Parramore at least recognizes as the source of our ills. Corporations themselves exist only because of government regulatory license, after all, but you won’t ever catch Reuters criticizing that.

    It was collectivism and the rise of the statist model that bled America dry, not free-market methods that have not existed in this country for more than 100 years. The delusion that free markets are the problem was the same delusion that helped bring down Occupy Wall Street; the movement failed in part because its foundational philosophy was built on disinformation that rang false with otherwise sympathetic people.

    So an action movie presents a competing model to collectivism, because collectivism has always been the problem, despite what Reuters has to say. That model is a return to classic human community in the form of family and “tribalism” where regular individuals matter, a point the Reuters article subtly mocks as a “fantasy.” But here we find the collectivists using the kind of rhetoric one would come to expect from social Marxists. The article continues:

    "When the personal posse replaces civic spirit, and the us-against-them mentality prevails, monsters can breed…"

     

    "This is what is now happening in many corners of the world, where neglected groups have formed posses positively bloodthirsty in their quest to assert that they matter on the global stage to show they are not just victims of a rigged game…"

    I’m not exactly sure what “bloodthirsty groups” Parramore is referring to as “posses,” but I suspect this is a reference to the rise of ISIS, among others. And here we find the Fabian socialist-style propaganda at play.

    You see, the Fabian ideology is the driving force behind globalization — the same globalization that triggered the vast downward slide in American prosperity; the same globalization that has generated anger and dissension among the downtrodden and poverty-stricken; the same globalization that has created artificial economic interdependency among nations and the domino effect of fiscal crisis around the globe; and the same globalization that has led to the predominance of covert agencies, covert agencies which have been funding “bloodthirsty posses” like ISIS for decades. And the source philosophy behind globalization has always been collectivism — the “interconnectedness of broader society” that Parramore proclaims as lost in the pages of the “Furious 7″ screenplay.

    Parramore ends with a stark warning to us all:

    "… a return to tribal instincts and the letting go of the broader common bonds and the welfare of the greater human family has a dark side. It is ultimately a dangerous road to travel."

    Those of us who support the idea of localized community (i.e., tribalism) and the value of the individual over the arbitrary collective are, supposedly, playing with fire; and we should be scared, very scared. We would not want to be labeled as “bloodthirsty monsters” hell-bent on disturbing the tranquility of the “greater human family.” Oh, boy.

    When I read this kind of agenda-based garbage, I am reminded of the insanity of slightly more open social Marxists, such as feminists, who have through dishonorable tactics conjured an atmosphere of collective and legal pressure designed not to present a better argument, but to make all opposing arguments a sin against the group. That is to say, social Marxists do not have a better argument, so their only option is to make rational counterarguments socially taboo or even illegal.

    If you want to know where social Marxism (collectivism) is headed, this is it: the labeling of individualistic philosophies as dangerous thought crimes and tribal communities as time bombs waiting to explode in the face of the wider global village. They desperately hope to conquer the world by dictating not only national boundaries and civil liberties, but the very moral code by which society and individuals function. They wish to bypass natural law with fear, fear that the collective will find you abhorrent and barbaric if you do not believe exactly as they believe. Individualism will one day be the new misogyny.

    Think of it this way: If an undoubtedly forgettable movie like “Furious 7″ can’t even portray a fictional step away from the abyss of collectivist cultism without a prophecy of doom from Reuters, then is anyone really safe from these lunatics?

     



  • China Goes "Unconventional" In Effort To Tackle Trillions In Debt, Rescue Economy

    Two months ago we first explained why Chinese QE may be inevitable. The Cliff’s Notes version goes like this: Beijing needs to prop up its export-driven economy by devaluing the dollar-linked yuan but that’s a risky move primarily because the country has seen $300 billion in capital outflows over the past four quarters and also because China doesn’t want to be seen as a currency manipulator ahead of an IMF SDR bid.

    Conveniently (if you’re a central bank looking to adopt unconventional monetary policy tools), China’s local governments are set to embark on a multi-trillion yuan refi effort aimed at bringing the servicing costs of their mountainous debt pile under control.

    The idea is to swap the existing high-interest loans — which are a consequence of localities skirting debt issuance limits by tapping shadow banking conduits for cash — for standard muni bonds which will carry yields that are more inline with the supposed credit-worthiness of the issuer. This all sounded great on paper, but when the provincial early adopters tested the waters they discovered that bank demand for the new bonds was tepid, leaving the PBoC with two options: 1) buy the bonds outright, 2) create demand by allowing banks who purchases the bonds to pledge them for long-term cash loans. Option number one would simply constitute Chinese QE, while option number two is akin to ECB LTROs and in either case, it gives the PBoC an excuse to implement a large-scale easing program and in the case of the latter option, the hope is that banks will use the cash to lend to the broader economy thus kickstarting growth. Here’s a bit of color via SocGen (note the projected size of the program):

    The PBoC can do something similar to the ECB’s LTRO or TLTRO, accepting LGBs as collaterals for lending to commercial banks. The PBoC has introduced a tool of such design: Pledged Supplementary Lending (PSL). This structure will provide incentives for commercial banks to load up on LGBs. The mechanism looks like this: commercial banks retire their loans to local government financing vehicles (LGFVs) that earns 6%, buy LGBs with 3-4% yield, go to the central bank and ask for long term credit at 2-3%, and then lend out to corporates at 6%. Hence, banks can earn 1-2ppt more with such a programme than otherwise.

    If we are right about PBoC’s intention of helping local government debt restructuring, the total size of this programme may match the total size of local government’s debt stock at the moment. Considering that issuance for the fiscal spending in the coming years may also need some help on attracting demand, we would not be surprised by an eventual size of CNY20tn.

    It could take five years or more, depending on the development of the bond market. The hope is that over time more investors will be interested in LGBs for asset allocation or other reasons. Some foreign institutional investors may already be interested if they have access. The idea is for the PBoC to give a jump-start to the LGB market, instead of dominating the market. Therefore, we do not think that the PBoC will commit itself to a targeted size or a fixed pace, unlike the Feb or the ECB. At best, it may announce a maximum volume year by year, and this year it is likely to be CNY2tn – somewhat bigger than the planned amount of new LGB issuance of CNY1.5tn. 

    The impact of this program shouldn’t be underestimated. Between the initial CNY1 trillion in new local government bonds issued as part of the bond swap initiative and another CNY600 billion in new supply needed to fund budget deficits, local government debt issuance is set to quadruple in 2015 compared to last year, meaning, as SocGen notes above, the PBoC will need to help create demand. Here’s a look at past issuance which should provide a bit of perspective on the relative size of 2015 supply:


    As of Monday, this program became official, meaning that LTROs (which can perhaps be described as a QE trial balloon) are now a reality in China. 

    Via WSJ:

    China is launching a broad stimulus to help local governments restructure trillions of dollars in debts while prodding banks to lend more, as fresh data add to signs of a worsening slowdown in the world’s second-largest economy.

     

    In a directive marked “extra urgent,” China’s Finance Ministry, central bank and top banking regulator laid out a package of measures to jump-start one of the government’s most-important economic-rescue initiatives: a debt-for-bond swap program aimed at giving provinces and cities some breathing room in repaying debts.

     

    Central to the directive, which was issued earlier this week to governments across the country and reviewed by The Wall Street Journal, is a plan by the People’s Bank of China that will let commercial banks use local-government bailout bonds they purchase as collateral for low-cost loans from the central bank. The goal is to provide Chinese banks with more funds to make new loans.

     

    In response to the new directive, the prosperous eastern province of Jiangsu this week relaunched a sale of bonds that package the debt of its local governments but that it delayed last month because banks hesitated to buy them…

     

    “The central bank is using this opportunity to provide cheap funding to commercial banks and guide down interest rates,” said China economist Zhu Chaoping at UOB Kay Hian Holdings Ltd., a Singapore-based investment bank. “This will have similar effects as quantitative easing,” Mr. Zhu said, referring to the bond-buying programs used by the U.S. and European central banks to spur economic growth.

    Helping the country’s struggling local governments crawl out from under a debt burden that totals 35% GDP and jumpstarting the economy via stepped up lending aren’t the only reasons the program is necessary. Beijing’s currency conundrum has caused the PBoC to rely increasingly on policy rates to stimulate the economy and with two RRR cuts and two benchmark lending rate cuts already in the books and at least three more cuts expected this year, it was becoming quite clear that something else was needed given that economic growth is still decelerating and real interest rates are still elevated:

    Here’s WSJ again:

    Officials at the central bank have in recent days denied the need to resort to unconventional monetary tools, saying, for example, that interest rates can be further cut, as they were Sunday for the third time in six months. But signs abound that the economy is behaving more sluggishly than the government and economists have expected and that officials are casting about for solutions.

     

    Data released Wednesday show investment in factories, buildings and other fixed assetsrose 12% in the first four months this year from a year earlier, the slowest pace since December 2000. The bigger-than-expected drop was driven by anemic investment in property, which has been a drag on the economy. Meanwhile, factory output and retail sales in April also came in below expectations.

     

    The steeper slowdown is forcing policy makers to devise more aggressive measures to prop up growth, if Beijing is going to reach its already-lowered annual growth target—set at 7% for this year, the lowest level in a quarter century.

    With that, China has officially entered the realm of “unconventional” monetary policy, joining the Fed, the ECB, the BoJ, and a whole host of other global central banks in an attempt to bring the supposedly all-mighty printing press and the unlimited balance sheet that goes with it to bear on subpar economic growth. We suspect the results will be characteristically underwhelming (at least in terms of lowering real interest rates, although in terms of boosting risk assets, the results may be outstanding) meaning it’s likely only a matter of time before LTRO becomes QE in China just as it did in Europe.



  • Caught On Tape: Moment Of Deadly Amtrak Train Crash

    Amtrak Regional 188, with over 200 passengers aboard, was traveling at 106 mph just before "the entire train derailed" in Philadelphia, federal investigators said Wednesday, according to NBC News, more than twice the speed limit at the curve where it hurtled off the tracks. With the death toll now raised to seven, and officials still unable to account for everyone on board, Philadelphia Mayor Michael Nutter exclaimed, "I don't believe that anyone standing here today has any memory of a derailment of this kind in 50 years," and judging by the following clip – we are stunned the fatality count was so low.

     

    The locomotive and all seven passenger cars of the train went off the tracks at a tight curve at Frankford Junction, just northeast of center city Philadelphia. As The Wall Street Journal details, multiple cars overturned, severely injuring some passengers and pinning others.

     

    At least seven were killed, and more than 200 passengers were injured, including eight who were in critical condition Wednesday afternoon. The seven dead comprised four people whose bodies were found inside the train, two who were found outside and one who died at a hospital, police Lt. John Walker told NBC Philadelphia.

    The northbound train was carrying 238 passengers and five crew members when it derailed about 9:30 p.m. Tuesday on its way to New York.

     

    The National Transportation Safety Board, the main federal agency investigating the derailment, said preliminary data put the train’s speed above 100 miles an hour.

     

    According to the Federal Railroad Administration, the speed limit drops from 80 mph to 50 mph at the curve where the train derailed. But the train was hurtling along at 106 mph when the engineer slammed the emergency brake — slowing the train only to 102 mph when its recorders stopped recording data, said Robert Sumwalt, a member of the National Transportation Safety Board.

    At that point, "the entire train derailed," Sumwalt said.

    Dozens of people were still being treated in Philadelphia hospitals with injuries ranging from cuts and broken bones to head trauma.

    Chief Medical Officer Herbert Cushing said Temple University Hospital, where many of the most seriously injured were being treated, had eight patients in critical condition, who he said "are going to do just fine."

     

    "Almost everyone has rib fractures," Cushing said, which indicates that "they rattled around in the train car a lot."

     

    All of the patients at Temple are adults ranging in age from their early 20s to their 80s, Cushing said. Patients from Spain, Belgium, Germany, India and Albania are among those involved.

     

    The engineer of the train was also injured and gave a statement to police, Nutter said.

    The derailment damaged all seven cars of the train, including some that were overturned and one that was mangled. Passengers and luggage were tossed around inside, and survivors described having to force doors open or clamber through windows to safety.

    Grainy security footage from a nearby camera captured several flashes of bright light as the train crashed.

    Eye witness accounts are terrifying…

    Andrew Brenner, 29, a public-relations expert who lives in Washington, said he was relaxing and texting in the last car with his shoes off. He said he noticed that the train seemed to be taking a curve rather fast, but it didn’t cause much alarm. Then, the train jolted and swayed. Within moments, Mr. Brenner said he and other passengers were tossed around cars as seats were ripped from the train floor.

     

    “I got thrown like a penny,” said Mr. Brenner, who said he weighs 250 pounds. “That is how violent this was.”

     

    After the crash, Mr. Brenner said he was taken along with other passengers by bus to a hospital, where X-rays showed damage to his vertebrae.

     

    Brooklyn, N.Y., resident Beth Davidz, 35, said she remembered only a hard turn and a jerk. “Then it was just blackness. I was bouncing up and down in blackness,” she said.

     

    Although she tried not to look at the wreckage as she left the train, she noticed the first and second cars looked badly damaged. “I didn’t see anyone getting out,” said Ms. Davidz, a project director with a Philadelphia-based startup.

     

    More than 120 firefighters and 200 police responded to the chaotic scene that included several badly mangled railcars, officials said.

    *  *  *

    US Passenger train injries are on the rise…

     

    Amtrak suspended service between New York and Philadelphia on its Northeast Corridor, the busiest stretch of track in the country for passenger travel. The section of track where the train derailed will have to be rebuilt.

    *  *  *

    The engineer of the derailed Amtrak train has been identified as 32 year old Brandon Bostian…



  • London Housing Bubble Watch: $630/Month For A Bed "In" A Shared Kitchen!

    You know it’s a bubble when… A listing has appeared online advertising a single bed in a house in London where the mattress is located in the kitchen.

    As The Telegraph reports,

    “Please notice is not a room,” the listing on SpareRoom read. “Is a single bed in shared kitchen,” continued landlord Joe.

     

     

    For £400 ($630) a month “you can use your own entrance from the garden, if you wish,” he continued.

     

    The advert claims it is a five to 10 minute bus ride to the station. Although putting the approximate location into Google Maps, as reported by the Independent, also shows that it’s in fact a 27-minute walk away to the nearby overground.

     

    SpareRoom’s “early bird” system means only those with a premium account can get in touch for the first seven days of the listing’s time on the site.

     

    If it’s not a hoax it exemplifies the rising rents in London with tenants unable to to buy a property and a lack of new stock to meet demand.

     

    The advert has now been deleted by “landlord Joe” but was thought by Spareroom to be serious.

    Matt Hutchinson, director of flat and house share site SpareRoom.co.uk, said:

    This is another sign of how bad the housing crisis has become. This isn’t just one of the most bizarre ads we’ve seen, it’s also a huge invasion of privacy. No one should have to sleep in a kitchen, and no one should have to pass through a bedroom to get to a communal area. This ad has been removed.”

    *  *  *
    Welcome to the new normal!

    On the bright-side, it’s great for breakfast in bed…



  • What Peter Schiff Said To Ben Bernanke

    Last week, a photo of the oddest couple in finance, Peter Schiff and Ben Bernanke together “celebrating the economic recovery”, promptly went viral.

     

    As it turns out there was more to the story.

    On his Friday podcast, Peter Schiff told the story of his encounter with Ben Bernanke at the SALT Conference last week where he took the photo above. Peter talks about his close encounter of the Bernanke kind 13:30 into the podcast.

    Below is a transcript of the relevant section:

    “Speaking of a clueless Federal Reserve, I happened to have an encounter the other day with former Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke. Many of you may have seen the picture of me and the former Chairman. We were at a cocktail party, and I posted that picture on my Facebook page…

    “I’ll give you all of the details. So first of all, Ben Bernanke was there to speak at the SALT Conference… He was paid, I believe, somewhere between $200-250,000 to basically hit the soft balls that were lobbed to him by Anthony Scaramucci, who was the host of this conference… At least make the guy do something for $200,000 – let me question him. In any event, he probably wouldn’t agree to that…

    “I was watching from the speaker’s lounge… He walks out, and he’s accompanied by his secretary. He doesn’t have a big entourage… I see him and I come right up to him and I say, ‘Mr. Bernanke.’ I put my hand out and I say, ‘Peter Schiff.’ I can sense from his body language and the way he looked that the name was familiar. I think he knew something about me, but he didn’t necessarily acknowledge it. I think he said something like, ‘Oh sure.’ But I was pretty sure he knew who I was at that point. I wanted to make sure, because I didn’t want to have a conversation under false pretense.

    “So the first thing I said to him, ‘Look, I gotta let you know, full disclosure, I’m probably your biggest critic.’ To which Ben Bernanke replied, ‘Well, you got a lot of competition.’ It’s probably true. There is a lot of competition. There are a lot of people who criticize Ben Bernanke. But I think I am his biggest critic. I’ve been criticizing him for longer than most people, and I certainly do it more often and more loudly.

    “After that brief exchange I said, ‘Do you have a moment to chat? I’d love to talk to you.’ He said, ‘No, I don’t, I really got to go.’ I said, ‘Alright, how about a quick picture then?’ But that was it. He was gone. He was whisked away by his female handler, and I thought, ‘Well that was it. I’m not going to see that guy again.’ He was rushing to deposit his check, right?

    “Later that evening, they have a cocktail party for the speakers. I get to the cocktail party, and who do I see standing there all by himself but Ben Bernanke. I got a drink and then went over to Mr. Bernanke who was still standing by himself, surprisingly. I said, ‘Mr. Bernanke, I thought you had to leave.’ He said, ‘No, I’m still here. I’ve got time for that picture now, if you want to take one. Which I thought was quite nice of him, because he remembered that I wanted a photograph, and he didn’t have time for it. Now he sees me and he asks if I would like to take a photograph…

    “Initially I was thinking what do I do to spice this photograph up? Just a photo of me and Ben Bernanke. What’s the big deal? I thought maybe I should do the rabbit ears behind his head, but I felt kind of awkward doing that considering he had so graciously reminded me that I wanted a photograph and offered to pose with me. I felt that would be inappropriate of me to take advantage of him or make fun of him, so it was just a normal photograph…

    “We got the photograph out of the way. Then I wanted to talk to him. The first thing I wanted to do was I wanted to give him my version of why the economy is so screwed up and why everything in it is wrong. The last thing he wanted to get was a lecture from me, but that’s what I tried to give him. But I tried to give him the Cliff Note version. I did want to ask him some questions, but I wanted to get his reaction to my take.

    “I started talking about the housing bubble and the financial crisis and how the Federal Reserve caused that with its low interest rates. He said that no, it wasn’t that; that the interest rates had nothing to do with it. He first told me that the housing bubble was caused by Fannie and Freddie. At least he’s trying to blame the government. I said, ‘Look, Fannie and Freddie have been around since the 30s. We didn’t have that big housing bubble until the Fed happened to have interest rates at 1%, and then raised them very slowly. That wasn’t a coincidence.’ He said, ‘Well, it was subprime mortgages that did it.’ I said, ‘Subprime mortgages? But do you understand how subprime mortgages worked? They were all adjustable rates, and the most popular feature, what made them so enticing and affordable was the teaser rate. The fact that you can get a low rate of interest for the first few years. That was all because of the Fed. So if you’re going to blame subprime, you’ve got to blame the Fed, because the Fed is what gave life to subprime. It made subprime affordable.’ He also blamed regulation. He said regulation first before he said Fannie and Freddie. I said, ‘Well what regulations are you talking about?’ And he said Fannie and Freddie, which weren’t really regulations, they’re agencies. But he was really trying to lay the blame on the housing bubble on capitalism, because of subprime, and on the government, because of Fannie and Freddie.

    “I said, ‘Wait a minute. If regulation and subprime and Fannie and Freddie – if that’s what caused the housing bubble, why didn’t you warn us about that in advance? Why didn’t you go in 2004, ‘Hey, we got a problem. We got these bad regulations, we got Fannie and Freddie, we got subprime , they’ve created a housing bubble! This is going to be a disaster!’’ He didn’t say any of that. He said the opposite of that. In fact, when he was asked specifically about the housing bubble, he denied that it existed. If it was being caused by the things that he said, why didn’t he warn about it? Because it wasn’t caused by those things…

    “I tried to ask him some questions and that’s when he really wanted to end the conversation. The first question I said, ‘Mr. Bernanke, you’re so sure that you’re right. I don’t know how you can be so sure, because interest rates are still at zero and the Fed’s balance sheet hasn’t shrunk. You said you weren’t monetizing the debt when you talked to Congress. You said the Fed was going to sell the bonds, but none of them have been sold. They’ve all been rolled over. So how are you claiming victory when you haven’t exited? You haven’t raised rates, you haven’t shrunk the balance sheet. You were wrong in the past. You didn’t see the financial crisis coming. You told us there was no housing bubble. You said subprime was contained. So you were certainly wrong then. So how do you know you’re not wrong now? Is there anything that might change your opinion and get you to rethink and maybe admit that your outlook is wrong?’ I forget the exact words.

    “Instead of answering the questions, he just patted me on the shoulder… And just kind of gave me a little smile and that was it. He kind of turned. By then there was a couple other people around us. He started talking to somebody else. It was clear to me that he didn’t want to answer the questions. After all, I’m not paying him $200,000, so why should he answer my questions. I don’t know, maybe he didn’t want to answer them. I didn’t get the sense when I talked to him that he was lying to me. I thought he really believed what he believed. He seemed that way. i’m sure all the praise has gone to his head. He thinks he’s save the world. So he did seem sincere… Who am I? I’m just this guy trying to talk to the former Fed Chairman and tell him what a lousy job he did. He probably doesn’t want to hear that. He wants to talk to somebody who will tell him how great he is. That was the last I talked to him.

    “Later on that day, somebody came up to me… I was on a panel for forty minutes. The first ten minutes were the former Prime Minister of Greece talking to Steve Forbes… The highlight was me arguing with Gene Sperling. That’s where I got all my applause. Gene didn’t get any. He was the former economic advisor to President Obama. He got no applause. I got all of the applause. I even got laughter… I was saying some funny things. Funny, because they were true…

    “This guy comes up to me. He says, ‘I was talking with Ben Bernanke. He was saying some bad things about you.’ So he’s already talking smack behind my back. I don’t blame him. I got no problem with Ben Bernanke saying bad things about Peter Schiff, because I say bad things about him all the time. What’s fair is fair…”



  • America (Summed Up In 1 Strip Mall Sign)

    Something for everyone.

     

    Source: Lonely Libertarian



  • Water Wars Officially Begin In California

    A century of government meddling has turned the issue of water rights on its head, and further centralized control of waterways in local, state, and federal governments; and, as Acuweather reports, with the state of California mired in its fourth year of drought and a mandatory 25% reduction in water usage in place, reports of water theft are becoming increasingly common. With a stunning 46% of the state in 'exceptional' drought, and forecast to worsen, huge amounts of water are 'going missing' from the Sacramento-San Joaquin Delta and a state investigation was launched. From illegally tapping into hydrants in order to fill up tanks to directly pumping from public canals, California continues to formulate new strategies to preserve as much water as possible and fight the new water wars that are emerging.

    Homeowners in Modesto, California, were fined $1,500, as Accuweather reporrs, for allegedly taking water from a canal. In another instance, thieves in the town of North San Juan stole hundreds of gallons of water from a fire department tank.

    In Madera County, District Attorney David Linn has instituted a water crime task force to combat the growing trend of water theft occurring throughout the state and to protect rightful property owners from having their valuable water stolen.

     

    The task force will combat agriculture crime through education by instructing farmers how to prevent crime before it occurs, Linn said in a news release back in March.

     

    "Since the business of Madera is agriculture, I intend to make its protection a top priority," he said.

     

    Jennifer Allen, spokesperson for the Contra Costa Water District in Concord, about 45 minutes from San Francisco, said it's not uncommon for her agency to receive reports of water theft, but as the drought has continued, she said there has been an uptick in reports.

     

    "I believe during drought times people's sensitivities are certainly raised to any instances of water theft going on and so probably that's where we've been contacted," Allen said. "We would assume that more people are feeling the need to report out anything they've witnessed of somebody stealing water from a hydrant or from a neighbor."

     

    To deter thieves, Allen said the CCWD Board of Directors has increased the fine for first-time offenders from $25 to $250. For any following offenses, the fine goes up to $500.

    Primarily the CCWD has received reports of people illegally tapping into hydrants in order to fill up a tank or another sort of receptacle to store water. Additionally, Allen said that some contractors have targeted water pipes laid for new developments that may not have a meter attached to them or found a way to circumvent the meter.

     

    Other water agencies are ramping up enforcement against water crime as well. The East Bay Municipal Utility District (EBMUD), headquartered in Oakland, has enacted a new ordinance that would allow them to "fine persons for stealing water or making unauthorized use of a public fire hydrant," according to its website. According to the EBMUD, violators would be fined $500 for the first offense and $1,000 for a second violation. But, as AP reported recently, the problems are far bigger (and deeper)…

    As California struggles with a devastating drought, huge amounts of water are mysteriously vanishing from the Sacramento-San Joaquin Delta — and the prime suspects are farmers whose families have tilled fertile soil there for generations.

     

    A state investigation was launched following complaints from two large agencies that supply water to arid farmland in the Central Valley and to millions of residents as far south as San Diego.

     

    Delta farmers don't deny using as much water as they need. But they say they're not stealing it because their history of living at the water's edge gives them that right. Still, they have been asked to report how much water they're pumping and to prove their legal rights to it.

     

    At issue is California's century-old water rights system that has been based on self-reporting and little oversight, historically giving senior water rights holders the ability to use as much water as they need, even in drought. Gov. Jerry Brown has said that if drought continues this system built into California's legal framework will probably need to be examined.

     

    Delta farmer Rudy Mussi says he has senior water rights, putting him in line ahead of those with lower ranking, or junior, water rights.

     

    "If there's surplus water, hey, I don't mind sharing it," Mussi said. "I don't want anybody with junior water rights leapfrogging my senior water rights just because they have more money and more political clout."

     

    The fight pitting farmer against farmer is playing out in the Delta, the hub of the state's water system.

    *  *  *

    A century of government meddling has turned the issue of water rights on its head, and further centralized control of waterways in local, state, and federal governments. Just as the residents of Los Angeles fought over water with local farmers, the residents of Las Vegas will soon find themselves fighting with surrounding states over what’s left of Lake Mead. None of the power players seem to care that the current population settlements of the southwestern United States cannot last. One day the water will run out. The sooner this reality is confronted, the better.

    Admittedly, the ownership of water and its various bodies is a difficult topic. Rivers and tributaries don’t flow by man’s commands. They can be directed, but never fully controlled. Privatization of water rights would be a good start for restoring sane usage of natural resources. Don’t expect as much to happen though. Government control is far too entrenched in the process to be removed easily.

    *  *  *

    Finally, some context, that old axiom that the earth is 75% water is wrong. In reality, water constitutes only 0.07% of the earth by mass, or 0.4% by volume.

    This is how much we have, depicted graphically:

    As we discussed previously, Water scarcity is, of course, not just a domestic issue. It is far more critical in other parts of the world than in the US. It will decide the fate of people and of nations. Worldwide, we are using potable water way faster than it can be replaced.



  • A Generational Storm Is Coming

    Submitted by Bill Bonner via Bonner & Partners,

    Yesterday, we began our high-minded graduation speech to the Class of 2015.

    We explained how the young graduates were not only the most heavily indebted in history, but also the least likely to be able to pay their debts. Median wages have been going down since these graduates were about five years old … So have economic growth rates.

    Today, we continue the speech no one wants us to give …

     

    You are heirs to claptrap, nonsense, bogus theories, and trillions of dollars in debt. The systems, programs, and institutions your parents set up are mostly worthless scams. Worse, they produce outcomes contrary to their stated goals.

    Welfare programs do not help people escape poverty; they keep them mired in it. Health care programs do not make them healthy; they make them dependent on the drug industry.

    Defense industry spending doesn’t make us safer; it funds drones, bumbling interventions, and assassinations… and it creates more foreign enemies. We end up not only poorer, but also less secure.

    All of those assertions take more time to explain and prove than we have time for now. But here’s a little example that you will appreciate…

     

    25 Years of Poverty

    Under President Johnson, the government set up the Federal Direct Student Loan Program to provide “low-interest loans” (back then, “low” meant 8%) to students.

    Private lenders make the loans, but they receive the full backing of the feds.

    The idea was to help you afford higher education… and earn larger salaries as a result. And with your increased earnings you were supposed to be able to pay off the loan. But at over 11% of outstanding debt, the Student Loan Program now has the highest delinquency rate of all forms of household debt (mortgage loans, auto loans, credit cards).

    And it will probably go much higher… as students take on more debt. Total outstanding student debt is expected to bubble up to $3.3 trillion by 2025. What do you do if you can’t pay? Well, the feds have a solution for you. The trouble is, it turns you into the very thing the program was meant to avoid. Here’s how it works…

    As long as your income is low, you are allowed to make small token payments every month. Keep this up for 300 payments and your debt is considered satisfied, no matter how little you paid. In other words, the Student Loan Program encourages you to live in poverty for a quarter of a century to get rid of your student debt. Most likely, this will be easy for you to do anyway.

     

    living arrangements

    Ideal living arrangements to avoid liability for one’s student debt. You only need 25 years of this …

    First, because most college degrees do little to make you more valuable to employers. Second, because your parents’ rigging of the economy will make it difficult to make any financial progress anyway. The median household income – after you account for inflation – has been falling since the late 1990s. And good jobs are hard to get. There are fewer “breadwinner” jobs today in America than there were in 1999.

    And you can forget about starting your own business. The rate of new start-ups is collapsing. (Remember from last week that the U.S. ranks 46th on the World Bank’s list of the easiest countries in which to start a business.) You can thank your parents for that, too. The system is designed to protect them, their Social Security benefits, their health care, their stock market portfolios, and their businesses. Protect them against what? Against you!

    You are the future. You are the competition. You are the ones who should want to shake things up and tear down the walls of bureaucracy, taxes, paperwork, and regulation that make it so difficult for you to start new businesses, get good jobs and build real wealth.

    You should be talking revolution – overthrowing your parents’ multitrillion-dollar debts and pulling out of their wars on poverty, illiteracy, Iraqis, Afghans… you name it. You need to stop these silly, pointless, and expensive programs so you can have the resources to pay for your own programs and launch your own stupid wars.

    You need to get rid of your parents’ zombies – the millions of unproductive people who get money from the government – so you can afford your own families … your own pet projects … and zombies of your own.

     

    A Suicidal System of Credit

    You need to stop your parents’ suicidal credit-based money system, too. You don’t know about this, do you? Your professors of government, politics, economics, and finance didn’t mention it, did they?

    Well, the system is corrupt and self-destructive. It works only by increasing the amount of debt in the society – including student debt. And it works only until the debt bubble gets so big it blows up. But there’s a logic to it… a sinister logic that turns you into chumps for older generations. Spending on credit favors the existing owners of capital … and people who have existing claims on the government money. Let me explain …

    When the government borrows money it gives the money to a zombie to spend, or it spends it directly. Usually, the money goes to an older person – your parents or grandparents – in some form of social welfare subsidy, pension, job, contract, or support program. When they spend the money, it goes into the coffers of corporations. This increases profits… and share prices. Who owns those corporations? Do you? You don’t? Then who does?

    Your parents and grandparents benefit again. They are the owners of the nation’s financial assets. By increasing credit, they shift real wealth from the future to the present … and from you to them. This is the money you haven’t earned yet.

    I’ll spell it out for you: The government borrows a dollar. It gives the dollar to one of its pet zombies. (It could be a health researcher, a drug addict, or somebody who makes bombs.) The money goes – one way or another – to a corporation, which registers it as a sale.

    If it has a 10% profit margin, 10 cents is recorded as a profit. If it sells at a price-to-earnings ratio of 20 times, its stock price goes up $2. This makes the owner of the stock – it could be one of your parents – $2 richer. (I’m oversimplifying … but you get the point.)

    But the government now owes $1 more. And who’s going to pay it? You are! Your parents and grandparents are retiring… and collecting their Social Security and health care benefits. They think they will be able to sell their stocks, too … and their houses … and have even more money to spend.

     

    Time to Wipe the Slate Clean

    Now, it’s up to you …

    You need to get a job so you can pay for their health care benefits. You need to pay your taxes so they can keep their wars going. You need to buy a house, too, so they can move to Florida and retire. You need to vote for their candidates … work for their companies … and pay their bills.

    This is the test you face. You are arriving in the economy at the tail end of a 60-year credit expansion. Debt has boomed. The economy has boomed. We, your parents, enjoyed an economic expansion that began when we were born and continued, with only short interruptions, until we retired.

    We got out of school with little or no student debt. We could start businesses with fewer impediments. We could borrow money to fund our businesses and our lives. We could hire, fire, switch jobs… buy and sell houses… move from place to place.

    We were freer – and richer – than you will be …

    … unless you can wipe the slate clean of our debts … our foolish wars and dumbbell programs … and our attempts to hold back the future and prevent you from living rich, full, free lives of your own.

    If you don’t rise to this challenge, you will inherit our bills, our regulations, our restrictions, our obligations, our delusions, our prejudices, and our vanities. You will also inherit a financial crisis – worse than the crisis of 2008 – and a long and grinding economic slump.

    The debt expansion of the last 60 years will turn into a dreary debt contraction, possibly dragging the economy into another Great Depression. Either you find a way to shuck off, default on, or inflate away your parents’ debts… or you’ll stagger under the weight of them for the rest of your lives.

    Either you break free from the jackass things your parents have done to you … or you deserve what you get.

    Congratulations, chumps.

     

    student-loan-debt-cartoon1-570x399

     



  • 45% Of US Voters Are Worried The Government Will Use Military Training Exercises For Power Grab

    Submitted by Mike Krieger via Liberty Blitzkrieg blog,

    As usual, recent mainstream media reporting on the controversy over the Jade Helm 15 military exercises, set to take place over eight weeks across several U.S. states, completely missed the point. Mainstream media focus was primarily about characterizing and demonizing Texans concerned about the exercises as backwater, paranoid rednecks with wild fantasies about an imminent government takeover. While exercises like these will always cause the imagination of some to run amok, the key point here is this: concerns that U.S. military exercises will be used to exert more power over states is not a fringe view.

    In a bizarre contradiction, a new Rasmussen Poll shows that while 65% of U.S. voters favor the U.S. military conducting training exercises in their state, “45% of voters are concerned that the government will use U.S. military training operations to impose greater control over some states, with 19% who are Very Concerned.” Those are very big numbers.

    Even if you ignore the 45% number, 19% are very concerned. That’s tens of millions of Americans who are so distrustful of government they think the U.S. military could be used to subdue states’ rights.

    Personally, I think this is encouraging since the American public should have absolutely no reason whatsoever to trust the status quo due to the string of criminal actions they have taken in the post 9/11 period. So while the mainstream media smugly mocks the crazies in Texas, they fail to admit they have a serious problem which is not getting better. The American public’s trust in government is collapsing. When the next economic downturn hits and a tipping point is reached, distrust will morph quickly into outright dissent across the land.

    From Rasmussen:

    Eight weeks of U.S. military exercises this summer in several southwestern states – dubbed Jade Helm 15 – have some wondering if the government is preparing for martial law. Most voters don’t oppose such exercises, but a surprising number worry about what the federal government is up to.

     

    A new Rasmussen Reports national telephone survey finds that 65% of Likely U.S. Voters favor the U.S. military conducting training exercises in their state. Just 16% are opposed, but slightly more (19%) are undecided. (To see survey question wording, click here.)

     

    But 45% of voters are concerned that the government will use U.S. military training operations to impose greater control over some states, with 19% who are Very Concerned. Just over half (52%) are not concerned that the government has an ulterior motive for the training exercises, including 26% who are Not At All Concerned.

     

    This level of concern is perhaps less surprising given that 62% of Americans believe there is too much government power and too little individual freedom in the United States today.

     

    Just 20% of voters now consider the federal government a protector of individual liberty. Sixty percent (60%) see the government as a threat to individual liberty instead.  Only 19% trust the federal government to do the right thing all or most of the time.

    The only reason these numbers haven’t yet resulted in outright rebellion is because the population that distrusts the government has been so skillfully divided and conquered. See: Charting the American Oligarchy – How 0.01% of the Population Contributes 42% of All Campaign Cash.

    But 56% of conservative voters are concerned that the training exercises will lead to greater federal control over some states. Fifty-eight percent (58%) of moderates and 67% of liberal voters are not concerned.

    I find it very bizarre, and very interesting that “liberals” are least concerned about military exercises in the U.S.



  • America's Class Segregation Problem In 4 Charts

    One surreal night of mass chaos, indiscriminate pillaging, violent street clashes, and widespread arson notwithstanding, race relations in America have generally improved over the last five or so decades. Even as the nation’s focus has shifted back to the issue of racial discrimination on the heels of several high profile incidents of apparent police misconduct, America has at least managed to overcome overt racial segregation and steer generally (but not always) clear of the types of egregious civil rights violations that still existed a century after the Emancipation Proclamation.

    However, one type of segregation that has certainly not disappeared but has instead only grown is class-based segregation. The following four charts demonstrate how the interplay between income and education has served to exacerbate the class divide among America’s youth, curtailing opportunities for the poor in the process.


    Here’s more, from WSJ:

    Even as Americans have become less segregated across racial and religious lines than they were a generation ago, they have grown more segregated along class lines. Americans are much less likely to go to school, live with, or marry people from different socioeconomic backgrounds, Harvard political scientist Robert Putnam says.

     

    “More and more young people aren’t meeting across class lines,” said Mr. Putnam, raising troubling questions about the implications for the next generation of Americans.

     

    The wealthiest parents have spent more than double on their kids what they did a generation ago, even as spending by poorer parents has edged up only slightly..

     

    Mr. Putnam also shows a clear increase in single-parent households for parents who haven’t gone to college. For college-educated parents, the rate of single-parenthood rose until the early 1990s, when it crested and then declined slightly. For those with a high school diploma or less, rates of single-parenthood have climbed without slowing..

     

    Participation in high school sports and other extracurricular activities also signals fraying social bonds. Those activities, Mr. Putnam said, provide important soft skills, such as teamwork, or “what my mother would have called ‘gumption.’”

     

    Most sobering, Mr. Putnam said, are data from a 2000 analysis showing that that a family’s socioeconomic status has become more important than their educational aptitude in predicting whether an eighth-grader would graduate from college.

     *  *  *

    Don’t worry America, we’re sure the “wealth effect” from QE will start to trickle down to the lower tax brackets any day now and when that day comes all your problems will be solved at which point you can write to PIMCO and explain how great of a man their newest adviser is.



  • Former U.S. Government Official: U.S. Is ALREADY at War with China and Russia

    Top economic and political experts say we're drifting towards World War 3. And see this.

    We noted in March that we're already at war with Russia.  Many experts agree …

    Former White House official Dr. Philippa Malmgren – former presidential adviser and member of the U.S. President's Working Group on Financial Markets – said last December that the United States is already at war with China and Russia:

    I was recently at a meeting with a lot of very senior people from the defense community, and their view is that we are already in a nose-to-nose confrontation (war) with China and Russia.  But these (wars) are being conducted through cyberspace rather than through traditional conventional weapons.

    An advisor to the US government – Scott Borg, CEO of US Cyber Consequences Unit – says that the United States has already started launching widespread hostile cyber warfare against Russia, China and Iran.

    Indeed, the U.S. has admitted that it deployed cyber-warfare against Iran's nuclear power plant.

    Paul Craig Roberts – former Assistant Secretary of the Treasury under President Reagan, former editor of the Wall Street Journal, listed by Who’s Who in America as one of the 1,000 most influential political thinkers in the world  – says that U.S. war against Russia has already begun.

    Mark Galeotti – a Full Professor of Global Affairs at the Center for Global Affairs at New York University, and a prominent expert on modern Russia – says "the West and Russia are already at war".

    Ron Paul says that sanctions are an act of war … and we've had sanctions on Russia and Iran for some time now.  And see this.

    And the U.S. is threatening military confrontation in the South China Sea. China is taking the threat seriously.

    Remember, Russia and the U.S. each have enough nuclear weapons to wipe each other out … and American, British, Polish and Russian Experts warn that continued fighting in Ukraine could lead to nuclear war.

    The Pentagon reports that China now had ballistic missiles which can hit nearly the entirety of the U.S. with nuclear warheads.

    Russia and China are in a military alliance, and are conducting joint military exercises.

    China has warned the U.S. to stop its Ukranian proxy war against Russia.

    China and Russia have both said that an attack on Iran – or Syria – will be considered an act of war against the Bear and the Dragon. We're already in Syria trying to overthrow Assad, and we've been supporting terrorists in Iran for many years.

    On the other side of the coin, a former high-level Commander in the German Army warns:

    NATO is formed out of 28 states, if just one of them gets involved into a conflict with Russia, the contract obliges all of them to assist. And out of a sudden we get a third world war. The only way to prevent it is if the people rise and say: Russia had to mourn more than enough victims in WWII, do you really want to start a war again?

    What could possibly go wrong?



  • The History Of Treasury Market Liquidity (And Lack Thereof) In One Chart

    While we completely disagree with Credit Suisse about the reasons for the total collapse in bond market liquidity (as readers know we blame the Fed – as does the TBAC – and HFTs, while Credit Suisse accuses regulations, even though banks now hold a record amount of fungible bonds implying that unless bank prop desks can trade as FDIC-backstopped hedge funds once again it is simply impossible to have a stable, liquid bond market which is idiotic), we agree about one thing – the same thing we warned many years ago would happen: the total evaporation of liquidity in what was once the world’s deepest, most liquid market.

    Case in point:

    Remember, in any market and certainly bonds, volume is not liquidity or depth. Some more thoughts from Credit Suisse:

    Shallower depth at times of higher volatility is at once a symptom and a source of the extreme price moves. Historically, market depth – which we measure as the aggregate bid and ask size for the on-the-run 10y note within 2.5 ticks of best on the other side – has ebbed and flowed with volatility. Surges in volatility typically cause depth to dissipate, whereas stable markets tend to be deeper.

     

    While the core of this inverse depth/volatility relationship has remained in place, the last two years seem to have witnessed somewhat of a break, coinciding more or less with 2013’s taper tantrum. While delivered vol moderated in the aftermath of the mid-2013 selloff, depth has failed to return and at this point appears to have been structurally reduced. Early indications are that this has only become worse in the months since the October 15 “flash rally.” The only period that saw comparably low depth persist over the last four years was amid 2011’s debt ceiling and ratings downgrade in the US and the eurozone crisis (Exhibit 4).

     

     

    One might be tempted to be long volatility to protect against the possibility for extreme price moves as market depth remains challenged. The risk of doing so is that one will bleed carry, however, as we have seen that there may be long periods of relatively stable markets interrupted by unexpected dramatic moves during extreme illiquidity.

    Of course, one may simply be unable to trade out of any profitable volatility hedges if, say, the CME or Nasdaq Options Market decided to close just as the collapse began. Then said “hedges” would be worth precisely, pardon the pun, zero.

    And then there is the most famous example of a sudden and total loss of Treasury liquidity: October 15, 2014. Here is what happened.

    Still fresh in many participants’ minds, October 15 provides a recent illustration of the flighty nature of liquidity and the illusion of market depth. The post-retail sales rate rally that ultimately saw a ~36bp yield range in 10s on the day accelerated as depth disappeared. As some market makers stepped back to avoid being put into significant risk positions, those that continued to provide quotes widened bid/offer spreads, sharply curtailing the depth within a “normal” width of the other side of the market.

     

     

    Volume spiked at the same time just as market depth was truly beginning to collapse. This resulted in an outsized surge in the number of trades, meaning a diminished average transaction size. That there were more, smaller trades concurrent with the rapid yield move underscores the impact that a collapse in depth has on the magnitude and speed of market reactions.

    Finally, whatever the cause, our advice is just to sit back and await the next Treasury flash crash (or smash) because with no change possible, things can and will only get worse.



  • Less 'Goldilocks', More 'Three Bears': Bullion Bid As Stocks & Bonds Skid

    The correlation between stocks and bond yields continues to have regime-shifted to approach -1 (not 1 – as is more 'normal') confounding asset allocators and risk parity funds across the market…

     

    This seemed appropriate…

    If that analogy didn't help, maybe this will clear things up…

     

    Gold and Silver were the big movers today… Gold's highest close in 3 months (3rd biggest day of the year), Silver highest close in 6 weeks (3rd biggest day of the year)

     

    But stocks and bonds continue to be sold…

     

    Leaving Trannies ugly for the week…

     

    After decoupling today once again…hugging the flatline from shjortly after the open…

     

    Futures show the real volatility took place before the open…

     

    On the week, Treasury yields are dramatically higher (thioug below yesterday's peaks) though we note the significant title in the curve with 2Y -2bps, and 30Y +6bps…

     

    Which sent curves soaring…

     

    The USDollar legged notably lower on the poor retail sales data extending its losses to over 1.1% for the week… (worst day for the USD since 3/20)

     

    JPY had its strongest day (carry unwinds continue) in 2 months…

    Here's why… (via none other than Gartman)

    To end our discussion of the forex markets, we think it is time to return to an old friend: long of the English speaking currencies/short of the Yen and we shall do so en masse this morning, buying the US, the Canadian, the Aussie and the Kiwi dollars against the Yen upon receipt of this commentary. We shall have stops on the trades individually in tomorrow’s TGL, but we’ll give them 2% against us as an initial stop point.

    Commodities very mixed with oil down,copper flat…

     

    With crude pumped after another draw but dumped after production rose once again…

     

    *  *  *

    Gold and silver had quite a day – pushing the former above stocks YTD and the latter best for the year…

     

    and bonds are having their worst year since 2009…

     

     

    Charts: Bloomberg

    Bonus Chart: ETSY! bwuahahah…. From $35.74 highs, down 45% now to today's low of $19.50 (on its way to the $16 IPO price)

     



  • ETF Issuers Quietly Prepare For "Market Meltdown" With Billions In Emergency Liquidity

    Between the dramatic sell-off in German Bunds that unfolded over the course of three weeks beginning on April 21 and the erratic trading that ensued on Tuesday following the weakest JGB auction since 2009, the chickens, as they say, have come home to roost in government bond markets where thanks the ECB, the Fed, and the BoJ’s efforts to monetize anything that isn’t tied down, the market has become hopelessly thin. 

    As we’ve documented exhaustively — and as every pundit and Wall Street CEO is now suddenly screaming about — the secondary market for corporate credit faces a similar dearth of liquidity and at just the wrong time. Issuance is at record levels and money is pouring into IG and HY thanks to CB-induced herding (i.e. quest for yield) and record low borrowing costs (again courtesy of central planners), but thanks to the new regulatory regime which ostensibly aims to curtail systemic risk by cutting out prop trading, banks are no longer willing to warehouse corporate bonds (i.e. dealer inventories have collapsed), meaning that in a rout, investors will be selling into a thin market. The result will be a firesale.

    So while policymakers are still willfully ignorant when it comes to honestly assessing the effect their actions are having on government bond markets, the entire financial universe seems to have recently become acutely aware of the potentially catastrophic conditions prevailing in corporate credit. These concerns have now officially moved beyond the realm of lip service and into the realm of disaster preparedness because as Reuters reports, some of the country’s largest ETF providers are arranging billion dollar credit lines that can be tapped to keep illiquidity from turning an ETF sell-off into a credit market meltdown:

    The biggest providers of exchange-traded funds, which have been funneling billions of investor dollars into some little-traded corners of the bond market, are bolstering bank credit lines for cash to tap in the event of a market meltdown.

     

    Vanguard Group, Guggenheim Investments and First Trust are among U.S. fund companies that have lined up new bank guarantees or expanded ones they already had, recent company filings show.

    The measures come as the Federal Reserve and other U.S. regulators express concern about the ability of fund managers to withstand a wave of investor redemptions in the event of another financial crisis.

     

    They have pointed particularly to fixed-income ETFs, which tend to track less liquid markets such as high yield corporate bonds or bank loans.

     

    “You want to have measures in place in case there are high volumes of redemption so you can meet those redemptions without severely impacting the liquidity of the underlying securities,” said Ryan Issakainen, exchange-traded fund strategist at First Trust…

     

    Under the Wall Street reform act known as Dodd-Frank, banks have been shedding their bond inventories, resulting in less liquidity in fixed-income markets. Because there are fewer bonds available for trading, a huge selloff in the bond markets could worsen the effect of a liquidity mismatch in bond ETFs.

     

    Vanguard, the second-largest U.S. ETF provider, lined up its first committed bank line of credit last year and now has a $2.89 billion facility backed by multiple banks and accessible to all of Vanguard’s funds, covering some $3 trillion in assets, the Pennsylvania-based fund company told Reuters. The new setup is to “make sure that funds will be available in time of market stress when the banks themselves may have liquidity concerns,” Vanguard said.

    Essentially, ETF providers are worried that in a pinch (i.e. when ETF sellers outnumber ETF buyers), they will be forced to liquidate assets into structurally thin markets at fire sale prices in order to meet redemptions, triggering a collapse in the underlying securities (like HY bonds). In the pre-crisis days, this would have been mitigated by banks’ willingness to purchase what the ETF providers are looking to sell, but in the post-Dodd-Frank world this isn’t the case so the idea now is that bank credit lines will essentially allow the ETF providers to become their own dealers, meeting redemptions with borrowed cash while warehousing assets and praying waiting for a more opportune time to sell. 

    In case it isn’t clear enough from the above that ZIRP is in large part responsible for this, consider the following:

    “These funds offer daily or even intraday liquidity to investors while holding assets that are hard to sell immediately, thus making the funds vulnerable to liquidity risk,” U.S. Federal Reserve Vice Chair Stanley Fischer said in a speech in March in Germany, pointing directly to ETFs and saying they have mushroomed in size while tracking indexes of “relatively illiquid” assets.

     

    That is all exacerbated because investors have been pouring money into bond ETFs, while banks, under regulatory pressure to limit their own holdings, have been slashing their bond inventories.

     

    Growth in fixed-income ETFs also means there are now more products tied to corners of the bond market previously untapped by ETFs. Assets in U.S.-listed fixed-income ETFs are up nearly six-fold since 2008, to $335.7 billion at the end of April, according to Thomson Reuters Lipper data.

    And why, one might ask, are investors suddenly interested in exploring “corners” of the bond market where they had previously never dared to tread thus creating demand for ever more esoteric ETF products? Because when risk-free assets are at best yielding an inflation-adjusted zero and at worst have a negative carry, investors are forced into credits they would have never considered before just so they can squeeze out some semblance of yield without simply dumping everything into equities. 

    Of course liquidity protection comes at a cost:

    Banks facing their own reserve requirements against these lines are charging commitment fees that can range from 0.06 percent to 0.15 percent, according to company filings. If a line is actually drawn upon, there would be additional interest charged on any amount borrowed. In many cases, these costs are included in the ETF’s annual expense ratio, and borne by the funds’ investors.

    To recap: central banks have created a hunt for yield that’s driven investors into fixed income categories they wouldn’t have normally considered, creating demand for ever more esoteric ETF products. Thanks to curtailed prop trading, the market for the underlying assets is even thinner than it would have otherwise been, meaning fund managers would be forced into a firesale should a wave of redemptions suddenly rear its ugly head. To mitigate this, ETF issuers are setting up credit lines with the very same banks who in the pre-crisis world would have acted as liquidity providers. The cost of these credit lines is passed on to investors via higher expense ratios meaning fund holders can go ahead and shave another 15bps off of their fixed income ETF returns which are already pitifully low thanks to ZIRP.

     

    In the final analysis, these liquidity lines are essentially distressed loans when drawn down, and the effect is to create yet another delay-and-pray ponzi scheme whereby liquidation is temporarily forestalled by borrowed money.

    Recall that Howard Marks recently warned investors against ignoring the fact that an ETF can’t be more liquid than the underlying assets and the underlying assets can be highly illiquid. So while Marks may have wondered rhetorically what could happen in a worst case scenario, the market is itself now quietly taking steps to avoid that moment as long as possible

     



  • Consequences? Barclays Exec Involved In LIBOR Fixing Becomes Bank's Head Of Asia-Pac

    Although it now appears that the logos of several large US banks are set to plead guilty to rigging FX markets, we’re still fairly certain that the post-crisis policy of never sending any actual people to jail for their role in rigging every single market and fixing every single fix on the face of the planet will persist. 

    As unfortunate as that is, what’s worse is the fact that many of the traders involved in the egregious manipulation of the world’s benchmark rates not only escaped without prison time and with their accumulated fortunes largely intact, but in fact found lucrative employment opportunities at places like BlueCrest Capital Management, where LIBORgate participant Christian Bittar ended up following his dismissal from Deutsche Bank. 

    Of course rate-rigging derivatives traders need not necessarily flee to the buyside should they find themselves in the unfortunate position of having to take one for the team and admit their complicity in seeking to game the market, because as Bloomberg reported earlier today, not only can you remain employed at the firm from which you operated when you were engaged in illegal collusion, you can in fact get promoted.

    Via Bloomberg:

    Mark Dearlove, a Barclays Plc executive who was involved in the manipulation of the London interbank offered rate, was named as the U.K. lender’s head of markets for Asia-Pacific.

     

    The banker will relocate to Tokyo from London, replacing Conor Brown, who’s taking a sabbatical, the company said in a memo confirmed by Hong Kong spokesman Allister Fowler.

     

    Dearlove, an almost 20-year veteran of Barclays, will be responsible for the firm’s equities, credit and so-called macro unit, which comprises currencies, commodities and rates in the region. He was most recently head of treasury execution services, the memo said.

     

    The banker accepted that he was involved in manipulating Libor, a U.K. judge said at a court hearing in January 2014, citing Dearlove’s witness statement.

     

    Former Barclays Chief Operating Officer Jerry Del Missier told lawmakers in July 2012 that he instructed Dearlove to submit artificially low rates, after being instructed to do so by former Chief Executive Officer Robert Diamond. Del Missier and Diamond both resigned at the height of the Libor scandal.

     

    Dearlove will begin his transition to the new role on June 1, while Brown is expected to return to the bank in 2016, according to the memo. Dearlove will join Barclays’ Asia Pacific executive committee and markets executive committee with immediate effect.

    Here’s more on Mark, again via Bloomberg (from January 2014):

    Today’s witness statement, which won’t be made public until a trial, isn’t the first time Dearlove’s role in the submission of Libor rates was discussed in court documents in the case.

     

    Dearlove told another executive, Jonathan Stone, he’d received complaints about the bank’s submissions from an employee of JPMorgan Chase & Co., according to a December 2007 transcript released by the court in October.

     

    He told Stone the bank’s submissions were “all wrong” and wanted to escalate the complaint, according to the transcript.

     

    Dearlove was investigated by Barclays over his conduct and received a written warning from the bank in October 2012, Guardian Care Homes said in court documents today.

     

    Dearlove reported his concerns about Libor to compliance officers, the head of the legal department and other senior management, the documents released today show.

    Naturally we wanted to hear more about Dearlove’s new position at Barclays, expecially given the fact that he’ll be overseeing the bank’s Asia-Pac rates unit, but unfortunately when we clicked through to the Bloomberg article this is what we found:

    Fortunately, WSJ has more:

    Mr. Dearlove was one of the Barclays executives involved in the investigation into the bank’s role in the Libor rate-rigging scandal. It was Mr. Dearlove, who was then head of Barclays’ money market desk, who received instructions from bank management to send in a lower, false submission as part of the Libor setting process, according to U.K. parliamentary hearings. Mr. Dearlove could not be reached for comment.

     

    Barclays in July 2012 settled $450 million of penalties with the U.S. and U.K. regulators for “significant failings” related to Libor and its European equivalent Euribor.

     

    The U.K. bank said in a statement Wednesday: “Following the settlements, the issues regarding Mark’s involvement in the Libor matter have been resolved from the Bank’s perspective.”

    Well in that case, we suppose everything is fine.



Digest powered by RSS Digest

Greece Is Now Just A Political Issue

Greece paid off the IMF yesterday with its IMF reserves. Is that a big deal? Whatever you may want to read into this, it’s been obvious for years that Greece needs major debt restructuring if it wants to move forward and have a future as a country -let alone a member of the eurozone-. Instead, the EU/troika anno 2010 decided to bail out German and French and Wall Street banks (I know there’s an overlap)- instead of restructuring the debts they incurred with insane bets on Greece and its EU membership- and put the costs squarely on the shoulders of the Greek population.

This, as I said many times before, was not an economic decision; it was always entirely political. It’s also, by the way, therefore a decision the ECB should have fiercely protested, since it’s independent and a-political and it can’t afford to be dragged into such situations. But the ECB didn’t protest. And ever since the deed was done, Brussels presents it as if it were as unavoidable as Noah building the Ark. It’s not. It’s still just another decision to put banks before people.

And in this case the people have come out on the very short end of a very long stick. That’s what the Greek discussions have been about ever since Syriza was elected, with a substantial majority, to be the government in Athens. And no matter how many times how many people may claim Greece lived above its means for years, it’s obvious that the unemployed and the hungry children and the elderly without health care did not.

The troika says they bailed out the Greek people. The Greek people say only 8-9% of that bailout ever went to them, with the rest going to cover the losses of international systemic banks, and to the utterly corrupt previous Greek political and economic elites, which, coincidentally, the troika was only too happy to strike deals with, so much so that on the eve of the election Greeks were urged to vote the same elites into power once more, even if they were demonstrably to blame for the downfall of the Greek economy.

The troika wants the Syriza government to execute things that run counter to their election promises. No matter how many people point out the failures of austerity measures as they are currently being implemented in various countries, the troika insists on more austerity. Even as they know full well Syriza can’t give them that because of its mandate. Let alone its morals.

It’s a power game. It’s a political game. It always was. But still it has invariably been presented by both the international-press and the troika as an economic problem. Which has us wondering why this statement by ECB member and Austrian central bank head Ewald Nowotny yesterday, hasn’t invited more attention and scrutiny:

ECB’s Nowotny: Greece’s problem isn’t economic

The Greek problem is more a political question than an economic one, a member of the European Central Bank said Monday. Discussions with political parties such as Greece’s left-wing Syriza and Spain’s Podemos may be refreshing by bringing in new ideas, “but at the end of the day, they must [end in] results,” ECB member Ewald Nowotny said, adding discussions are “not about playing games.”

 

The central banker declined to speculate on how to solve Greece’s financial problem saying the issue “is much more a political question than an economic question.” Mr. Nowotny also doesn’t see the ECB’s role as creating a federalized financial government inside the euro zone. “We cannot substitute the political sphere,” he said.

That seems, from where we’re located, to change the discussion quite a bit. Starting with the role of the ECB itself. Because, for one thing, and this doesn’t seem to be clear yet, if the Greek problem is all politics, as the central bank member himself says, there is no role for a central bank in the discussions. If Greece is a political question, the ECB should take its hands off the whole Greek issue, because as a central bank, it’s independent and that means it’s a-political.

The ECB should provide money for Greece when it asks for it, since there is no other central bank to provide the lender of last resort function for the country. Until perhaps Brussels calls a stop to this, but that in itself is problematic because it would be a political decision forced on an independent central bank once again. It would be better if the ‘union’, i.e. the other members, would make available what Greece needs, but they -seem to- think they’re just not that much of a union.

In their view, they’re a union only when times are good. And/or when all major banks have been bailed out; the people can then fight over the leftover scraps.

The IMF has stated they don’t want to be part of a third Greek bailout. Hardly anyone seems to notice anymore, but that makes the IMF a party to political decisions too. Lagarde et al claim they can’t loan to countries that don’t take the ‘right’ measures, but who decides which measures are the right ones? What’s more, how does the IMF, in that vein, explain the recent loans to Ukraine? Is Kiev doing better than Athens from an economic point of view? Or is this just us sinking into a deepening political quagmire?

Moreover, if we take Mr. Nowotny on his word, why are there still finance ministers and economists involved in the Greek issue negotiations? Doesn’t that only simply lead to confusion and delay? Every single news outlet in the world has taken over German FinMin Schäuble’s comment that Greece should have a referendum if they want, and that maybe that would clarify matters.

But that is not something for Schäuble to comment on, no more than it would be for Greek FinMin Varoufakis to suggest a referendum in Germany. While everyone would consider the latter preposterous, the same everyone takes the former serious. That’s power politics for you, and a press that’s lost track of its position in the world. A press that’s turned into a propaganda mechanism for whoever’s in charge at any given moment in time.

If the Greek issue is now, or perhaps has always been, an overwhelmingly political one, as Nowotny suggests, why do we still have Varoufakis and Dijsselbloem (who only has a degree in agricultural economics, whatever that may be) and former German secret service head Schäuble, discussing matters? After all, why would you leave political issues up to your finance ministers to discuss? That’s not their field.

If it’s all political, shouldn’t it be the political leaders, Merkel and Juncker and Tsipras, talking instead? Something tells us that might not be such a bad idea in any case. Certainly by now. If the ECB itself already says it’s not about money…

Today’s News May 13, 2015

  • Europe Preparing Greek Bankruptcy Loan "In Event Of Grexit"

    Earlier today, we learned that, contrary to what Greek government officials had been implying for the better part of a week, Athens did not have enough money to make a €750 million payment to the IMF on Tuesday. Instead, Greece borrowed most of the money (€650 million according to unnamed officials) from its IMF SDR reserves. This money must be paid back within 30 days. This effectively means that the IMF paid itself and it sets up a hilariously absurd scenario wherein assuming Greece manages to convince creditors to disburse a €7.2 billion tranche of aid later this month, the IMF will send money to Greece, who will send it right back to the IMF to replenish an IMF fund, which was drawn down by the IMF to pay itself back for money it loaned to Greece a long time ago. Put simply: Greece has taken circular funding schemes to a whole new level.

    Meanwhile, the IMF is understandably fed up and according to El Mundo, the Fund will not participate in a new program for the Greeks, something which German FinMin Wolfgang Schaeuble indicated may be a dealbreaker when it comes to structuring another bailout for Athens. 

    The takeaway: it’s likely over. Greece lacks the cash to keep up the facade and the IMF lacks the political will to perpetuate the farce any further. This suggests that both Greece and the creditors formerly known as the “Troika” will need to resort to Plan B. There’s a problem with that however — namely that EU officials have gone out of their way to make it clear that there is no Plan B, because to admit that such a plan existed would be to admit that the euro is in fact dissoluble after all, something which is taboo in polite discussions among European politicians. Here is but one example, via Reuters:

    A top EU official urged Athens and its creditors to make progress in their talks on a cash-for-reform deal on Monday, warning there was no “Plan B” in the event of a Greek default.

     

    “What we now need is real progress,” Frans Timmermans, first vice president of the European Commission, told German newspaper Welt am Sonntag.

     

    When asked whether there was a “Plan B” for the case of Athens defaulting, Timmermans replied: “No, there is no ‘Plan B’ for Greece.”

    That’s from Saturday. Here we are just three days later and as it turns out, Plan B does indeed exist and it is essentially a farewell package to the Greeks. here’s Bloomberg with more:

    Euro-area governments are considering putting together an aid package for Greece to cushion the country’s economy if it was forced out of the euro, according to two people familiar with the discussions.

     

    The Greek government doesn’t expect to need that help. Prime Minister Alexis Tsipras says he’s not considering leaving the currency bloc and is focused on getting the aid he needs to avoid a default.

    Even so, European officials are considering mechanisms to ring fence Greece both politically and economically in the event of a euro breakup, in order to shield the rest of the currency bloc from the fallout, one of the people said.

     

    “There is always a plan B,” Filippo Taddei, an economic adviser to Italian Prime Minister Matteo Renzi, said in an interview in Rome on Tuesday, without referring to the aid package specifically. “But you have to ask yourself who has the ability to step in, in that event. And I think if you start making up a list you realize very quickly that that list is very short.”

     

    While euro-area finance ministers welcomed the progress Greece has made toward qualifying for more financial aid at a meeting in Brussels on Monday, policy makers are still concerned Tsipras may not be prepared to swallow the concessions necessary for a disbursement.

    So on Saturday Plan B was unthinkable but on Tuesday there’s “always a Plan B,” which reminds us of the time when Mario Draghi told Zero Hedge that there’s no such thing as Plan B when it comes to insolvent periphery debtor nations getting cut off from ELA and crashing out of the currency bloc. As a reminder, here is what Draghi said: “If the Euro breaks down, and if a country leaves the Euro, it’s not like a sliding door. It’s a very important thing. It’s a project in the European Union. That’s why you have a very hard time asking people like me “what would happened if. No Plan B.”

    Call it plan “B” or plan “C” or plan “contain this trainwreck so redenomination risk doesn’t start creeping into the minds of Spanish and Italian depositors“, but what it amounts to is a DIP loan and the very fact that it’s being mentioned in the media likely means the plan has been hatched. The only remaining question is what the EU’s farewell package to the Greeks will look like. 



  • "Disastrous Mess" Amtrak Train Derails In Philadelphia (5 Dead, 6 Critical, 50 Injured) – Live Feed

    UPDATE: (via AP)

    An Amtrak train headed to New York City derailed and tipped over in Philadelphia on Tuesday night, mangling the front of it, killing at least five people and injuring several more. Some passengers climbed out of windows to get away.

     

    Mayor Michael Nutter, who confirmed the deaths, said the scene was horrific.

     

    "It is an absolute disastrous mess," he said. "I've never seen anything like this in my life."

    *  *  *

    Shortly after 920pmET, NBC Philadelphia reports an Amtrak train bound for New York from Washington D.C. derailed with approximately 240 people on board. Officials say 8 to 10 cars left the tracks and there are at least 50 injured. Given the images below, somehow there are no fatalities.

    Searching for injured right after crash…

    Inside the train right after the accident…

     

    My train crashed

    A video posted by Yameen Allworld "Holladay" (@yameenallworld) on

    May 12, 2015 at 6:35pm PDT

     

    Live Feed:

     

    As NBC Philadelphia reports,

    NBC10's Keith Jones arrived at the scene shortly after 10 p.m. and said the injured passengers he saw had minor injuries.

     

    Janelle Richards, a producer for NBC Nightly News, was a passenger on the train. According to Richards, the train was supposed to arrive in New York at 10:30 p.m. Around 9:20 p.m. Richards heard a loud crash and people flew up in the air.

     

    Richards says there was a lot of "jerking back and forth" and "a lot of smoke." Richards also says she saw injured passengers who were bleeding.

     

    Patrick Murphy, a former congressman from Pennsylvania's 8th District and Iraq War veteran was also on the train. Murphy says he was in the cafe car when the train "crashed."

     

    "It wobbled at first and then went off the tracks," Murphy said. "There were some pretty banged-up people. One guy next to me was passed out. We kicked out the window in the top of the train car and helped get everyone out."

     

    Murphy says a few of the victims were injured to the point where they couldn't move and one person needed a stretcher. He also says paramedics arrived within eight to nine minutes.

    *  *  *

    *  *  *

    An Associated Press manager who was on the Amtrak train that derailed in Philadelphia says he was watching Netflix when the train started to decelerate, like someone had slammed the brake.

     

    Paul Cheung says everything started to shake and people's stuff started flying everywhere.

     

    He says it all happened "in a flash second."

     

    Cheung says another passenger urged them to escape from the back of his car, which he did.

     

    He saw passengers trying to escape through the windows of cars tipped on their side.

     

    He says the front of the train was mangled. He described it "like a pile metal."

     

    ***



  • America's Achilles' Heel

    Submitted by Dmitry Orlov via Club Orlov blog,

    Last Saturday, a massive Victory Parade was held in Moscow commemorating the 70-year anniversary of the surrender of Nazi Germany to the Red Army and the erection of the Soviet flag atop the Reichstag in Berlin. There were a few unusual aspects to this parade, which I would like to point out, because they conflict with the western official propaganda narrative.

    First, it wasn't just Russian troops that marched in the parade: the troops of 10 other nations took part in it, including the Chinese honor guard and a contingent of Grenadiers from India. Dignitaries from these nations were present in the stands, and the Chinese President Xi Jinping and his wife were seated next to President Vladimir Putin, who, in his speech at the start of the parade, warned against attempts to create a unipolar world—sharp words aimed squarely at the United States and its western allies.

    Second, a look at the military hardware that rolled through Red Square or flew over it would indicate that, short of an outright nuclear mutual self-annihilation, there isn't much that the US military could throw at Russia that Russia couldn't neutralize.

    It would appear that American attempts to isolate Russia have resulted in the exact opposite: if 10 nations, among them the world's largest economy, comprising some 3 billion people, are willing to set aside their differences and stand shoulder to shoulder with the Russians to counter American attempts at global dominance, then clearly the American plan isn't going to work at all. Western media focused on the fact that western leaders declined to attend the celebration, either in a fit of pique or because so ordered by the Obama administration, but this only highlights their combined irrelevance, be it in defeating Hitler, or in commemorating his defeat 70 years later. Nevertheless, in his speech Putin specifically thanked the French, the British and the Americans for their contribution to the war effort. I am sorry that he left out the Belgians, who had been so helpful at Dunkirk.

    One small detail about the parade is nevertheless stunning: Defense Minister Sergei Shoigu, a Tuvan Buddhist and one of the most respected Russian leaders, who presided over the Emergencies Ministry prior to becoming the Defense Minister, did something none of his predecessors ever did: at the beginning of the ceremony, he made the sign of the cross, in the Russian Orthodox manner. This simple gesture transformed the parade from a display of military pomp to a sacred ritual. Then followed the slow march with two flags side by side: the Russian flag, and the Soviet flag that flew on top of the Reichstag in Berlin on Victory Day 70 years ago. The march was accompanied by a popular World War II song? Its title? “The Sacred War.” The message is clear: the Russian military, and the Russian people, have put themselves in God's hands, to do God's work, to once again sacrifice themselves to save the world from the ravages of an evil empire.

    If you try to dismiss any of this as Russian state propaganda, then here is something else you should be aware of. Did you hear of the spontaneously organized procession in which, after the official parade, half a million people marched through Moscow with portraits of their relatives who died in World War II? The event was called “The Eternal Regiment” (??????????? ????). Similar processions took place in many cities throughout Russia, and the total number of participants is estimated at around 4 million. Western press either panned it or billed it as an attempt by Putin to whip up anti-western sentiment. Now that sort of “press coverage,” my fellow space travelers, is pure propaganda! No, it was an enthusiastic, spontaneous outpouring of genuine public sentiment. If you think about it just a tiny bit, nothing on this scale could be contrived artificially, and the thought that millions of people would prostitute their dead for propaganda purposes is, frankly, both cynical and insulting.

    * * *

    Instead of collapsing quietly, the US has decided to pick a fight with Russia. It appears to have already lost the fight, but a question remains: How many more countries will the US manage to destroy before the reality of its inevitable defeat and disintegration finally catches up with it?

    As Putin said last summer when speaking at the Seliger youth forum, “I get the feeling that no matter what the Americans touch, they end up with Libya or Iraq.” Indeed, the Americans have been on a tear, destroying one country after another. Iraq has been dismembered, Libya is a no-go zone, Syria is a humanitarian disaster, Egypt is a military dictatorship executing a program of mass imprisonment. The latest fiasco is Yemen, where the pro-American government was recently overthrown, and the American nationals who found themselves trapped there had to wait for the Russians and the Chinese to extract them and send them home. But it was the previous American foreign policy fiasco, in the Ukraine, which prompted the Russians, along with the Chinese, to signal that the US has taken a step too far, and that all further steps will result in automatic escalation.

    The Russian plan, along with China, India, and much of the rest of the world, is to prepare for war with the US, but to do everything possible to avoid it. Time is on their side, because with each passing day they become stronger while America grows weaker. But while this process runs its course, America might “touch” a few more countries, turning them into a Libya or an Iraq. Is Greece next on the list? What about throwing under the bus the Baltic states (Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania), which are now NATO members (i.e., sacrificial lambs)? Estonia is a short drive from Russia's second-largest city, St. Petersburg, it has a large Russian population, it has a majority-Russian capital city, and it has a rabidly anti-Russian government. Of those four facts, just one is incongruous. Is it being set up to self-destruct? Some Central Asian republics, in Russia's ticklish underbelly, might be ripe for being “touched” too.

    There is no question that the Americans will continue to try to create mischief around the world, “touching” vulnerable, exploitable countries, for as long as they can. But there is another question that deserves to be asked: Do the Americans “touch” themselves? Because if they do, then the next candidate for extreme makeover into a bombed-out wasteland might be the United States itself. Let's consider this option.

    As the events in Ferguson, and more recently in Baltimore, have indicated, the tensions between African-Americans and the police have escalated to a point where explosions become likely. The American “war on drugs” has been essentially a war on young black (and Latino) men; about a third of young blacks are behind bars. They also run a high risk of being shot by the police. To be fair, the police also run a high risk of getting shot by young black males, causing them to be jumpy and to overreact. Given the gradually collapsing economy—close to 100 million working-age Americans are unemployed (“outside the labor force,” if you wish to split hairs)—it would seem that for an ever-increasing chunk of the population cooperating with the authorities is no longer a useful strategy: you get locked up or killed anyway, but you get none of the temporary benefits that come from ignoring the law.

    There is an interesting asymmetry in the American media's ability to block out information about civil unrest and insurgency: if it is happening overseas, then news of it can be carefully calibrated or suppressed outright. (Did American television tell you about the recent resumption of shelling of civilian districts by the Ukrainian military? Of course not!) This is possible because Americans are notoriously narcissistic and largely indifferent to the rest of the world, of which most of them know little, and what they think they know is often wrong. But if the unrest is within the US itself, then the various media outlets find themselves competing against each other in who can sensationalize it better, in order to get more viewership, and more advertising revenue. The mainstream media in the US is tightly controlled by a handful of large conglomerates, making it one big monopoly on information, but at the level of selling advertising market principles still prevail.

    Thus there is the potential for a positive feedback loop: more civil unrest generates more sensationalized news coverage, which in turn amplifies the civil unrest, which further sensationalizes the news coverage. And there is a second positive feedback loop as well: the more civil unrest there is, the more the police overreact in trying to control the situation, thereby generating more rage, amplifying the civil unrest. These two positive feedback loops can continue to run out of control for a while, but the end result, in all such recent incidents, is the same: the introduction of National Guard troops and the imposition of curfew and martial law.

    The swift introduction of the military might seem a bit odd, considering that most police departments, even small-town ones, have been heavily militarized in recent years, and even the security people at some school districts now have military vehicles and machine guns. But the progression is a natural one. On the one hand, when people who habitually resort to brute force find that it isn't working, they naturally assume that this is because they aren't using enough of it. On the other hand, if the criminal justice system is already a travesty and a shambles, then why not just cut through the red tape and impose martial law?

    There is an awful lot of weapons of all sorts in the US already, and more will come in all the time as the US is forced to close overseas military bases due to lack of funds. And they will probably get used, for the same reason and in the same fashion that red bricks came to be used in Boston. You see, plenty of red bricks kept coming into Boston aboard British ships, where they were used as ballast for the return trip. This created the impetus to do something with them. But putting up brick buildings is a difficult, demanding process, especially if laborers are always drunk. And so the solution was to use the bricks to pave sidewalks—something one can do on one's hands and knees. Similarly with the military hardware sloshing back into the US from abroad. It will be used, because it's there; and it will be used in the stupidest way possible: shooting at one's own people.

    But bad things happen to militaries when they are ordered to shoot at their own people. It is one thing to shoot at “towel-heads” in a far-away land; it is quite another to be ordered shoot at somebody who could be your own brother down the street from where you grew up. Such orders result in fragging (shooting your own officers), in refusal to follow orders, and in attempts to stand up for the other side.

    And that's where things get interesting. Because, you see, if you shoot at, imprison, and otherwise abuse a defenseless civilian population long enough, what you get in response is an armed insurgency. The place insurgencies are easiest to organize is in prison. For instance, ISIS, or the Islamic Caliphate, was masterminded by people who had previously worked for Saddam Hussein, while they were imprisoned by the Americans. They took this opportunity to work out an efficient organizational structure and, upon release, found each other and got down to work. Having a third of young American blacks locked up gives them all the opportunity they need to organize an effective insurgency.

    To be effective, an insurgency needs lots of weapons. Here, again, there is a procedure for acquiring military technology that has become almost routine. What weapons are being used by ISIS? Why, of course, American ones, which the Americans provided to the regime in Baghdad, and which ISIS took as trophies when the Iraqi army refused to fight and ran away. And what weapons are being used by the Houthi rebels in Yemen? Why, of course, the American ones, which the Americans provided to the now overthrown pro-American regime there. And what are some of the weapons being used by the Syrian regime of Bashar Assad? Why, of course, American ones, sold to them by the Ukrainian government, which got them from the Americans. There is a pattern here: it seems that whenever Americans arm, train and equip an army, that army stands a really big chance of simply melting away, with the weapons falling into the hands of those who want to use them against American interests. It is hard to see why this same pattern wouldn't hold once the US places much of itself under military occupation.

    And that's where things get really interesting: a well-armed, well-organized insurgency composed of thoroughly radicalized, outraged people who have absolutely nothing to lose and are fighting for their home turf and their families squaring off against a demoralized, defeated US military that has just failed spectacularly in every country it “touched.”

    They say that “You can't fight city hall.” But what if you have a tank battalion that can control four intersections all around city hall, turrets pointed in all directions, firing at anything that moves? And what if you have enough infantry to go around and ring the doorbells of all the key city hall bureaucrats? Wouldn't that change one's odds of victory in fighting city hall?

    The US might get to “touch” a few more countries before this scenario unfolds, but it seems likely that (excepting the possibility of all-out war) eventually America will “touch” itself, and then all those countries whose troops marched through Red Square last Saturday won't have America to kick around any more.



  • Chinese Stocks Overtake US As Most Actively Traded Futures Contract In The World

    Having lost its mantle as largest economy in the world to China… and world’s biggest oil importer (again to China), ‘exceptional’ USA appears to have just lost its Number 1 status in financial market depth to China also

     

    China’s Financial Futures Exchange CSI-300 futures contract has now traded more on average than the massively liquid S&P 500 e-mini contract for the last month…

     

    Of course, with millions of new retail trading accounts every week in China, we suspect this ‘false dawn’ of activity will not be quite as exuberant as we have seen for 6 months.

     

    Charts: Bloomberg



  • More Spending Is Not The Answer To A Slow Economy

    Submitted by Dr. Richard Ebeling via The Cobden Centre blog,

    Old fallacies never seem to die, they just fad away to reemerge once again later on. One such fallacy is that if there is significant unemployment and slow economic growth it must be due to not enough consumers’ spending in the economy, what Keynesian economists call a “failure of aggregate demand.”

    This fallacy has been voiced, once more, in a recent interview with Joseph Stiglitz, professor of economics at Columbia University and the 2001 recipient of the Nobel Prize in Economics.

    In an interview that appears in the British “Globe and Mail” on May 8, 2015, Stiglitz blames the sluggish economic growth in the U.S. and around the world, with accompanying unemployment, on weak market demand due to income inequality.

    “You are not going to have robust growth without adequate demand,” says Stiglitz. “The people at the top who have seen big income gains are saving large portions of their income, on average 35 percent. Those at the very top are not spending their money. People at the bottom, on the other hand, have no choice. To just get by, they have to spend all their income.”

    Stiglitz goes on to say, “The contention that people at the top are the job creators and, if you tax them at higher rates, they won’t create jobs is nonsense. The fact is there is talented entrepreneurs at all levels of the U.S. economy. Whenever there is demand, jobs get created and entrepreneurship flourishes. Our big corporations are sitting on upwards of $2-trillion. The reason they are not investing it is there’s no demand for their goods.”

    Stiglitz argues that what is needed is to “get the economy growing by more equitably sharing income gains and investing in our future.”

    Taxing or Deficit Spending Do Not Create Jobs

    First, if the government attempts to “stimulate” the economy through more of its own spending, the question has to be asked: From where will come the financial means for the government to increase its expenditures?

    If the government taxes the citizenry to finance its increased spending, then every dollar more that the government spends by necessity reduces taxpayers’ spending by an equivalent amount. The net change in overall or total spending in the economy would be zero.

    If the government runs a budget deficit, it must borrow the dollars it wishes to spend above what it takes in, in taxes. Every dollar borrowed by the government in the loan and financial markets is one dollar less of people’s savings available for someone in the private sector to borrow for some investment or consumer purchase. Again, the net change in overall or total spending in the economy would be zero.

    If it is argued that the government need not siphon away a dollar from a private-sector borrower because it can offer a higher rate of interest to attract more savings, the net result will still tend to be the same. Why?

    If income earners decide to save more due to an attractively higher rate of interest the government offers to pay for some of those borrowed dollars, it means that that saver is spending fewer dollars, himself, on consumption or some other spending.

    In addition, pushing up market interest rates to attract savers to lend to the government also raises the cost of borrowing for private businesses. The higher the rates of interest the more likely that some businessmen “at the margin” will find that the cost of borrowing is now greater than the anticipated rate of profit from investing a borrowed sum.

    Economists call this the “crowding-out effect.” Part of the cost of funding the government’s budget deficit comes from a reduction in private sector borrowing and spending due to the higher interest costs. Thus, again, the net effect on total spending in the economy tends towards zero.

    Save or Invest cartoon

    Good Ideas Need Savings and Investment

    Joseph Stiglitz is certainly correct that there are potentially talented entrepreneurs in all walks of life and levels of income in the United States and around the world. But having a good idea and even willingness to take a chance and start or expand an enterprise is not enough.

    In most instances, you need capital to begin and operate a business over a period of time before you have anything ready to sell. You need sufficient funds to cover some of the losses that often will occur before you find a niche and attract enough consumer interest and demand to defray the costs of doing business.

    In other words, there first has to be the savings that facilitates the time-consuming production that will eventually generate the product or services that can earn consumer dollars at some point in the future.

    The Simple Logic of Saving, Investing and Capital Formation

    Let take a simple example first. Imagine Robinson Crusoe alone on his island. If he is to escape from extremely primitive conditions of existence of mere “survival” by picking berries and attempting to catch fish in a stream with his bare hands, Crusoe must invest in the manufacture of “capital,” – tools – to assist in improving and increasing the productivity derivable from his human labor.

    But to do so Crusoe must “save,” that is, he must out of his daily efforts to have enough for survival set aside a sufficient amount of berries and fish as a “store” of goods to live off to free up his time and resources that would otherwise go into immediate production for his present consumption.

    He uses that freed up time and resources to, perhaps, make a bow and arrows, or a canoe and fishing net, so that after the requisite “period of investment” during which he has lived off his “savings,” he will have the capital goods – the tools of production – that will then assist him increasing the quantities, varieties and qualities of the consumption goods that previously were beyond his bare labor’s potential to obtain.

    In this way, he has employed himself in making capital goods with his store of saved consumption goods to live off so his own labor can be diverted from more immediate berry picking and fishing with his bare hands.

    Production Time Results in More Desired Goods

    The manufacture of those capital goods and their use over a period of time once in existence must logically and temporally precede the greater availability of consumer goods that that capital’s existence now makes possible. In other words, besides the time taken to making the canoe and net, he must now paddle out into the waters off his island to first catch that larger harvest of fish that his capital goods enables him to have before he can have that increased and more varied fish supply to eat as part of his dinner.

    At the same time, using his bow and arrows for hunting and utilizing his net for fishing will result in “wear and tear.” That is, capital – tools and equipment – get used up in their use, and Crusoe will have to devote part of his labors and time to maintenance and repair if his ability to hunt and fish is not to be diminished.

    Furthermore, if he is to increase his supply of desired consumer goods even more from their existing availabilities and amounts he must again divert an increased amount of his labor time and resource use to “investing” in more and/or better capital goods above that required to maintain his existing capital.

    Thus, the more he invests in making the capital equipment that increases his capacity to produce greater quantities, varieties and qualities of the finished goods he would like to use and consume, the more resources, time, and labor effort he has to equivalently devote to maintaining his enlarged stock of capital to sustain whatever the standard of living he has been able to establish for himself through savings and investment.

    In the Market, Prices Guide Production for Consumption and Investment

    Of course, in “modern society” the process is more complex than presented when using Robinson Crusoe as a first approximation. In our world, today, this all works in a competitive market system of independent private entrepreneurs who employ and directing the men and material they hire, rent or buy in the arena of exchange.

    In this market setting entrepreneurial decision-makers are guided by the system of market prices that reflect the types and amounts of goods that consumers desire, and on the basis of which entrepreneurs hope to make their profits. Changes in consumer demands are expressed in changes in the relative prices for the various goods offered on the market, and these prices then direct entrepreneurs to shift the types and amounts of goods they decide to produce.

    This also applies to changes people make concerning consumption and savings, that is, their demand for consumer goods in the present versus consumer goods in the future for which they put their savings aside.

    In a properly functioning free market, competitive economy, a decision to consume less and save more may reduce the current demand for some consumer goods. But the greater savings reemerges as spending on investment activities and other types of borrowing when the increased savings results in lower rates of interest to attract willing borrowers in the financial markets where that greater savings has been deposited.

    But why would investors borrow this greater savings, even at lower rates of interest, if the current demand for goods on the market has not increased or maybe even gone down?

    Fire as the Next Big Investment

    Saving “Today” Means a Desire to Demand More “Tomorrow”

    This was explained by the famous Austrian economist, Eugen von Böhm-Bawerk (1851-1914) near the beginning the twentieth century.

    The man who saves curtails his demand for present goods but by no means his desire for pleasure-affording goods generally . . .

     

    “The person who saves is not willing to hand over his savings without return, but requires that they be given back at some future time, usually indeed with interest, either to himself or his heirs.

     

    “Through savings not a single particle of the demand for goods is extinguished outright . . . the demand for goods, the wish for means of enjoyment is, under whatever circumstances men are found, insatiable. A person may have enough or even too much of a particular kind of goods at a particular time, but not of goods in general nor for all time. The doctrine applies particularly to savings.

     

    “For the principle motive of those who save is precisely to provide for their own futures or for the futures of their heirs. This means nothing else than that they wish to secure and make certain their command over the means to the satisfaction of their future needs, that is, over consumption goods in a future time. In other words, those who save curtail their demand for consumption goods in the present merely to increase proportionally their demand for consumption goods in the future.”

    But even if there is a potential future demand for consumer goods, how shall entrepreneurs know what type of capital investments to undertake and what types of greater quantities of goods to offer in preparation for that higher future demand?

    Böhm-Bawerk ‘s reply was to point out that production is always forward-looking, a process of applying productive means today with a plan to have finished consumer goods for sale tomorrow. The very purpose of entrepreneurial competitiveness is to constantly test the market, so as to better anticipate and correct for existing and changing patterns of consumer demand.

    Competition is the market method through which supplies are brought into balance with consumer demands. And if errors are made, the resulting losses or less than the anticipated profits act as the stimuli for appropriate adjustments in production and reallocations of labor and resources among alternative lines of production.

    When left to itself, Böhm-Bawerk argued, the market successfully assures that demands are tending to equal supply, and that the time horizons of investments match the available savings needed to maintain the society’s existing and expanding structure of capital in the long run.

    Wages are Paid Out of Savings, Not Current Consumer Demand

    Böhm-Bawerk explained that all production takes time, and invariably through a series of steps or “stages of production” that finally leads to a finished consumer good available for sale and use. He emphasized that the very nature of the time structure of production means that the goods available for consumption today are goods the production of which extends backwards in time over many production periods of the past, over months or years.

    And the production processes being begun “today” and which will continue over the time periods of many “tomorrows” will only be completed and ready in the form of finished consumer goods at some point in the future.

    The finished consumer goods bought today do not represent a “demand for labor” today. The entrepreneurs demanded that labor in the various stages of production at different times in the past while the consumer goods being purchased today were in the process of being produced.

    And the labor being demanded “today” in the various stages of production, each stage of which represents a future product at a different degree of completion and that will be, respectively, ready for sale as a consumer good at different time periods of the future, is a demand by entrepreneurs looking to future sales, not current period consumer demand for “commodities.”

    But this “demand for labor” by entrepreneurs through these future-oriented stages of production is entirely dependent upon the extend to which incomes and revenues earned in the present and future periods (and the resources they represent) are partly saved and not consumed.

    It is this savings of resources not being utilized for more immediate consumption purposes, that “frees” part of the productive capacity of the society to be diverted to the making and maintaining of capital and providing the means to pay wages to workers who will be hired and employed in the respective processes of production for long periods of time before those specific goods in the manufacture of which they are participating will be offered for sale and generating a revenue in the future.

    Thus, it is savings that represents the greater part of the “demand for labor” in the production processes of the market and not the current period’s demand for consumer goods.

    Don’t Tax Away the Wealth that Provides the Savings for Production

    Keynesian economists like Joseph Stiglitz miss all of this in their simplified and, in fact, simplistic view of the world that all that is needed is more government spending and greater “aggregate demand” to create more employment today.

    When the “rich” are saving rather than consuming they are, in fact, supplying part of the financial wherewithal (and the real resources their savings represents) to maintain and expand the capital supply and to provide the means to pay workers and other resource suppliers incomes over the periods of production that everyday culminates in the availability of the goods and services (and the standard of living) we take for granted.

    Under Stiglitz’s own argument, low or lower-income individuals in society use more of their incomes for consumption and less for savings. By using various government fiscal and other policies to transfer wealth and income from those in society who are greater savers to those who are greater consumers, the net effect over time can be to reduce capital formation and productive investment looking to the future.

    It is savings that supports investment, enables capital formation, and creates and sustains jobs. Faster growth and more jobs depend upon savings and market-oriented investment, not the level or amount of current consumption spending.

    Heaven - No Govn't and No Taxes Cartoon

    Taxes and Regulations Reduce the Ability and Incentives to Invest

    But what about Stiglitz’s statement that American “big corporations are sitting on upwards of $2-trillion.” What he failed to mention is that over half of that money is parked overseas where American firms have earned those sums from foreign investments and sales of goods. Why haven’t those dollars come home?

    The Financial Times reported on May 10, 2015, “The growing cash piles underline the reluctance of boardrooms to repatriate money held abroad even as they tap debt markets to fund record spending on dividends, buybacks and acquisitions.”

    U.S. businesses are double taxed if they bring those dollars back to the U.S.. The foreign government in whose country they earned those profits has already taxed them on their net revenues. If they bring any or all of those dollars back to the United States, Uncle Sam will tax them again on their foreign gains, a practice that few other government follow around the world.

    But what about the profits made a home? Why aren’t more of those profits plowed back into productive activities and forward-looking investments? Partly this is due to what economic historian, Robert Higgs, has called “regime uncertainty,” that is, the uncertainties concerning the future direction of government policies that makes investment decisions more risky than it otherwise has to be.

    This includes the uncertainty surrounding what to expect in terms of government regulations, controls, commands and restrictions in an environment in which the U.S. Federal code of regulations on business activity numbers over 175,000 pages. The enforcement of these regulations is widely open to the discretion and decisions of thousands of government bureaucrats, with often total unpredictability of where and when the regulators will appear and what they will demand or accuse an enterprise of having violated.

    Matching the hindrances of the interventionist state is the manipulations of money and interest rates by central banks everywhere, which distorts markets, misdirects capital and labor use resulting in unsustainable booms and inescapable downturns that bring about wrongly invested capital and misallocated labor. This “wrong twists” to the market takes time to overcome and correct.

    It is government impediments to open, competitive markets – whether in America or in other parts of the world – that are the causes to behind slow growth and sluggish job creation, not “the rich” and their savings.



  • Shale "Revolver Raids" To Resume In October When "Rubber Meets The Road" For HY Energy

    Now that the defaults and bankruptcies have begun, and now that David Einhorn has jumped on the bandwagon (coining a new word in the process), it’s time for banks to start taking a hard look at just how bad the fallout will be once hedges start rolling off and more weak hands are shaken out of the HY oil & gas space. 

    As we discussed at the beginning of last month, the “revolver raids” have already begun for some heavily indebted US shale companies who were set to see their credit lines cut after banks performed their bi-annual review in April, which is based on where crude has traded over the preceding 12 months. Those credit lines will be assessed again in October and according to a UBS survey of the banks who have helped finance the oil & gas industry, the outlook is not good, with nearly two-thirds of respondents indicating that loan quality is likely to deteriorate. No one said they expected conditions to improve and more than 80% of banks reported tightening credit lines to oil & gas companies.

    For its part, UBS believes the “rubber will meet the road” for the HY energy in H2 as energy prices likely will not be high enough to support “lower quality” players. 

    Via UBS:

    HY Energy Spreads have continued to tighten over the last few weeks, with overall energy sector spreads now trading at 611bps, E&P spreads at 688bps, and servicers at 682bps, versus the HY Index at 477bps. This compares with 661bp, 765bp, and 731bp respectively as of 4/22. The outlook from lenders is likely painting a more realistic picture on the state of conditions. As part of the Q1 2015 Fed Senior Loan Officer Survey, special questions were asked to banks who provide financing to firms involved in the oil and natural gas sectors. Specifically, banks were asked to project their outlook for delinquencies and charge-offs assuming both 1) economic activity moves in line with consensus and 2) energy prices evolve as priced via the futures curve. Despite Q1 economic forecasts being optimistic and Q1 commodity prices having stabilized, 60% of banks expected loan quality to deteriorate, while the remainder expected loan quality to remain stable. Virtually no banks expected an improvement in loan quality…

     


    We believe the rubber will hit the road later this year for HY Energy. The recent rally in oil prices is insufficient for lower-quality energy firms who have most of 2016 production unhedged. Not to be forgotten for many E&Ps, natural gas prices are still struggling, and haven’t enjoyed the same bounce as oil prices YTD (Figure 3). Banks may not have cut reserve bank lending facilities aggressively yet, but the October review may be less forgiving with this backdrop. 

     

    In addition, the current spot price of WTI ($59) is well above the UBS 2015 YE forecast of $51, based on demand/supply fundamentals. 

    UBS also discusses one of our favorite topics: the idea that access to capital markets — thanks largely to the Fed-induced quest for yield and concomitant ultra-low borrowing costs — have allowed otherwise insolvent producers to keep right on drilling, contributing to oversupply and, ironically to their own demise.

    Energy has been an outperformer in 2015 and open capital markets are to thank. Oil & Gas Issuance in HY Energy has been $17.5bn YTD, or 12.4% of total issuance. This is below the average 15-16% of the prior four years, but much of this year’s drop occurred in January, while issuance for the rest of 2015 has been closer to historical averages of prior years. Our equity colleagues have also cited $`11bn of E&P equity issuance YTD as of April 27th, and that channel remains open.

    Unfettered market access only serves to delay the inevitable, as proven this week when American Eagle Energy — who pulled a Movie Gallery in early March after failing to make even a single coupon payment —became the fourth casualty of the oil downturn, after filing for Chapter 11 on Monday. As we said last month, expect many more to come as the countdown to the day of reckoning for the US shale sector has just about run out.



  • Political Accountability from a Perspective of an Investor

    By Chris at www.CapitalistExploits.at

    There is a great deal of chatter about the recently concluded British elections in which a posh sounding man with eyes suspiciously close together just trumped another man who obviously economically illiterate is missing a chin. During this particular circus show it’s not a leader people were picking but rather choosing which gang led by these two clowns will run the place.

    It’s deeply troubling to think that the fate of Englishmen is being decided by a band of thieves whose IQ is decidedly smaller than their waistbands. And before I get hate-mail from either side let me say categorically that I consider that statement true irrespective of which of the current buffoons took the reigning spot.

    Dumb and Dumber

    It got me to thinking about running a more equitable, transparent and consequence driven election process. In order to do so I’m going to take some lessons learned in venture capital and see what a new and wonderful world we could all create if we could apply them to politics.

    Think about this: what if voting for candidates and political parties was more like voting for a company to prosper?

    If your candidate and party got in then your life should be better for it, much in the same way when we vote for a company by investing into it. If said company subsequently does well then our lives are enriched by our investment into that company.

    It can all be very simple, unlike this obscure nonsense we have right now.

    In venture capital, as investors we’re often taking positions in very early stage companies where risks to our capital are high. We know that statistically some of these companies won’t make it out alive – such is the nature of the business.

    Since things don’t always work out as we would wish we must act to protect ourselves and our capital. One way of doing this is via anti dilution clauses. One in particular that is commonly used by VCs is called a liquidation preference.

    I think this description is a good one:

    A term used in venture capital contracts to specify which investors get paid first and how much they get paid in the event of a liquidation event such as the sale of the company.

     

    Liquidation preference helps protect venture capitalists from losing money by making sure they get their initial investments back before other parties. If the company is sold at a profit, liquidation preference can also help them be first in line to claim part of the profits. Venture capitalists are usually repaid before holders of common stock and before the company’s original owners and employees.

    Entrepreneurs find it easier to raise money if they are prepared to provide assurances that will go a long way to covering investors potential losses. Eliminating downside for investors while allowing them participation in the upside is a smart thing to do.

    Essentially, investors have the right to get paid first, ahead of founders, and management, and even ahead of preference shareholders. For example, if a company sells for a price lower than the price the investor paid, then the proceeds of the sale on a 1x liquidation preference will go towards those investors until they’re made whole.

    Now, let’s imagine what this would look like in the political circus of elections.

    Voters (shareholders/investors) would vote (invest) for their party (company) and if that party wins then it’s game on.

    The end of any political term in office is deemed to be the liquidation event. In other words at this point the score card is read. All the promises that have been made need to be kept. If at the end of the term they have not kept up to their promises then voters (shareholders) get to keep all of their taxes paid (investments made) and are made whole on their “investments”.

    I’ll go one step further and say that if there exists a shortfall (and looking at the last few 100 years I think it’s safe to say there would be some enormous shortfalls ) that such shortfall is made up by the individuals in the party, all jointly and severally liable. Sounds fair to me!

    I’ll be happy to draft all the agreements for this new system and I won’t charge a dime for it. Consider it humanitarian work.

    – Chris

     

    “There’s another way we’re getting behind business – by sorting out the banks. Taxpayers bailed you out. Now it’s time for you to repay the favor and start lending to Britain’s small businesses.” – David Cameron



  • "More Probable Than Not"

    Submitted by Ben Hunt via Salient Partners' Epsilon Theory blog,

    The only thing that I ask from this group today and the American people is to judge me from this day forward. That’s all I can ask for.
    Alex Rodriguez press conference, February 17, 2009, regarding his steroid use from 2001 – 2003.

    I’m ready to put this chapter behind me and play some ball.
    – Alex Rodriguez “apology” letter, February 17, 2015, regarding his steroid use from 2010 – 2012.

    Brady:

    I would never do something that was outside of the rules of play.  I would never have someone do something that I thought was outside of the rules.

    Reporter:

    So you never knowingly played with a football that was under 12.5 pounds?

    Brady:

    No.

    Tom Brady press conference, January 22, 2015

    Now, we all know that air pressure is a function of the atmospheric conditions. If there is activity in the ball relative to the rubbing process I think that explains why when we gave them to the official and the officials put them at let’s say 12.5 … once the ball reached its equilibrium state it’s probably closer to 11.5.
    – noted physicist and football coach Bill Belichick, January 24, 2015.

    That is an allegation [FOMC quashing their own General Counsel’s investigation of leaks] that I don’t believe has any basis in fact. I’m not going to go into any detail but I don’t know where that piece of information could possibly have come from.
    – Janet Yellen press conference, March 18, 2015.

    The Board’s Inspector General and the Department of Justice are in the midst of an investigation into this matter [FOMC leaks to journalists and market consultants]. We are cooperating fully with them and look forward to the results of their investigation. … I had one meeting with Ms. Regina Schleiger of Medley Global Advisors during the period covered by the staff review. As Vice Chair of the Board, I met with Ms. Schleiger on June 11, 2012, to hear her perspectives on international developments.
    – Janet Yellen letter to Rep. Jeb Hensarling, May 4, 2015.

    Mr. Bernanke said that he was sensitive to the public’s anxieties about the “revolving door” between Wall Street and Washington and chose to go to Citadel, in part, because “it is not regulated by the Federal Reserve and I won’t be doing any lobbying of any sort.” He added that he had been recruited by banks but declined their offers. “I wanted to avoid the appearance of a conflict of interest,” he said. “I ruled out any firm that was regulated by the Federal Reserve.”
    – New York Times, April 16, 2015.

    Senator:

    Fletcher, there's an old saying to the victors belong the spoils.

    Fletcher:

    There's another old saying, Senator.  Don't piss down my back and tell me it's raining.

    "The Outlaw Josey Wales" (1976)

    My father was a doctor who spent his entire career in a small hospital built by the Tennessee Coal and Iron company in Fairfield, Alabama. He was an ER doc way before emergency medicine was its own thing, which meant that he saw a wide gamut of cases, from knife fights to car wrecks to heart attacks. But it also meant that he saw a lot of ordinary colds and various infectious diseases, as the emergency clinic then – as now – was the only on-demand medical facility available for people who couldn’t afford or didn’t have access to private physician practices. Now one of my father’s great joys in life was watching sports on our grainy black and white TV, miraculously upgraded to a grainy color TV when I was 12. I’m sure he spent hundreds, if not thousands, of happy hours watching sports. Unless, of course, the hapless TV commentator made the mistake of excusing the absence of, say, Larry Bird from a Celtics game by saying that Bird “had a touch of the flu” and so was too sick to play, which was guaranteed to send my father into a 10-minute tirade.
     
    “A touch of the flu? A touch of the flu? You mean he has contracted the influenza virus? Are you out of your mind? Do you have any idea what it means to have the flu? Do you have any idea how sick you are if you have the flu? People DIE from the flu, you moron! What does that even mean … a touch of the flu? Is Larry Bird in the hospital? Because if he has influenza, you sure better get him to the hospital! I hope you’ve got a saline IV hooked up to Larry Bird’s arm right now! No, he’s not in the hospital. Do you know why? Because he has a COLD. That’s right, you idiot, he has a COLD! Not the flu!”
     
    Honest to god, this would go on for quite a while. Somehow it never got old to my father to rail at what he perceived as the mendacity – to use a good Tennessee Williams word – of a TV commentator elevating Larry Bird’s status from an ordinary human wrestling with a common cold to a heroic struggle with influenza. Even today, 30 years later, I can’t help but laugh at these memories of my father whenever I read or hear about a player out for the game because of “flu-like symptoms.”
     
    I’ve inherited a lot of my father’s traits, and one of them is his intolerance for this mendacity of language, this intentional failure to call things by their proper names, this linguistic exercise in self-puffery and cover-up. Unfortunately for me and anyone else who shares this peculiar sensitivity, mendacity of language has never been more rampant in all of our social worlds, from sports to politics to markets. 
     
    With the advent of always-on mass media that projects the illusion of a one-to-one personal connection with cartoons like “Tom Brady” and “Jim Cramer” – corporate entities that are connected with but distinct from human beings like Tom Brady and Jim Cramer – language intentionally designed to influence rather than inform is now ubiquitous in the business of sports and politics and markets Why? Because it works. It delays sanctions until after you play in the Super Bowl, until after you sign a quarter of a billion dollar contract. It deflects attention until after your term in office is over, until after you cash in with a book deal and hedge fund consultancy.
     
    To use the ponderous, legally parsed language of the NFL’s Wells Report on “deflate-gate”, language which I think wonderfully encapsulates the pinched spirit of our age, here are four things that I believe are “more probable than not”:
    1) Alex Rodriguez has routinely used steroids and PED’s of various stripes since he was a sophomore in high school.
     
    2) Tom Brady has routinely bribed equipment managers with autographed jerseys and new shoes in order to receive footballs deflated well below what he knew was the legal limit.
     
    3) Janet Yellen has routinely leaked market-moving information to favored private sector conduits, and has also sought to quash internal investigations of same.
     
    4) Ben Bernanke is for sale to the highest bidder.
    But here’s the thing. I’m not that worked up about ANY of these issues. Yes, A-Rod has been juicing for 25 years, and Tom Terrific breaks the rules he thinks he can get away with breaking. Okay. Them and about 5,000 other professional athletes. Janet Yellen, the prime author of Fed “communication policy” (the intentional use of words to influence market expectations), leaks her viewpoint as part of that communication policy and then tries to kill an internal investigation. Okay. Her and every other senior politician and bureaucrat in the history of human civilization. As for Bernanke … a former President of the United States and the leading candidate to be the next President of the United States have personally received more than $100 million in “donations” from mega-corporations and foreign governments, and I’m supposed to be outraged about Ben Bernanke cashing a big check from Ken Griffin?
     
    What I AM worked up about, though, is the mendacity … the utter lack of character and authenticity … on full display in ALL of these cases. All of these cases and so many, many more. 
     
    You want to go work for Citadel? Fine, go work for Citadel. But OWN IT. Don’t insult my … I’m not even going to say intelligence, because it’s not an assault on intelligence we’re talking about here … don’t insult my 50 years of life as a reasonably self-aware human being by claiming that you’re taking the high road here by working for Citadel instead of, say, JP Morgan. I mean, the notion that access to the Fed’s regulatory authority over big banks is somehow the defining characteristic of why Ben Bernanke is a sought-after commodity, or that any public outrage here is clearly misplaced because, after all, he won’t be a – gasp! – bank lobbyist, per se … it’s all just horrifically insulting to anyone with the common sense to know that the sky is blue, that 2 + 2 = 4, and that you don’t meaningfully change the air pressure in footballs by rubbing them vigorously. It’s mendacity and inauthenticity in the first degree.
     
    You want to embark on a conscious policy of manipulating market expectations (yes, manipulating is a strong word, but it’s exactly accurate) by planting a carefully constructed Narrative with journalists like Jon Hilsenrath at the Wall Street Journal and consultants like Regina Schleiger at Medley, journalists and consultants who you know will be influential precisely because they are trumpeting their exclusive access to you? Fine. I totally get it. Once you’ve hit zero on short rates and pushed your balance sheet up over $4 trillion in LSAP’s, jawboning is the only bullet you’ve got left in the gun. But OWN IT. Don’t tell me that you’re meeting with Regina Schleiger at Medley because you want to hear HER perspectives on monetary policy! I’m sure that Ms. Schleiger is a very smart person. I’m sure that she is an insightful observer of the international economic scene. But – and I’m trying to say this in the kindest possible way – there’s not 1 in 100,000 investors who even knows who Ms. Schleiger is, and fewer still who would be willing to pay money or time to hear her personal opinion about the proper course of monetary policy. The exception, we are told, is the Chair of the Federal Reserve, in many respects the most powerful person on the planet … she, of course, is terribly keen to hear Ms. Schleiger’s views on international economics. 
     
    And yes, I know that Fed governors have these consultant meetings all the time. I know that their guests do most of the talking. But I also know, because I’ve done it, that professional investors and allocators are willing to pay tens of thousands of dollars to consultants like Medley, solely to glean a scrap of insight as to what the Fed is thinking, solely to be a willing host of the Narrative virus that the Fed is trying to spread. More to the point, Janet Yellen knows it, too, which is why she has these meetings. The act itself is not a horrible thing … not for A-Rod, not for Brady, not for Yellen, and not for Bernanke. It’s not a crime, or at least not a crime that will shame your children or your fan base. Certainly it’s a difficult and unpleasant thing when you’re revealed, because now you’ve got to deal with the Roger Goodell’s and the Bud Selig’s and the Jeb Hensarling’s and the Elizabeth Warren’s of the world – petty tyrants, all – but you knew there was this chance when you made the decision to break the rules, (or the “rules” in Bernanke’s and 2009 A-Rod’s case). But don’t turn a difficult situation into a personal capitulation to mendacity. Far better to own it.  
     
    Believe it or not, I’m not just venting my spleen at the outrageous displays of mendacity that assault us at every turn. I think that there’s an enormous political opportunity today (and I mean political in the broadest sense of the word, a sense that clearly includes the Fed, and arguably includes the NFL and MLB) to embrace authenticity, even if you are authentically an unlikable or – to use the insult du jour – a “polarizing” person. Not only am I convinced that we are each more likely to be successful in our chosen field when acting authentically (don’t you think that if Tiger Woods had embraced his authentically heel-ish nature in 2009, grown a goatee and moved to a casino suite in Vegas, that he’d still be winning majors today?), but also specifically within the chosen field of politics I think there is such a hunger for authenticity that ANY display of honest conviction when confronted with adversity, even if the adversity is well-deserved for breaking a rule, quickly becomes an enormous asset. Maybe this will turn out to be a more interesting election in 2016 than we think. Then again, with the vast campaign coffers already accumulated by Clinton™ and Bush™, two profoundly inauthentic corporate entities, maybe not.   
     
    Sigh. I know I’m not going to change anything by writing about this stuff, any more than my father was going to change a sports commentator’s patter by yelling at the TV. Like my father, though, I just can’t help myself. It’s never easy to be authentic. It’s never easy to call things by their proper names. It’s never easy to own it. But here in the Golden Age of the Central Banker, it’s never been more important. Or more politically savvy.

     



  • US May Use Military To Confront China In South China Sea Islands Dispute

    Just days after Japanese PM Shinzo Abe leaves Washington (having stepped up his nation's military assertiveness), The Wall Street Journal reports that the US Secretary of Defense has asked staff for military options in the South China Sea (as we have detailed China's land reclamation efforts):

    *U.S. MAY USE MILITARY TO CONFRONT CHINA IN SPRATLY ISLANDS DISPUTE: WSJ

    Having ironically commented on China's "bullying," it appears Nobel-Peace-Prize winner President Obama is preparing for an even bigger objective, amid China's rising threat to USD dominance (with Yuan liberalization and AIIB success).

     

    As The Wall Street Journal reports, the U.S. military is considering using aircraft and Navy ships to directly contest Chinese territorial claims to a chain of rapidly expanding artificial islands, U.S. officials said, in a move that would raise the stakes in a regional showdown over who controls disputed waters in the South China Sea.

    Defense Secretary Ash Carter has asked his staff to look at options that include flying Navy surveillance aircraft over the islands and sending U.S. naval ships to well within 12 nautical miles of reefs that have been built up and claimed by the Chinese in an area known as the Spratly Islands.

     

    Such moves, if approved by the White House, would send a message to Beijing that the U.S. won’t accede to Chinese territorial claims to the man-made islands in what the U.S. considers to be international waters and airspace.

    The proposal under consideration would be to send Navy ships and aircraft to within 12 nautical miles of only those built-up sites that the U.S. doesn’t legally consider to be islands, officials say.

    Under the U.N. Convention on the Law of the Sea, reclaimed features aren’t entitled to territorial waters if the original features are not islands recognized under the agreement, U.S. officials say. Under that interpretation, the U.S. believes it doesn’t need to honor the 12-mile zone around the built-up reefs that weren’t considered to be islands before construction there began.

     

    Several U.S. allies in the region have been privately urging the White House to do more to challenge Chinese behavior, warning Washington that U.S. inaction in the South China Sea risked inadvertently reinforcing Beijing’s territorial claims, U.S. officials said. Some allies in the region have, in contrast, expressed concern to Washington that a change in the U.S.’s approach could inadvertently draw them into a conflict.

     

    “It’s important that everyone in the region have a clear understanding of exactly what China is doing,” a U.S. official said. “We’ve got to get eyes on.” The U.S. has been using satellites to monitor building at the islands.

     

    In recent months, the White House has sought to increase pressure on Beijing to halt construction on the islands through diplomatic channels, as well as by calling out the Chinese publicly in recent press briefings and government reports.

    And it appears the US military has been testing the waters so to speak…

    U.S. military aircraft have repeatedly approached the 12-nautical-mile zone declared by China around the built up reefs. But to avoid an escalation, the planes haven’t penetrate the zone. A senior military official said the flights “have kept a distance from the islands and remained near the 12-mile mark.”

     

    U.S. planes have flown close to the islands where the building has been taking place, prompting Chinese military officers to radio the approaching U.S. aircraft to notify the pilots that they are nearing Chinese sovereign territory. In response, U.S. pilots have told the Chinese that they are flying through international airspace.

     

    The USS Fort Worth, a combat ship, has been operating in recent days in waters near the Spratlys. “We’re just not going within the 12 miles—yet,” a senior U.S. official said.

    Finally, it is worth noting that…

    The military proposals haven’t been formally presented to the White House, which would have to sign off on any change in the U.S. posture. The White House declined to comment on the deliberations.

     

    Officials said the issue is a complicated one because at least some of the areas where the Chinese have been doing construction are, in eyes of the U.S. government, legitimate islands, which would be entitled to a 12-nautical-mile zone.

    *  *  *

    As a reminder, China has been busy…

    Now, a series of satellite images have confirmed the construction of a 10,000 foot runway on the reef, which would appear to suggest that China may be planning on landing military aircraft such as fighter jets on the reclaimed islands. Here, in glorious HD, are the visuals accompanied by descriptions via the Asia Maritime Transparency Initiative:

     
     

    Satellite photography has identified three cement plants operating on the island.

     
     

    China has already constructed in excess of 60 semi-permanent or permanent buildings.

     
     

    At least 20 structures are visible on the southern side of the island (ZH: including a helipad).

     
     

    China is building an airstrip on the island. The airstrip is likely large enough to land nearly any Chinese aircraft.

     
     

    Images taken on April 11 show the runway more than one-third complete.

     
     

    Beijing is also installing port facilities which may be capable of docking military tankers.

    Full interactive report available here from the AMTI

     

    Here’s more color from NY Times on what this may mean from a military and geopolitical perspective:

     
     

    The runway, which is expected to be about 10,000 feet long — enough to accommodate fighter jets and surveillance aircraft — is a game changer in the competition between the United States and China in the South China Sea, said Peter Dutton, professor of strategic studies at the Naval War College in Rhode Island.

     

    “This is a major strategic event,” Mr. Dutton said. “In order to have sea control, you need to have air control…”

     

    In time, Mr. Dutton said, China is likely to install radar and missiles that could intimidate countries like the Philippines, an American ally, and Vietnam, which also have claims to the Spratlys, as they resupply modest military garrisons in the area.

     

    More broadly, he said, China’s ability to use Fiery Cross Reef as a landing strip for fighter and surveillance aircraft will vastly expand its zone of competition with the United States in the South China Sea…

     

    “We absolutely think it is for military aircraft, but of course an airstrip is an airstrip — anything can land on it if it’s long enough,” said James Hardy, Asia-Pacific editor for Jane’s Defense Weekly…

     

    “The main question is, what else would land there?” he said. “Unless they are planning to turn these into resorts — which seems unlikely, not least given the statement from the Foreign Ministry last week — then military aircraft are the only things that would need to land there.”

    And a bit more from Reuters

     
     

    Senator John McCain, chairman of the U.S. Senate Armed Services Committee, called the Chinese moves "aggressive" and said they showed the need for the Obama administration to act on plans to move more military resources into the economically important Asian region and boost cooperation with Asian countries worried by China.

     

    McCain referred to a U.S. intelligence assessment from February that China's military modernization was designed to counteract U.S. strength and said Washington had a lot of work ahead to maintain its military advantage in the Asia-Pacific.

     

    "When any nation fills in 600 acres of land and builds runways and most likely is putting in other kinds of military capabilities in what is international waters, it is clearly a threat to where the world's economy is going, has gone, and will remain for the foreseeable future," he told a public briefing in Congress.

     

    A spokesperson for the U.S. State Department said the scale of China’s land reclamation and construction was fueling concerns within the region that China intends to militarize its outposts and stressed the importance of freedom of navigation.

     

    "The United States has a strong interest in preservation of peace and security in the SouthChina Sea. We do not believe that large-scale land reclamation with the intent to militarize outposts on disputed land features is consistent with the region’s desire for peace and stability."

    *  *  *

    This comes at an interesting time for relations between Beijing and Washington. China’s recent move to evacuate foreign nationals from the embattled Yemeni port city of Aden marked the first time the rising superpower has participated in an international rescue effort. During the same week, state television indicated the country would begin its first patrol by nuclear submarine later this year.

    Meanwhile, the China-led Asian Infrastructure Investment Bank marks a coup in the post-war economic era, as the multilateral institution will seek to plug holes left by the US-dominated IMF and the Japan-influenced ADB, while simultaneously positioning the yuan to play a more prominent role in what is quickly becoming a new economic world order characterized by the ascendancy of the renminbi and the decline of traditional systems that have supported dollar hegemony such as petrocurrency mercantilism. While it’s unclear exactly how ambitious Beijing hopes to be in terms of turning the Spratlys into a military outpost, China’s bold development efforts underscore the degree to which the country isn’t timid when it comes to advancing its interests in the face of Western admonition.



  • NY Governor Probes Nuclear Plant 'Incident' As Oil Spills Into Hudson River

    Having explained to the general public that there was nothing to be concerned about, when an exploding transformer shut down at least one unit of the Indian River nuclear power plant, noting “no danger to public safety,” it appears the situation is not as ‘contained’ as officials hoped. As Sputnik News reports, thousands of gallons of oil that leaked into the Hudson River after the explosion has formed a gigantic oil sheen on the waterway. NY Governor Andrew Cuomo has demanded a probe into the incident, adding that Entergy and contractors will clean up the spill.

    • *CUOMO: PROBE ON WEEKEND INCIDENT AT INDIAN POINT PLANT ONGOING
    • *CUOMO SAYS OIL DISCHARGE RESULT OF FIRE IN A TRANSFORMER
    • *CUOMO: N.Y. WORKING WITH U.S. COAST GUARD TO MONITOR SITUATION
    • *CUOMO: NY, U.S. EVALUATING ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE TO HUDSON RIVER

    As Sputnik News reports,

    The oil made its way into the river following an explosion, fire, and leak that occurred Saturday at the Indian Point nuclear facility in Buchanan, about 40 miles north of Midtown Manhattan.

     

    According to the US Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC), oil leaked into the facility’s discharge drains during the fire, then into the river.

     

     

    However, “there is no doubt that oil was discharged into the Hudson River,” New York Governor Andrew Cuomo said at Indian Point on Sunday. “We have booms in the water now around the discharged pipe to collect any oil that may be in the river.”

     

    The fire did not cause the release of any radiation and did not pose a threat to workers or the public, according to a statement by Entergy Corp, the owner of the nuclear power plant.

     

    The Journal News cited a state official as saying the oil leak “left a sheen of 75-by-100 feet just south of the two reactors, and is likely expanding.”

     

    There is also a “notable odor” in the vicinity of the power plant, according to a boat crew for the watchdog group Riverkeeper, which patrolled the Hudson off Indian Point after the transformer fire.

    *  *  *

    According to the Journal News, US Rep. Nita Lowey of New York said the NRC should not renew Indian Point’s license for their reactors, a matter the federal body is currently considering.

    “This latest episode proves that Indian Point remains a serious threat to public health and safety,” Lowey said in a statement. “We are extremely fortunate that a catastrophic scenario did not unfold, and I urge officials to conduct a swift and thorough investigation.”

     



  • OBaMa'S NeVeRENDiNG SToRY…



  • Continued Weak Consumer Spending "Puzzles" BofA

    BofAML’s Michelle Meyer is “puzzled” at why the US consumer is not the spendaholic her textbooks said they should be by now…

    A setback after the bounce in March

    Based on BAC internal data, which tracks spending on credit and debit cards, consumer spending slowed in April. Retail sales ex-autos declined 0.1% mom seasonally adjusted after climbing 0.8% in March. It is prudent to smooth through the last three months, which reveals an average monthly gain of 0.3%. 

    Given the great deal of noise in the data, it is helpful to examine spending trends by sector.

     

    Department store sales were the weakest, maintaining the post-recession trend of contraction. The housing-related sectors were also sluggish, with a decline in spending on home improvements and home goods. There seemed to be a weaker trend to the former, but the drop in home goods looked like a reversal from recent strength. On the other end, there was a notable gain in spending at electronic stores, which we think may have partly owed to the launch of the Apple iWatch. As we show in Chart 2, prior releases of Apple products caused notable spikes in spending, which the seasonal adjustment process did not capture.

     

    The gain this time was modest relative to previous iPad and iPhone releases. This is likely because much of the sales were on pre-order, which means that actual sales will happen with a lag.

    We are left puzzled by the weak April consumer spending data – we expected the consumer to be a tailwind for growth in this year, offsetting the drag from weaker investment and manufacturing. Even accounting for the softer jobs data in the past two months, the labor market added an average of 255,000 jobs a month over the past six months. Consumers have benefited from lower gasoline prices and confidence has picked up.

    If consumer spending does not accelerate, we will have to question our forecast for GDP growth to accelerate back above 3.0% in the second half of the year. 

    *  *  *

    It appears we are going to need a new excuse…



  • How Much Longer Can The Oil Age Last?

    Submitted by Gaurav Angihotri via OilPrice.com,

    History has been so fascinated with oil and its price movements that it is indeed hard to imagine our future without oil. Over the last few months, we have witnessed how oil prices have fluctuated from a 6 year low level of $42.98 per barrel in March 2015 to the current levels of $60 per barrel. It is interesting to note that, in spite of the biggest oil cartel in the world deciding to stick to its high production levels, the oil prices have increased mainly due to falling US crude inventories and strong demand. However, the current upward rally might be short lived and there may yet be another drop in the international oil price when Iran eventually starts pumping its oil into the market at full capacity, potentially creating another supply glut. In these endless price rallies, it is important to take a holistic view of the global energy industry and question which way it is heading. Are the dynamics of global energy changing with current improvements in renewable energy sources and affordable new storage technologies? Can the oil age end in the near future? Will we ever stop feverishly analyzing the rise and fall of oil prices? Or, will oil remain irreplaceable in our life time?

    Are Renewables ready to take over?

    With little or no pollution, renewables like solar, wind and biofuels are viewed by many as a means to curtail the rising greenhouse emissions and replace oil as a sustainable alternative. There is little doubt as to why China, US, Japan, UK and Germany, some of the world’s biggest energy gluttons have invested heavily in renewables. 

    EIAENergyConsumption

    Image Source: EIA

    However, according to a study conducted by Frankfurt School-UNEP Collaborating Centre for Climate & Sustainable Energy Finance, the United Nations Environment Program (UNEP) and Bloomberg New Energy Finance, the total global investments in renewables fell by 14% to $214 billion in 2013. One of the major reasons of this fall was the backing out of some big oil firms such as BP, Chevron and Conoco Phillips. These companies significantly reduced their investments in renewables and decided to focus on their ‘core’ business; that is, oil and gas. As per Lysle Brinker, an oil and gas equity analyst at IHS "It's not their (Big oil majors) strong suit to be spending a lot of money and time on renewables when they are definitely challenged in their core industry."

    GlobalNewInvestmentInRenewables

    However, if we take the example of the solar industry, where the cost of an average photo voltaic panel is declining at a rate of more than 10% per annum we see that, in spite of reduced global investments, renewables still hold a lot of promise. Some of the major integrated oil and gas companies such as Shell, Total and Statoil have actually been slowly and steadily increasing their renewable related investments. Shell is investing big time in biofuels, while Total, with its stake in Sunpower, is investing substantially in the solar sector while Statoil is placing its bets on wind energy. This shows that renewables are a phenomenon that many believe can give oil a run for its money.

    Is Saudi Arabia sensing an end of oil age?

    “No one can set the price of oil – It is up to Allah”, this is what Saudi Arabia’s oil minister Ali Al Naimi had to say while speaking to CNBC recently. OPEC, which holds around 40 % of the world’s crude output, is showing no signs of reducing its production levels, even if Iran starts pumping more oil after sanctions are lifted should the international nuclear deal with P 5+ 1 counties prove successful. Many see this move by OPEC as a means to protect its market share and drive US shale players out of business. But is the decision of OPEC (especially Saudi Arabia) part of a much bigger game? The Saudis, who lead OPEC, would obviously be very interested in delaying ‘Peak Oil Demand’ after which global demand for oil would start declining steadily, along with Saudi oil revenues.

    According to Bank of America and Merrill Lynch commodity researchers, if crude prices stay in the range of $50 – $70, peak oil demand would be pushed beyond 2030. This delay in peak oil demand would definitely hurt renewables and anyone who is investing in them. As per Alex Thursby, Chief Executive at the National Bank of Abu Dhabi, “Renewable energy technologies are far further advanced than many may believe: solar photovoltaic (PV) and on-shore wind have a track record of successful deployment, and costs have fallen dramatically in the past few years. In many parts of the world, indeed, they are now competitive with hydrocarbon energy sources. Already, more than half of the investment in new electricity generation worldwide is in renewables. Potentially, the gains to be made from focusing on energy efficiency are as great as the benefits of increasing generation. Together, these help us to reframe how we think about the prospects for energy in the region.”

    Yes, OPEC has sensed the end of its glory days. And it is obvious that Saudi Arabia, with 85% of its export revenues coming from petroleum exports does not want the oil age to end anytime soon.

    What can we expect?

    If we look at China, the second biggest global consumer of oil, we find that its oil consumption rate constitutes about one third the world’s total consumption rates and shows no signs of slowing. In fact, EIA even predicts steady growth of China’s oil production reaching 4.6 million barrels per day in 2020 and 5.6 million barrels per day in 2040.

    ChinaOilProductionAndConsumption

    China has also invested heavily in building its strategic petroleum reserves and plans to expand them to 500 million barrels by 2020.

    Now take India, a country that is considered by many as the next solar investment hotspot. India has been investing heavily in building its own strategic petroleum reserves and its public sector undertaking, Oil and Natural Gas Corporation Limited (ONGC) is planning to invest about $62 billion on its discoveries in Krishna Godavari Basin block KG-D5.

    These are two of the world’s fastest growing economies that are investing heavily in renewables but also safeguarding their oil and gas aspirations. Moreover, when we analyze past oil price trends, we find that volatility related to geopolitical equations, speculations, wars, economic sanctions and climate change have always kept the global energy markets guessing about the future. The world is still myopic when it comes to energy. Yes, it wants to embrace renewables but not at the cost of oil. Whatever happens to oil prices in the coming years, one thing is certain: that the age of oil isn’t ending anytime soon, at least not in the next 30 years.



  • Dilbert On College Graduate Career Options

    More tips for the most-indebted graduate class ever...

     

     

    *  *  *

    Dear Class of 2015, 

    Because we recognize your plight, allow us to provide you with a bit of friendly advice as it realtes to your student loans. Once you are uncerimoniously thrown from your dorm into the less-than robust US jobs market, you will likely discover that contrary to what you were told in your economics courses, the US economy is but a shadow of its former self.

    Because you probably didn't study to become a petroleum engineer, you will likely find your student debt burden to be quite onerous. The key to having it discharged is to make just enough money to stay clear of bankruptcy, but not enough to really survive above the poverty line. This is because it's hard to have student debt discharged in the event you go completely broke.

    However, if your discretionary income is so small as to render you incapable of making payments, the government will start you on a program whereby a monthly payment of zero dollars counts towards the 300 "payments" you need to make to have your debt forgiven. Toe this line carefully (i.e. don't slip up and start making too much discretionary income) and the entirety of your student debt will be forgiven in 25 short years without your ever having to pay a dime.

    You're welcome,

    Zero Hedge



  • Goldman Fears Crude Oil's Self-Defeating Rally

    Market rebalancing derailed by price rally…

    The oil market rebalancing has started: weak prices in 1Q15 pushed producers to cut capex while supporting demand. This led to a recovery in prices further fueled by relief that US crude stocks would not breach capacity, strong demand and rising Middle East tensions. The rise in prices was further supported by oil screening as cheap relative to E&P equities, drawing cross-asset investors into buying crude.

     

     

    But, as Goldman Sachs details below, while the rally in oil prices has closed the valuation gap to equities, these trade on historically high multiples and oil itself is now trading at a premium to its own still weak fundamentals in our view.

     

    Goldman therefore views this rally as derailing this rebalancing and setting the stage for sequentially weaker prices, especially with oil speculative length as long as when oil traded at $100/bbl.

     

     

    ..given still weak current and forward fundamentals

    First, while US crude builds turn to draws, it is total petroleum stocks that matter, as rising product stocks will depress refining margins and weigh on crude prices.

     

    Second, our updated supply and demand balance points to an only gradual decline in elevated inventories in 2016 as production growth from low-cost producers such as Saudi, Iraq and Russia help offset strong demand growth and declining non-OPEC ex. US production. Further, we don’t see the US rig curtailment as large enough yet to put production on a persistent downward trend with risk to our flat Iranian production path skewed to the upside.

     

    Third, we believe that WTI oil prices settling above $60/bbl will eventually lead US producers to ramp up activity, draw down a large well backlog and hedge, given improved returns with costs down by c.20%.

    Fourth, the broader imbalance of too much capital looking for opportunities in the energy space remains intact

    The imbalance of too much capital looking for opportunities in the energy space remains intact. For example, the combined dry powder for M&A from the three US oil majors and of North America natural resources private equity funds currently stands at $150 billion, above our analysts forecast capex for the US E&P sector in 2015.

     

     

    While ultimately, the long-run asset value of shale oil reserves bodes well for their ability to attract capital, capital investments are now part of the adjustment process given the collapsed time lag shale has created between when capital is spent and when production rises. With credit and equity access not currently part of the adjustment process, the market has one lever left to balance itself: cash flow through oil prices. This large availability of low-cost external capital therefore exacerbates the need for sustained low prices in our view to keep US producing assets from quickly being redeployed in a lower cost environment.

      Sequential price decline still required

      As a result, while low prices precipitated the market rebalancing, we view the recent rally as premature with crude oil prices expensive relative to current and forecast fundamentals. Ultimately, with evidence at hand that US producers responded aggressively to low prices, the burden of proof has shifted to how they will respond to the recent recovery and whether low-cost producers can sustainably deliver higher production.

       

      This may as a result delay the sequential decline in prices until this fall, especially as we approach a period of seasonally stronger summer demand.

       

      Calling the timing for prices to sequentially decline is challenging in the short run as we approach a period of seasonally stronger summer demand and China SPR fill. Nonetheless, we expect evidence of this fundamental weakness and expected US producer reaction to gradually materialize in the US weekly rig count, hedging flows, weakening refinery margins and monthly OPEC production and rig count growth.

      *  *  *

      Source: Goldman Sachs



    • A Tale Of Two Graphs – Why Bubble Finance Will Fail

      Submitted by David Stockman via Contra Corner blog,

      On Friday the BLS reported, among other things, that full-time employment in April had dropped by 252,000 from the prior month and that the weekly earnings of production workers had risen by the grand sum of 67 cents (0.1%) before inflation and taxes.  But why should still another confirmation that the main street job market is dead in the water stop the robo-traders from another romp higher?

      In fact, this incongruous spectacle of dead wages and soaring financial assets has been going on for several decades now——a transparently obvious trend obfuscated by the unrelenting recency bias of the MSM and the authorized Wall Street/Washington narrative. So let Friday’s incongruous stock market rip serve as a portal into the ugly interior history of how central bank bubble finance has fostered an existential crisis in what remains of American capitalism.

      On the main street side, this isn’t a matter of sluggish recovery from a mysterious financial crisis that arrived, apparently, on a comet from deep space in September 2008. Alas, for three decades running now, the constant dollar weekly wages of full-time workers have been flat as a pancake.

      And let’s be clear. We are not talking here about after school jobs held by quasi-perpetual students, the meager pay of moonlighting moms or the episodic work gigs of society’s tens of million of loosely attached drifters.

      To be sure, the ranks of these marginal job holders have become immense according to the Social Security Administration’s most recent authoritative data—– and it is “authoritative” compared to most of Washington’s statistical mill flotsam because its based on the payroll records of millions of employers who generally do not withhold taxes from ghosts. To wit, there were about 50 million low wage job holders (under $15k/year) who as a group earned an average gross pay of just $6,000 in 2013. So unless there is wholesale violation of the minimum wage laws, upwards of one-third of the US labor force of 155 million is working about 15 hours per week at the lowest lawful pay rate per hour.

      Call that a giant social problem. In truth, however, its not the half of the real crisis. The latter is shown in the graph below, which is for “full-time” workers defined by the BLS as being on the job at least 35 hours per week.

      Thirty years after it was ostensibly “Morning in America”, full-time wage workers have gained only 0.1% per annum in their weekly pay envelope. That’s a rounding error—even if you believe that the BLS’ statistical shenanigans have actually captured cumulative inflation since 1986. In the real world, of course, actual inflation is much higher—-so real wages have self-evidently been sinking for 30 years.

      1986-2015 CAGR……..0.1%

      Nor does this stagnant trend in real wage rates  tell the entire story. The Friday “jobs” report also showed that the share of the prime work age population holding any kind of job—–even a few hours per week “coding” or delivering pizzas—–is now down by fully 10 percentage points from the level it gained after women had fully entered the labor force in the 1990s.

      Employment-16-54-051115 

      Needless to say, even as the main street economy of work and production has been going nowhere, the financial system has erupted skyward. During the last 35 years according to the Fed’s flow-of-funds calculations, the sum of credit market debt outstanding plus the market value of equities has soared from $6 trillion to $95 trillion or by 15X. By contrast, since 1981 the nominal GDP has risen by only 5X.

      This is “financialization” in its full brobdingnagian glory.  A financial sphere which had occupied 212% of GDP in 1981 now weighs in at 537%.  And, no, the starting figure does not represent some temporarily aberrant low bequeathed by the hapless Jimmy Carter; the 1981 ratio was actually the historic norm. During the halcyon times of 1955, for instance, the sum of credit market debt and equity market value actually posted slightly lower at 197% of GDP.

      Total Marketable Securities and GDP - Click to enlarge

      Total Marketable Securities and GDP – Click to enlarge

      So the elephant in the room is the nearly $90 trillion of gain in financial market value during the last 35 years. In a word, it represents a heaping pile of inflation——both the traditional CPI kind and the new style financial inflation inaugurated by the Greenspan Fed, as well.

      Stated in constant 2015 dollars, real GDP was $7.2 trillion in 1981, meaning that it has grown by about 2.5X over the last three and one-half decades to $17.7 trillion at present. All the rest of the 15X gain in financial market value since then is not reflective of capitalism, or human greed or even “deregulation” at work. This is the baleful handiwork of a rogue central bank.

      Total Marketable Securities % of GDP - Click to enlarge

      Total Marketable Securities % of GDP – Click to enlarge

      How did this massive inflation of the financial sphere happen? In a word, financial repression and the doctrine of wealth effects.

      Since the time of Greenspan’s abject panic in the wake of Black Monday in October 1987, the Fed has chronically pegged the money market rate below market clearing levels, thereby fueling an embedded carry trade that has mushroomed relentlessly. And this isn’t just about the record $485 billion of margin debt outstanding or even the several trillions of repo trades that are captured by current reporting systems.

      No, the entire financial system is infected by the endemic carry trades which result from falsification of the money market by the Fed. There are hundreds of trillion of futures, options and OTC “bespoke” contracts outstanding, for example, but they are inherently and systematically mispriced owing to the pegging of money market rates at zero percent for the last 7 years and at a fixed, below-market rate for the past 30 years. The economic evil is as much in the pegging as in the zero bound level because it is the powerhouse peg of the fed that reduces the risk of carrying financial assets with cheap short-term borrowings.

      And the wealth effects doctrine only compounds the deformation. That is, it reduces the price risk of carrying financial assets with high levels of repo or options leverage because of the Fed’s “put” under the market. The latter, of course, is an anomalous artifact of bubble finance which is believed by nearly 100% of the gamblers but denied by virtually all of the money printers.

      But the proof is in the pudding. Downside hedges (i.e. puts on the S&P 500 in their most basic form) are dirt cheap owing to the willingness of market makers to collect nickels on downside insurance, knowing that the Fed is pledged to keep the steamroller of 10-20% market breaks at bay. Indeed, the S&P 500 path shown below could not happen in a free market—–even one with far more healthy fundamentals that the floundering recovery of the past six years.

      In short, in an honest free market gamblers would have to pay more for their carry funding; face much greater uncertainty as to its price and availability; and dissipate for more of their winnings hedging their portfolios than is required under the current central bank driven regime of bubble finance. The contra factual thus presents itself. Namely, would the value of corporate equity have soared from $1.3 trillion to $36.5 trillion or by 28X since 1981 in an honest free market?

      Next, throw into the mix the Fed’s severe interest rate repression in the bond market and you get more financial inflation. When debt is priced drastically below its economic cost and receives a deep tax subsidy to boot, a variation of the supply side theorem manifests itself. Namely, when the cost of servicing debt capital is made artificially low, you get a lot more of it—–from the public and private sectors alike. As to the former, the present day proclivity of politicians to kick-the-fiscal-can is a direct consequence of financial repression.

      With respect to the latter, consider the explosion of corporate bond issuance, which in 1981 amounted to just $550 billion of outstandings or a mere 17% of GDP. Today that figure is $11.6 trillion or 20X larger and amounts to 65% of GDP. Yet, self-evidently, that explosion of new borrowings did not go into the acquisition of productive assets. If it had, real GDP would have grown a lot more rapidly than the 2.7% rate recorded for the 33 years ending in December 2014—-and by the mere 1.1% recorded during the sub-period since Q4 2007.

      Instead, the debt was overwhelmingly used for financial engineering—-or what is ultimately a Ponzi scheme by which new corporate borrowings are used to shrink the outstanding float of stock via LBOs, stock buybacks and cash M&A deals. Consequently, carry trade gamblers are enabled to bid up the shrunken supply of secondary market equities to ever higher levels.

      Not surprisingly, therefore, the US corporate sector’s market capitalization has exploded from $2 trillion in 1981 to $48 trillion at present. That’s right. The nominal value of corporate debt at par plus equity at market has risen by 24X, and most of that gain has occurred since the inauguration of monetary central planning under Greenspan in October 1987.

      Total Corporate Securities and GDP - Click to enlarge

      Total Corporate Securities and GDP – Click to enlarge

      The above graph surely hints at the dangerous instability fostered by bubble finance. And it is not by happenstance that the Greenspan Fed essentially threw in the towel when it authorized so-called “sweep accounts” on bank deposits in the early 1990s—-a maneuver that essentially eliminated reserve requirements on traditional checking account money. Not only does this mean that required reserves in the banking system now amount to a laughably microscopic 0.4% of deposits, but the whole apparatus is irrelevant anyway because banks are now only a minor source of new credit in the bubble finance system.

      What central bank bubble finance has actually unleashed is a self-fueling form of asset-based credit creation. The options, futures and currency markets, for example, are based on what amounts to loans which are collateralized by small fractions (1-10%) of the underlying’s current market value. As valuations rise ever higher, collateral values follow and implicit leverage grows. It is a financial beanstalk.

      At the end of the day, the collateral based finance embedded in the current $95 trillion level of US credit and equity outstanding is far more dangerous than the old fashioned fractional reserve lending of the pre-1990 banking system. At least under the old regime, bank regulators and central bankers like Volcker were steeped in the tradition of safe and sound commercial banking.

      By contrast, the post-Greenspan central bankers have opened a Pandora’s Box of market based hypothecated-finance, and they do not have a clue about the enormous resulting bubble they have unleashed. Nor do they understand that this $95 trillion monster is a voracious rent-seeking vampire squid that makes Goldman Sachs look little a piker. That is, the relentless trading, churning and synthesizing of assets and derivatives within the giant bloated system of finance has almost nothing to do with raising or allocating capital for productive use.

      Instead, this giant $95 trillion pool is where honest savings from the household and business sectors go to be scalped, appropriated and stolen by the hedge funds, dealers, financial engineers and gamblers which populate the casino. And it is the excess girth of it that does the damage, magnifying the rent extraction and dead-weight economic costs by orders of magnitude.

      Stated differently, had the US economy not been “financialized” over the past 35 years and if the historic 200% ratio of credit market debt and corporate equity at market value still prevailed today, the size of the financial system would be $35 trillion, not $95 trillion. On a playing field $60 trillion smaller would there not be far fewer fast money sharks churning, scalping and strip-mining the secondary markets in stocks, bonds, loans and their derivatives?

      But here’s the thing. Maybe 100,000 people “live large” off today’s $95 trillion casino. By contrast, according to the Social Security Administration’s wage records, there were 100 million workers who held any kind of paying job during 2013, who earned a collective total of just $1.65 trillion that year. That amounts to the incredibly small sum of just $16,500 per average worker——and not for a small slice of the labor force but fully two-thirds of all Americans with a job. 

      In short, full-time wage workers have been on a treadmill for decades; average pay for the overwhelming share of jobs celebrated by the talking heads on payroll Friday is pitifully low; and the denizens of the Eccles Building keep their heavy foot on the monetary accelerator as they witlessly inflate a $95 trillion financial bubble—-a true financial vampire squid that they stubbornly deny even exists.

      I have called this a tale of two graphs. But what it really describes is a clear and present danger to American capitalism fostered by an unelected monetary politburo in thrall to its own lust for power and mesmerized by its own doctrinaire group think. The tragedy is that nothing can stop them except the thundering crash of the gargantuan bubble they have single handedly enabled.



    • The Potatoes Of Wrath: Kerry Caption Contest

      John Kerry came, read Putin a long list of grievances that the US has with Russia’s ongoing opposition to everything Obama does around the globe and prevents him from setting a unipolar global agenda, and left, but not before he handed the Russian a basket full of potatoes.

      Perhaps next time ketchup will be more appropriate? Or maybe a carrot?

      Source



    • The Face Of Baltimore You Won't See In The News

      We suspect there will be less rioting and looting after this horrifying clip of a group of Baltimore teens kicking and brutally attacking a Maryland man after he tried to break up a fight

       

       

      Warning: scenes are graphic…

      As WBALTV reports,

      Richard Fletcher was beaten by a gang after asking two girls to stop fighting on his truck in Dundalk, Maryland.

       

      Man, 61, left with horrific injuries and facing $400,000 medical bills after near fatal attack by pack of FIFTY teens, including girls, when he tried to break up a fight

       

      A 17-year-old boy has been charged as an adult for his role in beating a 61-year-old alongside a group of approximately 50 other teens in Baltimore, Maryland, on April 22.

       

      Richard Fletcher was brutally beaten by the teens after he went outside to ask two girls who were fighting on top of his truck to move along and continue their dispute elsewhere.

       

      The mob of teens began to hit and kick Fletcher until he fell to the ground, but the attack didn't end.

       

      After the beating last month, Fletcher was left with broken eye sockets, a broken nose, broken ribs and a brain bleed, according to CBS Baltimore.

       

      He also needed a blood transfusion.

       

      Police have made two arrests in the case and are hoping to bring all of the teens, who are believed to be students at Baltimore Community High School, that participated in the beating to justice.

       

      Antoine Lawson has already been charged with attempted murder and a 15-year-old girl was charged with assault.

      Joe Lamb, who owns a business nearby, saw the attack and said he wasn't all that surprised with what happened based on how the neighborhood has been, WBAL reported.

      He said: 'It has gotten out of hand now, gone too far. 'The kids walk on top of cars, kick dogs, let dogs out, throw trash, steal milk from school and throw it at houses, threaten neighbors with bodily harm.'

      *  *  *



    • NBC Confirms Obama Lied About Bin Laden Raid

      Submitted by Mac Slavo via SHTFPLan.com

      Pulitzer Prize winning investigative journalist Samuel Hersh claimed yesterday that the Obama administration lied to the American people about certain aspects aspects of the 2011 raid that killed Osama Bin Laden. According to Hersh, the United States did not act alone when Navy SEALs were sent to capture or kill the world’s most wanted terrorist. The real story, according to the report, is that members of Pakistani intelligence services were privy to the raid months before it happened and that it was a “walk-in” Pakistani intelligence officer who gave up the location of Bin Laden rather than a CIA operation that tracked him down by following various couriers. Further, it has been claimed that Bin Laden was not buried at sea the way the Obama administration said, but rather, his limbs were simply thrown from the helicopter after the mission (suggesting that some portion of his body, perhaps his head, were retained for posterity’s sake).

      It’s  a markedly different story than the one President Obama told on the night he announced Bin Laden’s death. In that nationally televised speech the President took credit for ordering the raid and made it clear it was a unilateral action involving only American assets.

      The Obama administration has spent the last 24 hours working to discredit the story. Pentagon spokesman Col. Steve Warren said the report from Hersh was “largely a fabrication” with “too many inaccuracies.” The White House says the Hersh’s investigation is riddled with inaccuracies.

      But according to NBC News, which has reportedly been conducting their own investigation for the last several years, Hersh’s claims aren’t that inaccurate after all.

      Two intelligence sources tell NBC News that the year before the U.S. raid that killed Osama bin Laden, a “walk in” asset from Pakistani intelligence told the CIA where the most wanted man in the world was hiding – and these two sources plus a third say that the Pakistani government knew where bin Laden was hiding all along.

       

      The U.S. government has always characterized the heroic raid by Seal Team Six that killed bin Laden as a unilateral U.S. operation, and has maintained that the CIA found him by tracking couriers to his walled complex in Abbottabad, Pakistan.

       

      The new revelations do not necessarily cast doubt on the overall narrative that the White House began circulating within hours of the May 2011 operation. The official story about how bin Laden was found was constructed in a way that protected the identity and existence of the asset, who also knew who inside the Pakistani government was aware of the Pakistani intelligence agency’s operation to hide bin Laden, according to a special operations officer with prior knowledge of the bin Laden mission. The official story focused on a long hunt for bin Laden’s presumed courier, Ahmed al-Kuwaiti.

       

       

      The NBC News sources who confirm that a Pakistani intelligence official became a “walk in” asset include the special operations officer and a CIA officer who had served in Pakistan. These two sources and a third source, a very senior former U.S. intelligence official, also say that elements of the ISI were aware of bin Laden’s presence in Abbottabad. The former official was emphatic about the ISI’s awareness, saying twice, “They knew.”

      Source: NBC News

      Video Report:

       

      The one thing that President Obama could hail as a success during his tenure as President has now been exposed as an outright lie.

      It looks like all those ‘conspiracy nuts’ who took issue with the “official” story following the President’s original announcement of bin Laden’s death were not so crazy after all. There’s a reason millions of Americans have lost trust in their government, and especially with the sitting President of the United States. It’s because we have been consistently lied to about anything and everything of any significance.

      What else are they lying about?

      Fast and Furious gun running? Economic recovery? Official unemployment numbers? Jade Helm military exercises? The Ukraine conflict? Or, what about the deaths of SEAL team members that were supposedly involved with Bin Laden raid?

      Flashback: Representative Joe Wilson breaks State of the Union Decorum when he shouts “You Lie” during President Obama’s speech.

      How right he was…



    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    In September, The UN Launches A Major Sustainable Development Agenda For The Entire Planet

     

     

     

     

     

    United Nations General Assembly.

     

    Michael Snyder Economic Collapse Blog

    The UN plans to launch a brand new plan for managing the entire globe at the Sustainable Development Summit that it will be hosting from September 25th to September 27th.  Some of the biggest names on the planet, including Pope Francis, will be speaking at this summit.  This new sustainable agenda focuses on climate change of course, but it also specifically addresses topics such as economics, agriculture, education and gender equality.  For those wishing to expand the scope of “global governance”, sustainable development is the perfect umbrella because just about all human activity affects the environment in some way.  The phrase “for the good of the planet” can be used as an excuse to micromanage virtually every aspect of our lives.  So for those that are concerned about the growing power of the United Nations, this summit in September is something to keep an eye on.  Never before have I seen such an effort to promote a UN summit on the environment, and this new sustainable development agenda is literally a framework for managing the entire globe.

    If you are not familiar with this new sustainable development agenda, the following is what the official United Nations website says about it…

    The United Nations is now in the process of defining Sustainable Development Goals as part a new sustainable development agenda that must finish the job and leave no one behind. This agenda, to be launched at the Sustainable Development Summit in September 2015, is currently being discussed at the UN General Assembly, where Member States and civil society are making contributions to the agenda.

    The process of arriving at the post 2015 development agenda is Member State-led with broad participation from Major Groups and other civil society stakeholders. There have been numerous inputs to the agenda, notably a set of Sustainable Development Goalsproposed by an open working group of the General Assembly, the report of an intergovernmental committee of experts on sustainable development financing, General Assembly dialogues on technology facilitation and many others.

    Posted below are the 17 sustainable development goals that are being proposed so far.  Some of them seem quite reasonable.  After all, who wouldn’t want to “end poverty”.  But as you go down this list, you soon come to realize that just about everything is involved in some way.  In other words, this truly is a template for radically expanded “global governance”.  Once again, this was taken directly from the official UN website

    1. End poverty in all its forms everywhere

    2. End hunger, achieve food security and improved nutrition, and promote sustainable agriculture

    3. Ensure healthy lives and promote wellbeing for all at all ages

    4. Ensure inclusive and equitable quality education and promote lifelong learning opportunities for all

    5. Achieve gender equality and empower all women and girls

    6. Ensure availability and sustainable management of water and sanitation for all

    7. Ensure access to affordable, reliable, sustainable and modern energy for all

    8. Promote sustained, inclusive and sustainable economic growth, full and productive employment, and decent work for all

    9. Build resilient infrastructure, promote inclusive and sustainable industrialisation, and foster innovation

    10. Reduce inequality within and among countries

    11. Make cities and human settlements inclusive, safe, resilient and sustainable

    12. Ensure sustainable consumption and production patterns

    13. Take urgent action to combat climate change and its impacts (taking note of agreements made by the UNFCCC forum)

    14. Conserve and sustainably use the oceans, seas and marine resources for sustainable development

    15. Protect, restore and promote sustainable use of terrestrial ecosystems, sustainably manage forests, combat desertification and halt and reverse land degradation, and halt biodiversity loss

    16. Promote peaceful and inclusive societies for sustainable development, provide access to justice for all and build effective, accountable and inclusive institutions at all levels

    17. Strengthen the means of implementation and revitalise the global partnership for sustainable development

    As you can see, this list goes far beyond “saving the environment” or “fighting climate change”.

    It truly covers just about every realm of human activity.

    Another thing that makes this new sustainable development agenda different is the unprecedented support that it is getting from the Vatican and from Pope Francis himself.

    In fact, Pope Francis is actually going to travel to the UN and give an address to kick off the Sustainable Development Summit on September 25th

    His Holiness Pope Francis will visit the UN on 25 September 2015, and give an address to the UN General Assembly immediately ahead of the official opening of the UN Summit for the adoption of the post-2015 development agenda.

    This Pope has been very open about his belief that climate change is one of the greatest dangers currently facing our world.  Just a couple of weeks ago, he actually brought UN Secretary General Ban Ki-moon to the Vatican to speak about climate change and sustainable development.  Here is a summary of what happened…

    On 28 April, the Secretary-General met with His Holiness Pope Francis at the Vatican and later addressed senior religious leaders, along with the Presidents of Italy and Ecuador, Nobel laureates and leading scientists on climate change and sustainable development.

    Amidst an unusually heavy rainstorm in Rome, participants at the historic meeting gathered within the ancient Vatican compound to discuss what the Secretary-General has called the “defining challenge of our time.”

    The mere fact that a meeting took place between the religious and scientific communities on climate change was itself newsworthy. That it took place at the Vatican, was hosted by the Pontifical Academy of Sciences, and featured the Secretary-General as the keynote speaker was all the more striking.

    In addition, Pope Francis is scheduled to release a major encyclical this summer which will be primarily focused on the environment and climate change.  The following comes from the New York Times

    The much-anticipated environmental encyclical that Pope Francisplans to issue this summer is already being translated into the world’s major languages from the Latin final draft, so there’s no more tweaking to be done, several people close to the process have told me in recent weeks.

    I think that we can get a good idea of the kind of language that we will see in this encyclical from another Vatican document which was recently released.  It is entitled “Climate Change and The Common Good”, and it was produced by the Pontifical Academy of Sciences and the Pontifical Academy of Social Sciences.  The following is a brief excerpt

    Unsustainable consumption coupled with a record human population and the uses of inappropriate technologies are causally linked with the destruction of the world’s sustainability and resilience. Widening inequalities of wealth and income, the world-wide disruption of the physical climate system and the loss of millions of species that sustain life are the grossest manifestations of unsustainability. The continued extraction of coal, oil and gasfollowing the “business-as-usual mode” will soon create grave existential risks for the poorest three billion, and for generations yet unborn. Climate change resulting largely from unsustainable consumption by about 15% of the world’s population has become a dominant moral and ethical issue for society. There is still time to mitigate unmanageable climate changes and repair ecosystem damages, provided we reorient our attitude toward nature and, thereby, toward ourselves. Climate change is a global problem whose solution will depend on our stepping beyond national affiliations and coming together for the common good. Such transformational changes in attitudes would help foster the necessary institutional reforms and technological innovations for providing the energy sources that have negligible effect on global climate, atmospheric pollution and eco-systems, thus protecting generations yet to be born. Religious institutions can and should take the lead in bringing about that change in attitude towards Creation.

    The Catholic Church, working with the leadership of other religions, can now take a decisive role by mobilizing public opinion and public funds to meet the energy needs of the poorest 3 billion people, thus allowing them to prepare for the challenges of unavoidable climate and eco-system changes. Such a bold and humanitarian action by the world’s religions acting in unison is certain to catalyze a public debate over how we can integrate societal choices, as prioritized under UN’s sustainable development goals, into sustainable economic development pathways for the 21st century, with projected population of 10 billion or more.

    Under this Pope, the Vatican has become much more political than it was before, and sustainable development has become the Vatican’s number one political issue.

    And did you notice the language about “the world’s religions acting in unison”?  Clearly, the Vatican believes that it has the power to mobilize religious leaders all over the planet and have them work together to achieve the “UN’s sustainable development goals”.

    I can never remember a time when the United Nations and the largest religious institution on the planet, the Catholic Church, have worked together so closely.

    So what will the end result of all this be?

    Should we be concerned about this new sustainable development agenda?

    Please feel free to add to the discussion by posting a comment below…

    Today’s News May 12, 2015

    • Demographic Devastation: Italy's Birth Rate Drops To 150 Year Low

      Italian women would “like to have more [children], but the conditions just aren’t good enough,” laments one new mother as CBS News reports, official figures show that in 2014 there were fewer babies born in Italy than at any time since 1861. “Nowadays people don’t want to raise their child in poverty,” but Pope Francis had a different opinion, as The Guardian reported, “a society with a greedy generation, that doesn’t want to surround itself with children, that considers them above all worrisome, a weight, a risk, is a depressed society.

       

      Chart: Bloomberg

      Relative to Europe’s top-‘producing’ nation – Azerbaijan – and its 18.3 births per 1,000 inhabitants, He may well be right but the Italians are in ‘depressed’ company along with Portugal, Greece, and Spain at the lower end of the EU spectrum.

      Chart: The Daily Mail

       

      As CBS News adds, “Nowadays people don’t want to raise their child in poverty,” Francesca said. “They want a good level, a good standard of life for their kids.”

      That’s true across most of the developed world. The birth rate in North America, Russia and Europe is already below the replacement rate of about two children per couple. And in Italy, a quarter of all women have no children at all.

       

      That’s partly the fault of a system that gives women no support, says professor Elizabeth Addis, an expert in demographics and social policy. More than 50 percent of Italian women work outside the home, and yet there’s no affordable day care here, no school meals, and no after-school programs.

       

      “In Italy, this virtuous process of building public services to help women, and to substitute for women’s traditional work, didn’t happen,” Addis said.

       

      “A lot of Italian women are trapped,” said Palmer.

       

      “Right. They will be trapped in a dependent situation in which they can only be housewives, and they don’t want to be housewives — they want to be free.”

       

       

      It’s a crunch that threatens everyone’s standard of living. Reversing the trend will depend partly on a better economy, and more help for working mothers.

       

      And, controversially, it also means welcoming more foreign migrants, including those smuggled into Italian waters every day, and who will join Italy’s immigrant community, with its economic ambitions and higher birth rate.

       

      Conservatives fear those changes will dilute the traditions of a great culture, but the alternative is a weakened Italy out of step with the modern world.

      *  *  *



    • Japanese Govt Bonds Are Crashing After Weakest Auction Since Lehman

      Today's 10Y JGB auction saw the lowest bid-to-cover ratio since Feb 2009 at just 2.24x with a notable tail of 1.1bps (the widest since March) as it appears once again, the total dissolution of liquidity from the largest bond market in the world has left the BoJ and Ministry of Finance losing control. The reaction is dramatic with 5Y through 30Y yields up 5-8bps (10Y +8bps at 47.6bps – the biggest absolute jump in yields in 2 years) leaving 30Y yields at 2-month highs above 1.49% and 10Y yields at 6-month highs.

      Weakest auction since Feb 2009…

       

      Repricing the entire curve dramatically higher…

       

      Sending 10Y yields crashing the most in 2 years to 6-month highs…

       

      This is a major problem, since as we discussed previously, the reignition of VaR shocks (in the 'safest' of assets) can quickly lead to forced selling to reduce risk allocations…

      The second self-feeding dynamic is something we’ve discussed at length before, most notably in 2013 when volatility-induced selling — reminiscent of the 2003 JGB experience — hit the Japanese bond market again, prompting us to ask the following rhetorical question:

       

      What happens to JGB holdings as the benchmark Japanese government bond continues trading with the volatility of a 1999 pennystock, and as more and more VaR stops are hit, forcing even more holders to dump the paper out of purely technical considerations?

       

      The answer was this: A 100bp interest rate shock in the JGB yield curve, would cause a loss of ¥10tr for Japan's banks.

       

      What we described is known as a VaR shock and simply refers to what happens when a spike in volatility forces hedge funds, dealers, banks, and anyone who marks to market to quickly unwind positions as their value-at-risk exceeds pre-specified limits.

       

      Predictably, VaR shocks offer yet another example of QE’s unintended consequences. As central bank asset purchases depress volatility, VaR sensitive investors can take larger positions — that is, when it’s volatility times position size you’re concerned about, falling volatility means you can increase the size of your position. Of course the same central bank asset purchases that suppress volatility sow the seeds for sudden spikes by sucking liquidity from the market.

      In a nutshell, this means that once someone sells, things can get very ugly, very quickly.

      Charts: Bloomberg



    • American Cops Are More Heavily Armed than Front Line U.S. Combat Soldiers In Active War Zones

      Rafael Rivera – who served in the U.S. Army for seven years – writes:

       

      The police in Ferguson have better armor and weaponry than my men and I did in the middle of a war. And Ferguson isn’t alone — police departments across the US are armed for war.

      The Hill notes:

      [Senator] McCaskill pointed out that in some places local police departments are more heavily armed than the National Guard.

      Business Insider points out:

      Someone identifying himself as an 82nd Airborne Army veteran, observing the Ferguson police scene, comment[ed] that “We rolled lighter than that in an actual warzone

      Constitutional and civil rights lawyer John Whitehead notes that homeland security officers within the U.S. have three times as much ammunition as front-line soldiers in Afghanistan (and possess a type of ammunition that is banned in war zones).

      Huffington Post reports:

      Many combat veterans have since pointed out that the SWAT officers are more heavily armed and outfitted than they themselves were while patrolling the streets of Iraq or Afghanistan.

      Indeed, many veterans have noted that American police are more heavily armed than they were when serving on the front line (click for 9 tweets which I can't figure out how to embed).

      The extreme militarization of American police is as anti-American as it gets.

       

       

       

       

       

       

       

       



    • This Is What Happened To Tinder's Predecessor

      Before there was Tinder, which just won a student the Ira Sohn contest for best write up for an “underappreciated valuation” in IAC, there was Adult Friend Finder, aka FriendFinder Networks, a website whose sole purposes was finding, to put it bluntly, a fuck buddy.

      And just like Tinder, back in 2011 when the early stages of the current gargantuan tech bubble were only taking shape, nobody could hide their enthusiasm about the stock.

      BizJournals recalls the froth accompanying the IPO of that particular “matchmaking” site:

      The FriendFinder IPO was first announced in 2008, but was received critically in the depths of the recession.

       

      At first, the company posited that it could raise more than $400 million, according to SEC filings. But that amount shrank as the IPO was delayed.

       

      Mark Albright, a Miami attorney who handles securities law, but was not involved in the FriendFinder deal, said he recalls its IPO came on the heels of those for Angie’s List, Yelp and LinkedIn.

       

      “It looked like they were following behind the success of other social media companies. Outside of Florida, I don’t think FriendFinder had the same appeal as LinkedIn or the Silicon Valley names,” said Albright, a founding partner with Perlman, Bajandas, Yevoli & Albright. “At the time, I believe Penthouse Media companies were profitable, where the others weren’t. So it wasn’t a sexy IPO, so to speak, but it was credible.”

       

      Sex toys, porn stars

       

      When the IPO finally happened, it raised $49 million. FriendFinder shares have been in a virtual tailspin since it went public, and NASDAQ sent the company notice of delisting, which it is appealing.

       

      Dvorkin alleges that, while the stock was tanking, Bell gave himself a raise and spent corporate money on things like “gift baskets of sex toys to non-businesspeople, funded restaurants and clubs, promoted the opening of a restaurant, used private planes for non-business purposes, hosted parties, dinners, trips, hired prostitutes and made payments to porn stars.”

      This is what happened to the shares of AFF since going public: it lasted just 2 years before going, er, tits up.

       

      This time, however, it’s all different. Because you see: Tinder, unlike AdultFriendFinder, is “mobile”; it also has hides no ambitions about profitability in the near, or not so near future (AFF actually had positive EBITDA when it went public). And that’s all that matters for the current generation of sophisticated investors: eyeballs (or in this case some other anatomical organ).

      And then there is of course, Ashley Madison “a website for cheating spouses“, which is looking to raise $200 million for its own unique set of ethically-fluid services.

      Incidentally, the BizJournals article was titled “Prominent investors lose their money after FriendFinder IPO finds few friends on Wall Street.” Fast forward to 2017 when the very same article will be republished, only with Tinder or Ashley Madison instead of FriendFinder. Because contrary to Fed-inflated popular delusions, it is never different this time.



    • War Threat Rises As Economy Declines, Warns Paul Craig Roberts

      Authored by Paul Craig Roberts,

      Keynote Address to the Annual Conference of the Financial West Group, New Orleans, May 7, 2015

      The defining events of our time are the collapse of the Soviet Union, 9/11, jobs offshoring, and financial deregulation. In these events we find the basis of our foreign policy problems and our economic problems.

      The United States has always had a good opinion of itself, but with the Soviet collapse self-satisfaction reached new heights. We became the exceptional people, the indispensable people, the country chosen by history to exercise hegemony over the world. This neoconservative doctrine releases the US government from constraints of international law and allows Washington to use coercion against sovereign states in order to remake the world in its own image.

      To protect Washington’s unique Uni-power status that resulted from the Soviet collapse, Paul Wolfowitz in 1992 penned what is known as the Wolfowitz Doctrine. This doctrine is the basis for Washington’s foreign policy. The doctrine states:

      “Our first objective is to prevent the re-emergence of a new rival, either on the territory of the former Soviet Union or elsewhere, that poses a threat on the order of that posed formerly by the Soviet Union. This is a dominant consideration underlying the new regional defense strategy and requires that we endeavor to prevent any hostile power from dominating a region whose resources would, under consolidated control, be sufficient to generate global power.”

      In March of this year the Council on Foreign Relations extended this doctrine to China.

      Washington is now committed to blocking the rise of two large nuclear-armed countries. This commitment is the reason for the crisis that Washington has created in Ukraine and for its use as anti-Russian propaganda. China is now confronted with the Pivot to Asia and the construction of new US naval and air bases to ensure Washington’s control of the South China Sea, now defined as an area of American National Interests.

      9/11 served to launch the neoconservatives’ war for hegemony in the Middle East. 9/11 also served to launch the domestic police state. While civil liberties have shriveled at home, the US has been at war for almost the entirety of the 21st century, wars that have cost us, according to Joseph Stiglitz and Linda Bilmes, at least $6 trillion dollars. These wars have gone very badly. They have destabilized governments in an important energy producing area. And the wars have vastly multiplied the “terrorists,” the quelling of which was the official reason for the wars.

      Just as the Soviet collapse unleashed US hegemony, it gave rise to jobs offshoring. The Soviet collapse convinced China and India to open their massive underutilized labor markets to US capital. US corporations, with any reluctant ones pushed by large retailers and Wall Street’s threat of financing takeovers, moved manufacturing, industrial, and tradable professional service jobs, such as software engineering, abroad.

      This decimated the American middle class and removed ladders of upward mobility. US GDP and tax base moved with the jobs to China and India. US real median family incomes ceased to grow and declined. Without income growth to drive the economy, Alan Greenspan resorted to an expansion of consumer debt, which has run its course. Currently there is nothing to drive the economy.

      When the goods and services produced by offshored jobs are brought to the US to be sold, they enter as imports, thus worsening the trade balance. Foreigners use their trade surpluses to acquire US bonds, equities, companies, and real estate. Consequently, interests, dividends, capital gains, and rents are redirected from Americans to foreigners. This worsens the current account deficit.

      In order to protect the dollar’s exchange value in the face of large current account deficits and money creation in support of the balance sheets of “banks too big to fail,” Washington has the Japanese and European central banks printing money hand over fist. The printing of yen and euros offsets the printing of dollars and thus protects the dollar’s exchange value.

      The Glass-Steagall Act that separated commercial and investment banking had been somewhat eroded prior to the total repeal during the second term of the Clinton regime. This repeal, together with the failure to regulate over the counter derivatives, the removal of position limits on speculators, and the enormous financial concentration that resulted from the dead letter status of anti-trust laws, produced not free market utopia but a serious and ongoing financial crisis. The liquidity issued in behalf of this crisis has resulted in stock and bond market bubbles.

      Implications, consequences, solutions:

      When Russia blocked the Obama regime’s planned invasion of Syria and intended bombing of Iran, the neoconservatives realized that while they had been preoccupied with their wars in the Middle East and Africa for a decade, Putin had restored the Russian economy and military.

      The first objective of the Wolfowitz doctrine–to prevent the re-emergence of a new rival–had been breached. Here was Russia telling the US “No.” The British Parliament joined in by vetoing UK participation in a US invasion of Syria. The Uni-Power status was shaken.

      This redirected the attention of the neoconservatives from the Middle East to Russia. Over the previous decade Washington had invested $5 billion in financing up-and-coming politicians in Ukraine and non-governmental organizations that could be sent into the streets in protests.

      When the president of Ukraine did a cost-benefit analysis of the proposed association of Ukraine with the EU, he saw that it didn’t pay and rejected it. At that point Washington called the NGOs into the streets. The neo-nazis added the violence and the government unprepared for violence collapsed.

      Victoria Nuland and Geoffrey Pyatt chose the new Ukrainian government and established a vassal regime in Ukraine.

      Washington hoped to use the coup to evict Russia from its Black Sea naval base, Russia’s only warm water port. However, Crimea, for centuries a part of Russia, elected to return to Russia. Washington was frustrated, but recovered from disappointment and described Crimean self-determination as Russian invasion and annexation. Washington used this propaganda to break up Europe’s economic and political relationships with Russia by pressuring Europe into sanctions against Russia.

      The sanctions have had adverse impacts on Europe. Additionally, Europeans are concerned with Washington’s growing belligerence. Europe has nothing to gain from conflict with Russia and fears being pushed into war. There are indications that some European governments are considering a foreign policy independent of Washington’s.

      The virulent anti-Russian propaganda and demonization of Putin has destroyed Russian confidence in the West. With the NATO commander Breedlove demanding more money, more troops, more bases on Russia’s borders, the situation is dangerous. In a direct military challenge to Moscow, Washington is seeking to incorporate both Ukraine and Georgia, two former Russian provinces, into NATO.

      On the economic scene the dollar as reserve currency is a problem for the entire world. Sanctions and other forms of American financial imperialism are causing countries, including very large ones, to leave the dollar payments system. As foreign trade is increasingly conducted without recourse to the US dollar, the demand for dollars drops, but the supply has been greatly expanded as a result of Quantitative Easing. Because of offshored production and US dependence on imports, a drop in the dollar’s exchange value would result in domestic inflation, further lowering US living standards and threatening the rigged, stock, bond, and precious metal markets.

      The real reason for Quantitative Easing is to support the banks’ balance sheets. However, the official reason is to stimulate the economy and sustain economic recovery. The only sign of recovery is real GDP which shows up as positive only because the deflator is understated.

      The evidence is clear that there has been no economic recovery. With the first quarter GDP negative and the second quarter likely to be negative as well, the second-leg of the long downturn could begin this summer.

      Moreover, the current high unemployment (23 percent) is different from previous unemployment. In the postwar 20th century, the Federal Reserve dealt with inflation by cooling down the economy. Sales would decline, inventories would build up, and layoffs would occur. As unemployment rose, the Fed would reverse course and workers would be called back to their jobs. Today the jobs are no longer there. They have been moved offshore. The factories are gone. There are no jobs to which to call workers back.

      To restore the economy requires that offshoring be reversed and the jobs brought back to the US. This could be done by changing the way corporations are taxed. The tax rate on corporate profit could be determined by the geographic location at which corporations add value to the products that they market in the US. If the goods and services are produced offshore, the tax rate would be high. If the goods and services are produced domestically, the tax rate could be low. The tax rates could be set to offset the lower costs of producing abroad.

      Considering the lobbying power of transnational corporations and Wall Street, this is an unlikely reform. My conclusion is that the US economy will continue its decline.

      On the foreign policy front, the hubris and arrogance of America’s self-image as the “exceptional, indispensable” country with hegemonic rights over other countries means that the world is primed for war. Neither Russia nor China will accept the vassalage status accepted by the UK, Germany, France and the rest of Europe, Canada, Japan and Australia. The Wolfowitz Doctrine makes it clear that the price of world peace is the world’s acceptance of Washington’s hegemony.

      Therefore, unless the dollar and with it US power collapses or Europe finds the courage to break with Washington and to pursue an independent foreign policy, saying good-bye to NATO, nuclear war is our likely future.

      Washington’s aggression and blatant propaganda have convinced Russia and China that Washington intends war, and this realization has drawn the two countries into a strategic alliance. Russia’s May 9 Victory Day celebration of the defeat of Hitler is a historical turning point. Western governments boycotted the celebration, and the Chinese were there in their place. For the first time Chinese soldiers marched in the parade with Russian soldiers, and the president of China sat next to the president of Russia.

      The Saker’s report on the Moscow celebration is interesting
      . Especially note the chart of World War II casualties. Russian casualties compared to the combined casualties of the US, UK, and France make it completely clear that it was Russia that defeated Hitler. In the Orwellian West, the latest rewriting of history leaves out of the story the Red Army’s destruction of the Wehrmacht. In line with the rewritten history, Obama’s remarks on the 70th anniversary of Germany’s surrender mentioned only US forces. In contrast Putin expressed gratitude to “the peoples of Great Britain, France and the United States of America for their contribution to the victory.”

      For many years now the President of Russia has made the point publicly that the West does not listen to Russia. Washington and its vassal states in Europe, Canada, Australia, and Japan do not hear when Russia says “don’t push us this hard, we are not
      your enemy. We want to be your partners.”

      As the years have passed without Washington hearing, Russia and China have finally realized that their choice is vassalage or war. Had there been any intelligent, qualified people in the National Security Council, the State Department, or the Pentagon, Washington would have been warned away from the neocon policy of sowing distrust. But with only neocon hubris present in the government, Washington made the mistake that could be fateful for humanity.



    • How Wal-Mart Makes An Instant 65,724% Profit Selling… California Water

      Submitted by Mike Krieger via Liberty Blitzkrieg blog,

      Wal-Mart is facing questions tonight after CBS13 learns the company draws its bottled water from a Sacramento water district during California’s drought.

       

      According to its own labeling, the water in the gallon jugs appears to come from Sacramento’s water supply.

       

      Sacramento sells water to a bottler, DS Services of America, at 99 cents for every 748 gallons—the same rate as other commercial and residential customers. That water is then bottled and sold at Walmart for 88 cents per gallon, meaning that $1 of water from Sacramento turns into $658.24 for Walmart and DS Services.

       

      – From the CBS News in Sacramento article: Wal-Mart Bottled Water Comes From Sacramento Municipal Supply

      We all know there’s a severe drought plaguing much of California. I haven’t focused on this topic much, but I did publish a very powerful post on it last fall titled: Video of the Day – Stunning Scenes from California’s Central Valley Drought. I suggest checking it out if you missed it the first time.  

      Now we learn of some pretty troubling news that Wal-Mart is sourcing some of its bottled water from the Sacramento water supply, despite the fact that: “Sacramento-area water districts are preparing to enforce residential water-use cuts as high as 36 percent.”

      As we all know, you should never let a historic drought get in the way of corporate profit margins; and these appear to be some really nice margins. We learn from CBS News in Sacramento that:

      SACRAMENTO (CBS13) — Wal-Mart is facing questions tonight after CBS13 learns the company draws its bottled water from a Sacramento water district during California’s drought.

       

      According to the label, the water comes from the Sacramento Municipal Water Supply. This comes on the heels of Starbucks opting to move sourcing and production of its Ethos bottled water from California to Pennsylvania.

       

      While the label reads Great Value, the fine print reveals the bottled water is anything but a deal, especially for Sacramento residents.

       

      Sacramento sells water to a bottler, DS Services of America, at 99 cents for every 748 gallons—the same rate as other commercial and residential customers. That water is then bottled and sold at Walmart for 88 cents per gallon, meaning that $1 of water from Sacramento turns into $658.24 for Walmart and DS Services.

      Shouldn’t the residents of Sacramento at least share in some of the profits earned if the municipality is going to sell its precious local resources to a mega corporation?

      Elmets wonders if this perfectly legal business operation will get a big thumbs-down from California consumers. This comes as Sacramento-area water districts are preparing to enforce residential water-use cuts as high as 36 percent.

       

      “It’s certainly leaving a bad taste in everyone’s mouth when you can’t fill up a swimming pool, if you’re building a new home in West Sacramento; you can’t water your lawn if you’re living in this region. And to find out they’re making a huge profit off of this, it’s just not right,” Elmets said.

      Meanwhile, let’s not forget…

      Walmart Admits in its Annual Report that its Profits Depend Heavily on Corporate Welfare

      Let’s see if the people of Sacramento have the will or ability to do anything about this.



    • China's Banks Obscure Credit Risk, Face "Insolvency" In Property Downturn, Fitch Says

      Data released on Friday by state regulators showed that China’s non-performing loans rose 141 billion yuan during Q1, marking the sharpest quarterly increase on record and bringing the total to 983 billion. 

      NPLs have been on the rise in China for quite some time, and as we discussed at the end of March, the pace at which loans to the manufacturing sector have sourced has quickened in the face of the country’s slumping economy, leading the nation’s largest lenders to slash payout ratios. Anxiety over bad debt has only increased in recent weeks after a subsidiary of state-run China South Industries Group was allowed to default without government intervention suggesting that Beijing is willing to let small state-affiliated companies go if the risk to the system is deemed appropriately negligible. 

      The trend is especially worrisome given the sheer size of China’s debt load (a topic we first discussed years ago) which, at $28 trillion, totals more than 280% of GDP. Here’s a look at the breakdown:

      Among that debt is some $364 billion in property loans (i.e. debt backed by property collateral) and according to Fitch, that’s not necessarily a good thing given the country’s slumping real estate sector, which saw developer Kaisa default earlier this year. The worry is that the preponderance of property loans on banks’ books serves to spread real estate risk to the economy writ large. In fact, Fitch says a lengthy downturn for China’s property market could render some large lenders insolvent given their exposure.

      Via Fitch:

      Property exposure is the biggest threat to the viability of China’s banks because of the banking system’s reliance on real estate collateral and the strong linkages between property and other parts of the economy, Fitch Ratings says in a new special report.

       

      The agency estimates that for Fitch-rated banks, loans secured by property – residential mortgages and corporate loans backed by property – have increased 400% since end-2008, compared with 260% for loans overall. Loans secured by property now make up 40% of total loans in these banks. Residential mortgages have more than tripled since end-2008, and corporate loans secured with property have increased almost five-fold in the same period. The use of property collateral is predominant not just among loans to property developers and local government financing vehicles, but also increasingly common among corporate and micro-and-small-enterprise borrowers.

       

      Collateral is supposed to reduce bank risk; but the rise of property collateral in corporate loans may actually increase the chance of bank failure. This is because the widespread use of such collateral has lowered the perceived risks of lending, fuelling China’s credit build-up and spreading real-estate risk to other sectors of the economy.

       

      Banks generally place high confidence in their property collateral to provide reliable and timely protection in the event of default, and consider that low loan-to-value (LTV) ratios provide an adequate buffer against a property-market decline. Fitch believes, however, that a low LTV ratio may not necessarily shelter banks from large losses. Recent history of financial crises show that appraisal of property collateral can be highly misleading as the value of property fluctuates substantially, and corrections often happen abruptly. The value of such collateral in China could also be seriously compromised by hurdles to enforcement.

       

      Fitch views a protracted downturn in property markets as a low probability, but high impact, scenario that could result in a credit crunch and force a chaotic deleveraging process for corporate borrowers. A steep fall in property prices would diminish the value of collateral, weaken banks’ lending capacity and increase borrowers’ default probabilities.

       

      A protracted downturn in property markets could therefore threaten the solvency of Chinese banks, given their modest loss-absorption capacity.

      One might be tempted, upon reading this, to point to “official” data on bad loans at Chinese banks on the way to concluding that “modest loss-aborption capacity” or not, sub-2% NPL ratios certainly do not seem to portend an imminent catastrophe. However, given the official figure is just 1.39%, and given what we know about the state of China’s economy, one could be forgiven for wondering if NPLs at China’s biggest lenders are grossly understated.

      To let Fitch tell it, determining the true extent of China’s NPL problem is complicated by a number of factors and the ‘real’ data might be just as hard to get at as an accurate reading on Chinese GDP. 

      Via Fitch:

      Chinese banks’ shifting of loans into debt investments, receivables, and interbank exposures to bypass lending restrictions, as well as the growth of the shadow banking system make it harder to assess the underlying asset quality of the banks and overall stress in the financial system, Fitch Ratings says in a new special report published today.

       

      China’s asset management companies (AMCs) are playing an increasingly important role outside the banks in managing bad assets. It is common for AMCs to purchase assets directly from borrowers, so bad assets are often transferred to external parties without being recognised as non-performing loans (NPLs). Regulatory forbearance also delays the recognition of asset impairment. These features cloud the veracity of underlying non-performing loans (NPL) levels at banks and more broadly the transparency around the extent of debt problems in the financial system.

       

      This renders NPL analysis less meaningful, especially as banks in China have remarkably similar NPL ratios. Banks’ NPL ratios for local government and property loans are very low because riskier credit often lies off banks’ balance sheets. Policy guidance on agricultural and micro lending may also lead to inappropriate pricing.

       

      The underlying problem is one of debt sustainability. The rapid rise in leverage in China since 2008 is increasingly burdensome, with the interest cost of servicing China’s debt now estimated to have reached 15% of GDP, exceeding nominal GDP growth of below 10%. The need to strike a balance between maintaining adequate growth to support employment and ensuring banking system stability means that banks remain exposed to the risks of this unsustainable trend continuing.

       

      Until China allows for more corporate and state-owned-enterprise defaults, moral hazard will prolong and exacerbate threats to the banking system beyond what reported NPLs indicate. The longer weak entities are permitted to roll over their debt, the greater the build-up and cost of servicing that debt, and the greater the strain on the economy. 

      In addition to the above, there have long been questions around “special mention” loans, a designation which simply refers to outstanding debt that hasn’t yet soured, but very well might. According to The Economist, the percentage of outstanding loans that fall under this cateogry has risen steadily and now stands at around 3.5%.

      *  *  *

      So while we cannot know the true extent to which non-performing ‘assets’ present a systemic risk to the Chinese banking sector and to the broader economy, what we do know is that even the official figures (derived from the data that Beijing allows to be disseminated) show NPLs growing at the fastest rate in history. We also know that at China’s big four banks, loans to manufacturers are going bad at twice the rate as loans to other borrowers and that would certainly seem to be a trend that is likely to accelerate given everything we know about anemic global demand. Finally, we’ve seen one high profile default (Kaisa) and one state-affiliated corporate default (Baoding Tianwei Group) so far this year and indeed, Friday looks to be the day of reckoning for coal importer Winsway Enterprises which missed a $13.5 million coupon payment last month and now faces the end of a 30-day grace period.

      In closing, here’s a visual which depicts the sharp increase in China’s problem debt:



    • A Portrait Of The Classical Gold Standard

      Submitted by Marcia Christoff-Kurapovna via The Mises Institute,

      "The world that disappeared in 1914 appeared, in retrospect, something like our picture of Paradise," wrote the economist Cecil Hirsch in his June 1934 review of R.W. Hawtrey’s classic, The Art of Central Banking (1933). Hirsch bemoaned the loss of the far-sighted restraint that had once prevailed among the "bankers' banks" of the West, concluding that modern times "had failed to attain the standard of wisdom and foresight that prevailed in the 19th century."

      That wisdom and foresight was once upon a time institutionalized throughout an international monetary culture — gold-based, wary of credit, and contemptuous of debt, public or private. This world included central banks including the Bank of England, the Bank of France, the Swiss National Bank, the early Federal Reserve, the Imperial Bank of Austria-Hungary, and the German Reichsbank. But the entrenched hard-money ideology of the time restrained all of them. The Bank of Russia, for example, which once required 50 percent to 100 percent gold backing of all notes issued, possessed the second largest gold reserves on the planet at the turn of the twentieth century.

      "The countries that were tied together in the gold standard system represented to a not inconsiderable degree a community of interest in and responsibility for the maintenance of economic and financial stability throughout the world," recounted Aldoph C. Miller, member of the Federal Reserve Board from 1914 to 1936, in The Proceedings of the Academy of Political Science, in May 1936. "The gold standard was the one outstanding symbol of unity and economic solidarity which the nineteenth century world had developed."

      It was a time when "automatic market forces," as economists of the day referred to them, prevailed over monetary management. Redeemability of money in (fine) gold ensured, within limits, stability in foreign exchange rates. Credit was extended only as far as reserve ratios would allow, and central banks were required to keep fixed reserves of gold against notes-in-circulation and against demand deposits.

      When Markets Dominated Monetary "Policy"

      Gold flows regulated international price relationships through markets, which adjusted themselves accordingly: prices rose when there was an influx of gold — for example, when one country received a debt payment from another country (always in gold), or during such times as the California or Australian gold rushes of the 1870s. These inflows meant credit expansion and a rise in prices. An outflow of gold meant credit was contracted and price deflation followed.

      The efficiency of that standard was not impeded by the major central banks in such a way that "any disturbance of economic or financial character originating at any point in the world which might threaten the continued maintenance of economic equilibrium was quickly detected by foreign exchanges," Miller, the Federal Reserve board member, noted in his paper. "In this way, the gold standard system became in a very real sense a regime or rule of economic health, a method of catching economic disturbances in the bud."

      The Bank of England, the grand master of them all, was the financial center of the universe, whose tight handle on its credit policies was so disciplined that the secured the top spot while not even holding the largest gold reserves. Consistent in its belief that protection of reserves was the chief, and only important, criterion of credit policy, England became the leading exporter of capital, the free market for gold, the international discount market, and international banker for the trade of other countries, as well as her own. The world was in this sense on the sterling standard.

      The Bank of France, wisely admonished by its founder, Napoleon, to make sure France was always a creditor country, was so replete with reserves it made England a 500 million franc loan (in 1915 numbers) at the onset of the World War I. Switzerland, perhaps the last "19th-century-style" hold-out today with unlimited-liability private bankers and strict debt-ceiling legislation, also required high standards of its National Bank, founded in 1907. By the 1930s that country had higher banking reserves than the US; the Swiss franc was never explicitly devalued, unlike nearly every other Western nation’s currency, and the country’s domestic price level remained the most stable in the world.

      For a time, the disciplined mindset of these banks found its way across the Atlantic, where the idea of a central bank had been long the subject of hot debate in the US. The economist H. Parker Willis, writing about the controversy in The Journal of the Proceedings of the Academy of Political Science, October 1913, admonished: "The Federal Reserve banks are to be 'bankers' banks,' and they are intended to do for the banker what he himself does for the public."

      At first, the advice was heeded: in September 1916, almost two years after its founding on December 23,1913, the fledgling Fed worked out an amendment to its gold policy on the basis of a very conservative view of credit. This new policy sought to restrain "the undue and unnecessary expansion of credit," wrote Fed board member Miller, in an article for The American Economic Review, in June 1921.

      The Bank of Russia, during the second half of the nineteenth century steered itself through the Crimean War, the Russo-Turkish War, the Russo-Japanese War, impending Balkan wars — not to mention all that was to follow — and managed to emerge with sound fiscal policies and massive gold reserves. According to The Economist of May 20, 1899, Russian holdings were 95 million pounds sterling of gold, while the Bank of France held 78 million sterling worth. (Austria-Hungary held 30 million sterling worth of gold and the Bank of England 30 million sterling worth of both gold and silver.) "Russia up to the very moment of rupture [with Japan, 1904–1905], was working imperturbably at the progressive consolidation of her finances," reported Karl Helfferich of the University of Berlin, at a meeting of The Royal Economic Society [UK] in December 1904. "Even in years of industrial crises and defective harvest, her foreign trade showed an excess of exports over imports more than sufficient to compensate payments sent abroad. And, as guarantee her monetary system she has succeeded in a amassing and maintaining a vast reserve of gold."

      These banks, in turn, drew on the medieval/Renaissance and Baroque-era banking traditions of the Hanseatic League, the Bank of Venice, and Amsterdam banks. Payment-on-demand "in good and heavy gold" was like a blood-oath binding the banker-client relationship. The transfer of credit "did not arise from any such substitution of credit for money," noted Charles F. Dunbar, in The Quarterly Journal of Economics of April 1892, "but from the simple fact that the transfer in-bank saved the necessity of counting coin and manual delivery of every transaction."

      Bankers were forbidden to deal in certain commodities, could not make loans or create credit for the purchase of such commodities, and forbade both foreigners and citizens from buying silver on credit unless the same amount in cash was in the bank. According to Dunbar, a Venetian law of 1403 on reserve requirements became the basis of US banking law on the deposits of public securities in the late 1800s.

      After the fall of bi-metallism in the 1870s, gold continued to perform monetary functions among the main countries of the Western world (and the well-administered Bank of Japan). It was the only medium of exchange and the only currency with unrestricted legal tender. It became the vaunted "measure of value." Bank currency notes were simply used as auxiliary to gold and, in general, did not enjoy the privilege of legal tender.

      The End of An Era

      It was certainly not a flawless system, or without periodic crises. But central banks had to act in an exceptionally prudent manner given the all-over public distrust of paper money.

      As economist Andrew Jay Frame of the University of Chicago, writing in The Journal of Political Economy, in January 1912, noted: "During panics in Britain in 1847 and 1866, when cash payments were suspended, the floodgates of cash were opened [by The Bank of England], the governor sent word to the street that solvent banks would be accommodated, and the panic was relieved." Frame then adds: "However, this extra cash and the increased loans that went with it were very quickly put to an end to avoid credit expansion."

      The US was equally confident of its prudent attitude. Aldoph Miller, writing of Federal Reserve policy, remarked: "The three chief elements of the policy of a central bank or system of reserve holding institutions are best disclosed in connection with the attitude towards 1) gold 2) currency 3) credit." He noted proudly: "The federal reserve system has met [these] tests on the whole with remarkable success."

      But after World War I, a different international landscape was left behind. England had been displaced as the center of international finance; the US and France emerged as the chief post-war creditor countries. The mechanism of the gold standard to which depreciated currencies could be related no longer existed. Only the US was left with a full gold standard. England and France had a gold bullion standard and other countries (Germany, primarily) had a gold-exchange standard.

      A matrix of unbalanced trade relationships began to saturate the international economy. Then, with so many foreign countries attendant upon its speculative boom, the US manipulated its own domestic credit policies to ease credit and exchange-standard controls. This eventually culminated in an international financial crisis of 1931. Under Bretton Woods (1944), the gold standard was effectively abandoned: domestic convertibility was illegal and the role of gold was very constrained in favor of the dollar.

      "It was, at least in theory, simple enough in the old days," wrote a wistful W. Randolph Burgess, head of the New York Federal Reserve, in 1938. "In the present strange new world, where the old gold portents have lost their former meaning, where is the radio beam which the central banker may follow? What is the equivalent of gold?"

      The men of his era and of the late nineteenth century understood the meaning of such a question and, more importantly, why it is one that must be asked. But theirs was a different world, indeed — one without "QE," ZIRP," or "Unknown Knowns" as fiscal policy. And there were no helicopters, either.



    • Surge In VIX Volume Reflects Huge "Interest In Owning Market Crash Protection"

      "I'm not sure if it’s the biggest trade ever, but it's certainly one of them," noted Jamie Tyrrell, a VIX specialist on the CBOE floor, as Bloomberg reports almost $100 million worth of options pegged to the volatility of US equities were traded in a split second at 1216ET today. "Someone is interested in owning a lot of protection," Tyrrell added as just over 1 million contracts were traded, all told, about 54% of the total amount of index options that traded at the CBOE all day Friday. While for every buyer of VIX Calls there is a buyer, the notable push higher in volatility after this trade suggests the trades had characteristics of someone hedging stocks.

       

      The options trade were spread across 4 strikes and 2 maturities…

       

      As Bloomberg adds,

      about 40 different trades went off at 12:16:04 p.m., encompassing contracts that gain in value should the Chicago Board Options Exchange Volatility Index rise over the next few months, according to options data compiled by Bloomberg. The four biggest were each more than 130,000 contracts.

       

      While divining the motive of a single trader who may be operating in more than one market is impossible, buying a call on the VIX is a bet the equity market turbulence will rise, which usually happens when stocks fall. To Jamie Tyrrell, a VIX specialist on the CBOE floor, the trades had characteristics of someone hedging stocks.

      For example the July 23 Strike Calls…

       

      And left VIX (and VIX Futures) surging after the options trade…

       

      As Bloomberg concludes, expectations of higher volatility have been creeping back into the market through options on the VIX. Traders owned about 5 million calls as of Friday, the most since November and more than double the open interest in January. They held 2.6 calls for every put, around the highest ratio since October.

      And The Bloomberg Put-Call Ratio Composite is the lowest (most Calls over puts) since Dec 2010.

       

      Charts:Bloomberg



    • The Average Age Of A Minimum Wage Worker In America Is 36

      Submitted by Michael Snyder via The Economic Collapse blog,

      Did you know that 89 percent of all minimum wage workers in the United States are not teens?  At this point, the average age of a minimum wage worker in this country is 36, and 56 percent of them are women.  Millions upon millions of Americans are working as hard as they can (often that means two or three jobs), and yet despite all of their hard work they still find themselves mired in poverty.  One of the big reasons for this is that we have created two classes of workers in the United States. 

      “Full-time workers” are entitled to an array of benefits and protections by law that “part-time workers” do not get.  And thanks to perverse incentives contained in Obamacare and other ridiculous laws, we have motivated employers to move as many workers from the “full-time” category to the “part-time” category as possible.  It may be hard to believe, but right now only 44 percent of all U.S. adults are employed for 30 or more hours each week.  But to get any kind of a job at all is a real challenge in many parts of the country today.  As you read this article, there are more than 100 million working age Americans that are not employed in any capacity.  And according to John Williams of shadowstats.com, if the federal government was actually using honest numbers the unemployment rate would be sitting at 23 percent.  That is not an “employment recovery” – that is a national crisis.

      The following infographic comes from the Economic Policy Institute.  I certainly do not agree with a lot of the things that the Economic Policy Institute stands for, but I think that these numbers do accurately reflect what “part-time America” looks like today…

      Minimum Wage - Economic Policy Institute

      So what is the solution to this problem?

      Most Democrats believe that raising the minimum wage would fix this.  But as Zero Hedge has pointed out, it isn’t quite that simple…

      Last week, we noted that Democratic lawmakers in the US are pushing for what they call “$12 by ’20” which, as the name implies, is an effort to raise the minimum wage to $12/hour over the course of the next five years. Republicans argue that if Democrats got their wish and the pay floor were increased by nearly 70%, it would do more harm than good for low-income Americans as the number of jobs that would be lost as a result of employers cutting back in the face of dramatically higher labor costs would offset the benefit that accrues to the workers who are lucky enough to keep their jobs.

      Yes, raising the minimum wage would make life better for many minimum wage workers in America.  But a large number of them would also lose their jobs completely, and a lot of small businesses would deeply suffer financially.

      Ideally, what we would love to see happen is for the U.S. economy to be producing so many good jobs that the only people that are looking for entry-level part-time jobs would be teens, people just starting out in the workforce, etc.  Back when I was a teen, I remember walking into a McDonald’s and getting hired on the spot because they were in dire need of workers.  Sadly, those days are long, long gone.

      Over the past several decades, millions of good paying American jobs have been shipped overseas, and millions more have been lost to advancing technology.  And as I wrote about the other day, Barack Obama is deeply betraying American workers by working on a global economic treaty that would destroy millions more good paying jobs.

      Thanks to the foolishness of our politicians, there is now intense competition even for minimum wage jobs at this point.

      We keep hearing about an “employment recovery”, but it is a giant lie.  Posted below is a chart of the civilian employment to population ratio.  As you can see, the percentage of the working age population that is actually employed is much, much lower than it used to be…

      Employment Population Ratio 2015

      In recent months, we have seen the employment-population ratio move slightly higher.  But can this be called “an employment recovery”?  Of course not.  We are still way, way below the level that we were at just prior to the last recession, and now the next recession is just about upon us.

      Meanwhile, the quality of our jobs continues to decline as more Americans are being pushed into “part-time work” with each passing year.

      Since February of 2008, the size of the U.S. population has grown by 16.8 million people.  But during that same time frame, the number of full-time jobs in this country has actually decreased.

      And at this point, the majority of American workers simply do not make enough money to support a middle class family.  The following income numbers come directly from the Social Security Administration

      -39 percent of American workers make less than $20,000 a year.

      -52 percent of American workers make less than $30,000 a year.

      -63 percent of American workers make less than $40,000 a year.

      -72 percent of American workers make less than $50,000 a year.

      Are you starting to see why I am so fired up about all of this?

      We have developed a business culture in this country which does not care about workers.  In business schools all over America, future executives are taught that a corporation only has one goal – to maximize wealth for the shareholders.  Taking care of those that are part of your team is treated as an afterthought at best.

      As corporations have gotten bigger, they have shown less and less concern for those that work for them.  These days, employees are generally regarded as “expensive liabilities” that are to be discarded the moment that their usefulness has come to an end.  And news of layoffs is often rewarded by Wall Street by a surge in the stock prices of the companies making those layoffs.

      In the old days, more businesses in America were family-owned, and employees were often regarded as almost “part of the family”.  Unfortunately, those days have disappeared forever.

      Now, employees are treated like scum by many big companies, and if they don’t like how they are being treated they are told that they can leave.  For example, just consider what was going on at a security company down in Florida

      Jose Molero worked as a site inspector for the company, which provides security for neighborhoods and companies across the country, for more than a year.

       

      Molero says when he went to the Kensington Golf and Country Club guardhouse, he found wooden paddles on a desk, some with staff names on them and one reading “for staff discipline.”

       

      He says there was also what is called a “Wall of Shame,” where the supervisor points out and posts reports that contain grammatical errors.

      When Molero complained about these things to his district manager, he was told that if anyone was offended “maybe they shouldn’t work here”…

      Molero contacted his operations manager, who told him to speak with the district manager. He says the district manager sent him an email response that said, “if that hurts their feelings then maybe they shouldn’t work here.”

      Do you have a similar horror story to share?

      Most of us do.

      The U.S. economy is absolutely dominated by cold, heartless corporations that have no interest in listening to the little guy.  If they could find a way to do it, many of them would operate with no low-level employees at all.  And as technology continues to advance, they will replace as many of us as they can with robots, drones, machines and computers.

      I’ll be honest with you – the future for workers in America looks really bleak.  The competition for any jobs that can’t be shipped overseas or replaced by technology is going to become even more heated.  This means that the middle class is going to get even smaller, the number of Americans dependent on the government is going to continue to explode, and the disparity between the wealthy and the poor is going to become even greater.

      So what is the solution to this giant mess?



    • Picasso Painting Sells For Record $180 Million In Christie's Auction

      If the Fed’s bubble busting team led by Stanley Fischer was looking for runaway inflation, it could have easily found it earlier today without any particular effort, only not in the usual CPI place, but in the price of Women of Algiers (Version O), a “vibrant, multi-hued painting” from Pablo Picasso which moments ago became the world’s most expensive artwork, selling for $179,365,000, included the house’s premium in a Christie’s auction.

      The same auction would also sell Alberto Giacometti’s sculpture “Pointing Man,” which was poised to set a record as the most expensive sculpture sold at auction. They were among two dozen masterpieces from the 20th century Christie’s offered in a curated sale titled “Looking Forward to the Past.”

      The price for the Picasso surpasses the $142.4 million paid two years ago for Francis Bacon’s triptych, “Three Studies of Lucian Freud,” as well as earlier record of $120 million for Edvard Munch’s tortured “Scream.”

      The price discovery, according to the WSJ, was described as a “dogged contest at Christie’s New York salesroom, with the bidding starting at $100 million and shot up quickly, with four telephone bidders competing for the jewel-tone scene of Cubist-style women lounging at odd angles in a room festooned with lush, striped décor.

      But as the price topped $145 million, the bidding war winnowed to a pair of telephone bidders and the room watched, hushed, a few pulling out their cellphones to capture the moment. After 11 minutes, the gavel fell and Brett Gorvy, global head of postwar art, fielded the anonymous winning bid.

      The WSJ describes the painting as “a riot of colors and focuses mainly on a scantily dressed woman whose face evokes Picasso’s former lover, Françoise Gilot. She is joined by a disconnected tumble of other, smaller nudes who each seem to conjure other modern masterworks. The obvious muse is Eugène Delacroix’s 1834 scene of Algerian women in a fantasy interior. But Picasso also painted the work as a homage to his artistic hero and sometime rival Henri Matisse, who had died the year before.”

      Why the high price?

      The Picasso was considered a trophy as much for its ownership pedigree as its artistic merits. The work last changed hands 18 years ago when the estate of U.S. collectors Victor and Sally Ganz sold it through the auction house to a London dealer for $31.9 million. Its seller on Monday remains anonymous.

      However, considering that the estimate price for the painting was nearly $40 million lower than the gavel price, one also has to thank the record $150 billion in global QE injecting stock market liquidity (and removing bond market liquidity) courtesy of the ECB and BOJ each and every month.

      Picasso’s record price on Monday reflects the trophy-hunting atmosphere dominating the global art marketplace now, as billionaires compete for the handful of masterpieces that come up for sale in any given season. Bragging rights are part of the works’ allure, but the collective bidding is also ratcheting price levels for dozens of the world’s top artists.

      This is not the end of it. From AP:

      Experts say high art prices are driven by artworks’ investment value and by wealthy new and established collectors seeking out the very best works.

       

      “I don’t really see an end to it, unless interest rates drop sharply, which I don’t see happening in the near future,” Manhattan dealer Richard Feigen said.

       

      Impressionist and modern artworks continue to corner the market because “they are beautiful, accessible and a proven value,” added Sarah Lichtman, professor of design history and curatorial studies at The New School.

       

      “I think we will continue to see the financiers seeking these works out as they would a blue chip company that pays reliable dividends for years to come,” she said.

      With the one difference that art does not, in fact, pay any dividends, and any purchase is merely a gamble on further price appreciation driven by even greater asset bubbles in the future.

      The identity of the buyer wasn’t immediately disclosed, but there are really just two options: a bored “activist” hedge funder, who has been urging his portfolio companies to lever to the hilt and buy back his stock, or a just as bored Chinese billionare, seeking to bypass China’s capital controls in new and, vibrant and multi-hued ways.

      Now, the only question we have what is the Goldman bid/offer on the AJ-tranche of its brand new securitization product, the Pablo Picasso Backed Securities.



    • Chinese Saturation Reached: World's Largest Smartphone Market Suffers First Drop In 6 Years

      Less than two years ago, the number of smartphone shipments in China soared by roughly 100% year over year, rising over 80 million for the first time. Fast forward to Q1 of 2015 when according to IDC, the Chinese smartphone market – the largest in the world since 2011 when it overtook the US – has not only reached maturity but is now also fully saturated and as a result smartphone shipments suffered their first Y/Y decline, dropping 4.3% on an annual basis.

      As IDC notes, “this is the first time in six years that the China smartphone market declined YoY as the market continues to mature.”

      Worse, on a quarter over quarter basis, the market contracted 8% on the back of a large inventory buildup at the end of last year.

      It was not clear if the ongoing slowdown is more driven by the now virtual halt in China’s growth but a collapse in consumer end demand is undoubtedly bad for all smartphone makers who are betting on China to be the last great demand frontier.

      If there was a silver lining of good news in IDC’s report, it was for Apple, which thanks to its recent immitation of Samsung’s larger screen strategy, has seen the iPhone 6 demand push persist for one more quarter, with a 62% jump in unit growth, giving AAPL the majority of the market share, or 14.7%, ahead of 13.7% for Xiaomi. This was already largely known when Apple reported a record $16.8 billion in revenue in China in the first quarter.

      Per IDC:

      Apple was the top smartphone vendor in China in the first quarter of 2015, with consumers still having a strong appetite for the larger screens on the iPhone 6 and iPhone 6 Plus. Xiaomi slipped to the second position as it faced strong competition from other vendors in the low to mid-range segment of the market, while Huawei maintained third position as it saw a good uptake in the mid-range segment. Samsung and Lenovo both led the market at least once last year, but rankings have since changed quickly, highlighting the volatility of consumers’ brand preference in China.

      Former leader Samsung was far behind, with just 9.7% market share behind Huawei, and ahead only of Lenovo.

       

      “Smartphones are becoming increasingly saturated in China,” said Kitty Fok, Managing Director at IDC China. “China is oftentimes thought of as an emerging market but the reality is that the vast majority of phones sold in China today are smartphones, similar to other mature markets like the US, UK, Australia, and Japan. Just like these markets, convincing existing users as well as feature phone users to upgrade to new smartphones will now be the key to further growth in the China market.

      What does the futures hold for smartphones in China? IDC expects relatively flat growth for China in 2015.  Other trends to expect in China this year include:

      • Multi-brand strategies. Huawei and ZTE are positioning younger sub-brands Honor and nubia, respectively, to chip away at Xiaomi’s user base, and to attempt to gain a loyal fanbase. Lenovo is also getting into the mix with the Motorola acquisition, not to mention its upcoming online-focused Shenqi division.
      • Higher price tier competition. More vendors like Huawei, Lenovo, and even Xiaomi are trying to push higher into the mid to high-end segment.
      • Non-traditional channel strategies. Reduced operator subsidies mean that vendors will further expand channels into more vendor-branded retail shops, direct online sales, and eTailers instead. In particular, they are trying to save on the cost that they had to pay to the traditional dealers/distributors in the past.
      • Expansion into overseas markets. With the market in China slowing down, Chinese vendors will focus on increasing their presence in India as well as more Southeast Asia countries in 2015.

      “To successfully combat local players overseas, Chinese vendors will need to focus on channel relationships and localized marketing strategies,” said Tay Xiaohan, Senior Market Analyst with IDC Asia/Pacific’s Client Devices team. “Most of the market’s growth will come from sub-US$150 phones as feature phone users switch to low-cost smartphones.” Xiaohan adds that the slowdown in China will increase pressure on manufacturers to seek growth in India and Southeast Asia, where striking partnerships with distributors will prove critical.

      Which may very well mean that after Apple’s latest meteoric rise to the top spot (aided by billions in marketing spend), it may be all downhill from here for the Cupertino company, unless the company that Steve Jobs built and which has since become a financial engineering juggernaut without any clear blockbuster product (sorry Apple watch fanatics, it’s a dud), will have to return to its roots of producing brilliant products or soon the Chinese growth avenue will be shut just as fast as it opened.

      Finally, if there is one thing that can push further smartphone, er, penetration it is this.



    • White House Denies It Fabricated bin Laden Killing, Says Hersh Report "Riddled With Inaccuracies And Falsehoods"

      If anyone expected the Obama administration to admit that, as Seymour Hersch alleged last night, it had openly lied and fabricated the entire account of Osama bin Laden killing – perhaps the most defining narrative of Obama’s entire first term, we have some bad news: it won’t.

      Instead, as AP reports, the White House has decided to continue its reality challenged ways and has dismissed as “untrue” Hersh’s entire 10K plus word report on what really happened in Abbattobad.

      It gets better: according to that paragon of honesty, White House spokesman, Josh Earnest, Hersh’s piece in the London Review of Books is “riddled with inaccuracies and outright falsehoods.”

      It was not immediately clear if Earnest referred the press corp to some fabricated YouTube clip as evidence it wasn’t lying about lying.

      Earnest noted former CIA deputy director Michael Morell’s reaction to the article — that he stopped reading because every sentence was wrong.

      As previously reported, Hersh attributed his information to a retired general of the Pakistani intelligence service and several unidentified sources in the U.S. and Pakistan. He says bin Laden was secretly kept as a prisoner by the Pakistanis and that they helped the U.S. stage the raid on his compound.

      Among the many allegations of Hersh’s report are that:

      • bin Laden had been a prisoner of the Pakistan intelligence at the Abbottabad compound since 2006 (something revealed previously in “Osama bin Laden ‘protected by Pakistan in return for Saudi cash“)
      • that the two most senior Pakistani military leaders knew of the raid in advance and had made sure that the two helicopters delivering the Seals to Abbottabad could cross Pakistani airspace without triggering any alarms;
      • that the CIA did not learn of bin Laden’s whereabouts by tracking his couriers, as the White House has claimed since May 2011, but from a former senior Pakistani intelligence officer who betrayed the secret in return for much of the $25 million reward offered by the US,
      • and that, while Obama did order the raid and the Seal team did carry it out, many other aspects of the administration’s account were false.

      The Obama administration says the Pakistanis didn’t know about the raid in advance. It wasn’t immediately clear if it had rejected all the other claims.

      For those who missed it, the full Hersh report can be found here.



    • How The US Military Is Paying NFL Teams Millions To "Honor the Troops" At Sporting Events

      Submitted by Mike Krieger via Liberty Blitzkrieg blog,

      When the Jets paused to honor soldiers of the New Jersey Army National Guard at home games during the past four years, it was more than a heartfelt salute to the military — it was also worth a good stack of taxpayer money, records show.

       

      The Department of Defense and the Jersey Guard paid the Jets a total of $377,000 from 2011 to 2014 for the salutes and other advertising, according to federal contracts. Overall, the Defense Department has paid 14 NFL teams $5.4 million during that time, of which $5.3 million was paid by the National Guard to 11 teams under similar contracts.

       

      The agreement includes the Hometown Hero segment, in which the Jets feature a soldier or two on the big screen, announce their names and ask the crowd to thank them for their service. The soldiers and three friends also get seats in the Coaches Club for the game.

       

      – From the New Jersey Star Ledger article: Jets’ Salutes Honor N.J. National Guard but Cost Taxpayer

      Like everything else in America, faux patriotism is also for sale.

       

      I’ve written previously about how uncomfortable the superficial “honor the troops” displays at sporting events makes me feel. In the post, “Stop Thanking Me for My Service” – Former U.S. Army Ranger Blasts American Foreign Policy and The Corporate State, I noted:

      I have to admit, whenever I find myself in the midst of a large public gathering (which fortunately isn’t that often), and the token veteran or two is called out in front of the masses to “honor” I immediately begin to cringe as a result of a massive internal conflict. On the one hand, I recognize that the veteran(s) being honored is most likely a decent human being. Either poor or extraordinarily brainwashed, the man or woman paraded in front of the crowd is nothing more than a pawn. Even if their spouse hasn’t left them; even if whatever conflict they were involved in didn’t result in a permanent disability or post traumatic stress disorder, this person has been used and abused, and thirty seconds of cheering in between ravenous bites out of a footlong hotdog from a drunk and apathetic crowd isn’t going to change that. I don’t harbor negative sentiments toward the veteran.

       

      On the other hand, the entire spectacle makes me sick. I refuse to participate in the superficial charade for many reasons, but the primary one is that I don’t want to play any part in the crowd’s insatiable imbecility. It’s the stupidity and ignorance of the masses that the corporate-state preys upon, and that’s precisely what’s on full display at these tired and phony imperialist celebrations.

      Of course, it’s not just me that finds these scenes hard to stomach. Many troops have come forward and expressed the exact same sentiment. For example, as Rory Fanning, who served in Afghanistan with the 2nd Army Ranger Battalion noted:

      These two ceremonies seemed to catch a particular mood (reflected in so many similar, if more up-to-date versions of the same). They might have benefited from a little “awareness raising” when it came to what the American military has actually been doing these last years, not to say decades, beyond our borders. They certainly summed up much of the frustration I was feeling with the Concert for Valor. Plenty of thank yous, for sure, but no history when it came to what the thanks were being offered for in, say, Iraq or Afghanistan, no statistics on taxpayer dollars spent or where they went, or on innocent lives lost and why.

       

      Will the “Concert for Valor” mention the trillions of dollars rung up terrorizing Muslim countries for oil, the ratcheting up of the police and surveillance state in this country since 9/11, the hundreds of thousands of lives lost thanks to the wars of George W. Bush and Barack Obama? Is anyone going to dedicate a song to Chelsea Manning, or John Kiriakou, or Edward Snowden – two of them languishing in prison and one in exile — for their service to the American people? Will the Concert for Valor raise anyone’s awareness when it comes to the fact that, to this day, veterans lack proper medical attention, particularly for mental health issues, or that there is a veteran suicide every 80 minutes in this country? Let’s hope they find time in between drum solos, but myself, I’m not counting on it.

       

      We use the term hero in part because it makes us feel good and in part because it shuts soldiers up (which, believe me, makes the rest of us feel better). Labeled as a hero, it’s also hard to think twice about putting your weapons down. Thank yous to heroes discourage dissent, which is one reason military bureaucrats feed off the term.

      Very well said, and now we learn that these spectacles are often even more phony than originally suspected. NFL teams are being paid millions of dollars to host them. From the New Jersey Star Ledger:

      TRENTON — When the Jets paused to honor soldiers of the New Jersey Army National Guard at home games during the past four years, it was more than a heartfelt salute to the military — it was also worth a good stack of taxpayer money, records show.

       

      The Department of Defense and the Jersey Guard paid the Jets a total of $377,000 from 2011 to 2014 for the salutes and other advertising, according to federal contracts. Overall, the Defense Department has paid 14 NFL teams $5.4 million during that time, of which $5.3 million was paid by the National Guard to 11 teams under similar contracts.

       

      The agreement includes the Hometown Hero segment, in which the Jets feature a soldier or two on the big screen, announce their names and ask the crowd to thank them for their service. The soldiers and three friends also get seats in the Coaches Club for the game.

       

      Aside from the Hometown Heroes segment, the agreements also included advertising and marketing services, including a kickoff video message from the Guard, digital advertising on stadium screens, online advertising and meeting space for a meeting or events.

       

      Flake said there was nothing wrong with the Guard using football games to recruit soldiers. The problem, he said, was spending taxpayer money on a program that, on its face, appeared to be a generous gesture by a football team.

      The Daily News also covered this story, with a choice line from one of the most authoritarian members of Congress, Peter King. A man so completely insane, he makes neocons blush. He defended the spending of taxpayer money on superficial, faux patriotism:

      Rep. Pete King (R-L.I.) also said “it’s money well spent.”

       

      “People watching the NFL are generally inclined to be pro-military,” King told The News. “As far as the Jets, in addition to whatever money they’ve gotten from the (Department of Defense), I do know they are very actively engaged with veterans. The Jets do far more on balance than they get paid for.”

      Football and fake patriotism. The new American Dream.



    • The Last Time This Happened, Chinese Stocks Crashed

      Chinese stocks are the most expensive relative to bonds in almost six years. For the first time since June 2009, Bloomberg notes, the earnings yield on the Shanghai Composite Index has dropped below the yield on top-rated corporate debt… and just like in now, stocks rallied 100% in the preceding year before plunging over 20% in the next month, and further still in the ensuing months. Already we are seeing Chinese stocks faltering – with a disappointying post-rate-cut move – which leads on analysts to note, “the market will enter a correction phase, and it will be very volatile,” and comments by officials have raised concerns that PBOC will “quickly erode its credibility.”

       

       

      As Bloomberg reports,

      The official People’s Daily said on its website Monday the bull market doesn’t just mean one-way gains, adding that the many people who have bought stocks using borrowed money may be hurt by a small correction.

       

      Last week’s pullback doesn’t mark the end of the rally and could instead help the market enter a “slow bull” mode advocated by regulators, the official Xinhua News Agency said in a commentary on its website.

       

      “The regulator must remember its primary role is to regulate and monitor market risks and it is not a strategist,” Hong said. “Its frequent switches between bullish when the market crashes and cautious when the market surges will quickly erode its credibility.”

      *  *  *



    • America's Vanishing Worker: The Truth Behind The "Recovery" Propaganda

      The biggest paradox of the so-called US recovery is that in the same report in which the US Department of Labor reported that the US unemployment has dropped to a depression-low 5.4%, a level suggesting near zero “slack” in the labor force, the BLS also indicated that the number of people not in the labor force rose to a fresh all time high of 93.2 million, keeping the participation rate at a level first seen in 1978.

       

      How does one make sense of this glaring contradiction and paradoxical data, which one one hand suggest the recovery is fully in place, while on the other screams depression?

      For the answer we go to the WSJ’s report on the curious case of America’s vanishing worker.

      To be sure, this “curious case” covers nothing new for regular Zero Hedge readers, but may explain to casual observers how it is possible that America’s labor metrics have devolved to such a Schrodingerian state in which the US labor market is both alive and dead, depending on whose propaganda one observes.

      For the answer, the WSJ tracks the career, or rather lack thereof, of Denny Ryder of Decatur, Illinois, 47 years old, who is one of hundreds of thousands of (former) employees in the industrial Midwest who has been forced to move away, retire or give up on finding a job. As a result, the unemployment rate in this has fallen even as Denny is no closer to being able to provide for his family.

      As the WSJ reports, “by one key gauge of economic health, this industrial city three hours south of Chicago is well on the way to recovery. Hit hard by the recession, when its unemployment rate topped 14%, Decatur over the past year has seen one of the swiftest declines in joblessness in the country, with the rate dropping to 7% in March from 10.2% a year earlier.”

      The problem: it’s nothing but a statistical mirage, a lie.

      [L]ook closer, and this city of 75,000 resembles many communities across the industrial Midwest, where the unemployment rate is falling fast in part because workers are disappearing: moving away, retiring or no longer looking for a job.

       

      “In cases like that, the unemployment rate makes things look better than they really are,” said Karl Kuykendall, U.S. regional economist at IHS Global Insight. In terms of overall economic growth, he said, “a decline in population and workforce is devastating.”

       

      [T]he falling unemployment rate doesn’t tell the full story of a recovery that remains uneven nearly six years after the recession ended. Among the 20 metropolitan areas where unemployment fell by at least 2.7 percentage points in the past year, 16 also saw their workforces shrink over the same period, according to Labor Department data. Half of those were in Michigan or Illinois, including Detroit, Decatur, Flint, Mich., and Rockford, Ill.

       

      Most places saw at least some hiring and job creation. In Decatur, though, payrolls fell over the past year due to layoffs, attrition, transfers or other causes.

      In other words, anyone daring to look closer behind the thin facade of the “recovery” uncovers a rotting, collapsing core: an economy not only not flourishing, but shrinking even as it creates the false impression of growth.

      Behold the recovery “mirage” in four simple charts:

      Back to Denny Ryder, who wasn’t looking to leave Decatur, where he was born and raised. But he was laid off from a Caterpillar Inc. plant here in late 2013 as the heavy-equipment maker faced a slowdown in demand from mining companies.

      What happens next is a story familiar to millions of Americans who not only have no weekly paycheck, but whose plight no longer is even accounted for in the Labor department’s monthly assessment of US economic health.

      So Mr. Ryder and his wife relocated to Winston-Salem, N.C., last year where he found work at a Caterpillar contractor. While Mr. Ryder was confident he could find a job in Decatur, he didn’t feel it would match the wages and benefits at Caterpillar, where he worked for 19 years. “I probably could have lost a lot of money and found a job in Decatur,” said Mr. Ryder, who has taken to life in North Carolina, from enjoying the hills to swimming in the ocean for the first time.

      “Probably.” And perhaps, not. That’s the magic of proving a negative: it’s impossible which is why economists do it all the time.

      What one can prove looking at the data, is that any suggestion of a wholesale economic recovery is nothing but Goebbelsian propaganda.

      The fitful recovery in Decatur has laid bare challenges building for decades in many places in the Midwest and Northeast. Populations are shrinking, and the workforce is getting older. A historical reliance on manufacturing has hurt aging industrial cities as the U.S. economy continues its shift to service jobs. And the recession expanded the share of the working-age population who don’t have a job and aren’t looking for one.

       

      In the Decatur area, the Labor Department’s rough estimates show falling unemployment, a shrinking labor force and declining nonfarm payrolls. But the data don’t explain why the workforce is smaller and where the unemployed are going.

       

      There are clues, such as the lunch crowd at the Good Samaritan Inn, a soup kitchen where the Rev. Stacey Brohard is executive director. He said many people lack skills or face other barriers to jobs and have given up on finding work. The recession only increased their ranks, he said.

      You mean soaring soup lines aren’t counted as employed by the BLS? How is that possible when hookers and drug dealers somehow contribute to GDP in the UK, Spain and Italy? Surely someone at the BLS will promptly fix this oversight.

      But it’s not just the Labor department’s blatant fabrication of a recovery narrative: what is worse is that America’s aging workers have been left to fend for themselves even as their absence from any official counts is meant to signify America’s fake economic renaissance.

      Decatur’s population skews older—the metro area’s median age was 39.7 in 2013, compared with 37.5 for the U.S. as a whole. Some older workers were laid off or took early retirement during the downturn but remained in the labor force, looking for work. Now, with the stock market near all-time highs, their portfolios look healthier and they feel more comfortable retiring for good, said Ron Payne, a labor market economist at the Illinois Department of Employment Security.

       

      Decatur faces a dual challenge: getting older workers retrained so they can extend their careers, and keeping younger workers from moving away. Richland Community College increasingly is concentrating on people over 50 years old—many of whom haven’t been in a classroom in decades.

      And it’s doing a damn good job: as we also showed last week, the number of Americans 55 and older who do have a job has never been higher. Surely the basis of any solid recovery.

      As for the younger ones, why they too are in luck: “City officials are courting young professionals with moves such as banning trucks from downtown, promoting outdoor dining and developing recreational opportunities around Lake Decatur.” Speaking of outdoor dining, these are precisely the jobs the young end up getting because if there is one thing America has a record of in addition to jobs for old workers, it is a record number of waiter and bartender jobs as well.

      It’s not all bad:

      Since the recession, the city has built a new water tower, replaced sewer lines and cut the ribbon on a new freight-rail terminal—all with the goal of retaining industrial employers and attracting new ones.

       

      “First, it’s recovery, which is the phase we’re probably still in right now, but expansion eventually follows that,” said Ryan McCrady, president of city’s economic-development corporation.

      Which is also known as “hope” which always dies last. Sadly, for the vast majority of Americans “hope” is all they have left.

      As for the 1% of US society which has reaped the benefits of 7 years of ZIRP and QE, there we will admit: the recovery is all too real.



    • Ron Paul: NSA Spying Ruled Illegal, But Will Congress Save the Program Anyway?

      Submitted by Ron Paul via The Ron Paul Institute for Peace & Prosperity,

      This week the Sixth Circuit Court of Appeals ruled that the NSA’s metadata collection program was not authorized in US law. The PATRIOT Act, under which the program began, was too vague, the court found. But the truth is the Act was intended to be vague so that the government could interpret it in the broadest possible way.

      But this is really more of a technicality, because illegality and unconstitutionality are really two very different things. Even if Congress had explicitly authorized the government to collect our phone records, that law would still be unconstitutional because the Constitution does not grant government the power to access our personal information without a valid search warrant.

      Even though the court found the NSA program illegal, it did not demand that the government stop collecting our information in this manner. Instead, the court kicked the ball back in Congress’ court, as these provisions of the PATRIOT Act are set to expire at the end of the month and the Appeals Court decided to let Congress decide how to re-authorize this spying program.

      Unfortunately, this is where there is not much to cheer. If past practice is any lesson, Congress will wait until the spying program is about to expire and then in a panic try to frighten Americans into accepting more intrusions on their privacy. Senate Majority Leader Mitch McConnell has already put forth a new bill as a stop-gap measure to allow time for a fuller debate on the issue. His stop-gap? A five year re-authorization with no changes to the current program!

      The main reform bill being floated, the FREEDOM Act, is little better. Pretending to be a step in the right direction, the FREEDOM Act may actually be worse for our privacy and liberties than the PATRIOT Act!

      One silver lining in the court decision is that it should exonerate Ed Snowden, who risked it all to expose what the courts have now found was illegal US government activity. That is the definition of a whistleblower. Shouldn’t he be welcomed back home as a hero instead of being threatened with treason charges? We shouldn’t hold our breath!

      This week Snowden addressed a conference in Melbourne, Australia, informing citizens that the Australian government watches all its citizens “all the time.” Australia’s program allows the government to “collect everyone’s communications in advance of criminal suspicion,” he told the conference. That means the government is no longer in the business of prosecuting crimes, but instead is collecting information in case crimes someday occur.

      How is it that the Australian government can collect and track “pre-crime” information on its citizens? Last month Australia passed a law requiring telecommunications companies to retain metadata information on their customers for two years.

      Why do Australia’s oppressive laws matter to us? Because the NSA “reform” legislation before Congress, the FREEDOM Act, does exactly what the Australian law does: it mandates that US telecommunications companies retain their customers’ metadata information so that the NSA can access the information as it wishes.

      Some argue that this metadata information is harmless and that civil libertarians are over-reacting. But, as Ed Snowden told the Melbourne conference, “under these mandatory metadata laws you can immediately see who journalists are contacting, from which you can derive who their sources are.”

      This one example of what happens when the government forces corporations to assist it in spying on the people should be a red flag. How can an independent media exist in the US if the government knows exactly whom journalists contact for information? It would be the end of any future whistleblowers.

      The only reform of the PATRIOT Act is a total repeal. Accept nothing less.



    • The Government's Career Suggestion For Massively Indebted College Grads: Become Farmers

      Last week, we profiled this year’s class of college seniors and congratulated them on being the most heavily-indebted graduating class in the history of US higher education. These students will leave school carrying an average balance of more than $35,000. Of course, one can’t place the blame for this deplorable state of affairs entirely on the shoulders of the students because even as easy access to federal education loans creates the conditions under which students may be tempted to take on more debt than they actually need (because you have to have a MacBook and an iPad), thus borrowing from the future to pay for what, in many cases, are degrees that are not by any means guaranteed to lead to high-paying, full-time employment, the inexorable rise in tuition rates deserves its fair share of the blame as well. 

      Fortunately for the class of 2015, there’s a way out and it’s called Income-Based Repayment. These plans allow for the discharge of federal education loans after 300 “eligible” payments, a very convenient program for those who, after college, do not make enough discretionary income to service their debt. For these borrowers, a zero payment counts as an “eligible” payment, creating a scenario whereby it is technically possible to make no payments for 25 years and have the debt completely written off at the expense of the US taxpayer. The real beauty of this is that just as we said about student debt discharge in bankruptcy, once colleges and universities know they can charge anything for tuition, room and board because the debt funding it will be socialized and ultimately “forgiven”, expect the “up and to the right” tutition rate chart to go vertical.

      In any event, total debt forgiveness is a nice fallback plan in today’s economy because as researchers from Georgetown discovered when they looked at the best and worst (in terms of average annual salaries) college majors, there are quite a few disciplines that promise to pay graduates less than the median annual income. And while the takeaway from the Georgetown study was that there’s still money to be made in petroleum engineering, the US government has another modest suggestion for America’s proud graduates: become farmers. 

      From the USDA:

      One of the Best Fields for New College Graduates? Agriculture.

       

      Nearly 60,000 High-Skilled Agriculture Job Openings Expected Annually in U.S., Yet Only 35,000 Graduates Available to Fill Them

       

      Agriculture Secretary Tom Vilsack today announced a new report showing tremendous demand for recent college graduates with a degree in agricultural programs with an estimated 57,900 high-skilled job openings annually in the food, agriculture, renewable natural resources, and environment fields in the United States. According to an employment outlook report released today by USDA’s National Institute of Food and Agriculture (NIFA) and Purdue University, there is an average of 35,400 new U.S. graduates with a bachelor’s degree or higher in agriculture related fields, 22,500 short of the jobs available annually.

       

      “There is incredible opportunity for highly-skilled jobs in agriculture,” said Secretary Vilsack. 

       

      “Those receiving degrees in agricultural fields can expect to have ample career opportunities. Not only will those who study agriculture be likely to get well-paying jobs upon graduation, they will also have the satisfaction of working in a field that addresses some of the world’s most pressing challenges. These jobs will only become more important as we continue to develop solutions to feed more than 9 billion people by 2050.

      There you have it. And while we imagine there aren’t that many aspiring college grads out there who envisioned a life on the farm, it might not be a bad option considering occupations like Early Childhood Education all but guarantee your status as a “low-income” American and considering that, unless you’re lucky enough to belong to the 17% of non-farm workers who the BLS classifies as “supervisors,” you will likey find yourself laboring under non-existent wage growth in perpetuity. 

      *  *  *

      And meanwhile, at Columbia:

      As her May 19 commencement date looms, Yana Dey has begun considering skipping her own graduation.

       

      It’s not that she wants to miss it. She’s proud of the work that went into fulfilling the requirements for a master’s degree from Columbia University’s Teachers College.

       

      What’s holding her back is the $62 cost of the cap and gown she’s required to wear to walk at graduation. “I started to worry, because I just don’t have any extra money to spend right now,” says Dey, who began posting on Facebook groups in May to try to borrow past graduates’ regalia. “I honestly thought about not going.”

       

      Dey isn’t alone. The issue garnered increasing attention on Facebook as students posted a flurry of requests—“Anyone have a 5’11” appropriate gown to loan out?”—to borrow garb from recent graduates. 

      We can only hope Ms. Dey majored in agriculture or petroleum engineering.



    • The ECB is Attempting to Corner the Bond Market… Buckle Up

       

      In 2012, during the depth of the EU banking crisis which nearly took the entire EU financial system down, Mario Draghi stated that he would do “whatever it takes” to hold the EU together.

       

      Anyone paying attention knew that this was a bluff. True, the ECB and EU leaders had already defied if not broken every condition of the Maastricht Treaty and the Schengen Treaty (the legislation that formed the EU proper). However, even to the most cynical analyst, Mario Draghi’s claim was pushing the envelope a little too hard.

       

      Implementing capital controls and border controls limit freedom, but from the perspective of monetary policy, they’re secondary items. The REAL power is that of the printing press.

       

      This is how Draghi’s promise to save the EU was different from every other action: it addressed the structure of the EU in its most critical component, namely the control of the currency.

       

      It took the EU two years to cobble together its reasoning for how something that went completely against the Maastricht Treaty would be permitted. As usual it was the Germans (the ultimate holders of the purse strings) who gave the “OK.”

       

      Now given the green light, Draghi has embarked upon a €60 billion a month QE program. Somehow this is meant to:

       

      1)   Reboot a €46 TRILLION banking system that is totally insolvent.

      2)   Generate lower interest rates when most EU-member sovereign bonds are at multi-century lows.

      3)   Bring the EU economy back to growth. 

       

      The whole idea is absurd. But it does reveal one important thing: that we are much closer to the end of the Central Bank-fueled $100 trillion bond bubble than ever before.

       

      The bond market has tripled in size in the last 14 years. This has been fueled by the issuance of debt at an astounding pace as Governments attempted to paper over the massive decline in living standards plaguing the West.

       

      Today, the bond bubble is over $100 trillion in size. When you include derivatives based on interest rates (bonds) it’s over $555 trillion.

       

      To put this into perspective, the CDS market which nearly took down the financial system in 2008 was a mere $50-$60 trillion in size. So the bond bubble is literally 10X this in size and scope.

      The derivatives story is key here, because all of those $555 trillion in trades are backstopped by sovereign bonds (Japanese bonds, German Bunds, US Treasuries, etc.).  These are the very bonds that Central Banks have been BUYING over the last five years (thereby shrinking the amount available to the banks to backstop those trades).

       

      Put another way, the amount of high quality collateral backstopping this mess has shrunken dramatically. On top of this, traders have been piling into sovereign bonds in anticipation of various QE programs, forcing yields to multi-decade if not multi-century lows.

       

      Currently over HALF of ALL Government bonds in the world yield less than 1%. Over $5 trillion in government debt has negative yields:

       

       

      This is not only unsustainable… it is a clear sign of a bubble. A bubble that when it bursts when involve over $555 trillion worth of trades imploding.

       

      If you’ve yet to take action to prepare for the second round of the financial crisis, we offer a FREE investment report Financial Crisis "Round Two" Survival Guide that outlines easy, simple to follow strategies you can use to not only protect your portfolio from a market downturn, but actually produce profits.

       

      You can pick up a FREE copy at:

       

      http://www.phoenixcapitalmarketing.com/roundtwo.html

       

       

      Best Regards

       

      Phoenix Capital Research

       

       

       



    Digest powered by RSS Digest

    5 Essential Supplements For Protecting Your DNA

    3d render of a DNA spirals

    Between GMO’s, hormone disrupting chemicals, and radioactive contamination, modern life has turned into a nightmare for human health. Every day your DNA is being bombarded with substances that your body was never capable of processing. What’s worse is that it’s nearly impossible to avoid these toxins. Unless you live your life in a bubble, you will be exposed to them one way or another.

    Fortunately, you can still protect yourself with the right nutrition. Even though these substances are capable of damaging and mutating your cells, your body has some pretty impressive defense mechanisms, so long as you provide it with the right nutrients. Granted, just about every vitamin and mineral can prevent a whole host of diseases, but there are several nutrients that are responsible for the most healing. Below, are the 5 most important supplements for protecting and repairing your DNA.

    Zinc Gluconate

    zinc

    It’s estimated that 12% of Americans don’t get enough zinc, which rises to 35% among the elderly. A whopping 2 billion people around the world are deficient. Which is a shame, because this one mineral plays a pretty big role in preventing cancer. Studies have shown that zinc deficiency causes oxidative stress and impairs DNA repair, so if you want your cells to replicate properly, make sure you receive plenty of this mineral.

    The best natural sources of zinc include beef, oysters, spinach, and pumpkin seeds. If you think a supplement is in order, try Zinc Gluconate. It’s not the best form of zinc (of which there are many) but it is the best you can get for the price. Just don’t over do it, since too much zinc can inhibit the uptake of other nutrients. Usually 50 mg is more than enough.

    B Vitamins

    b vitamins

    Together, vitamins B3, B6, and B12 all work together to prevent genetic mutation. While most people in the Western world receive plenty of these nutrients in their diets, stress tends to deplete them. Not only do these B vitamins prevent DNA damage, numerous studies have shown that they can actually reverse some of that damage as well.

    Natural sources of B vitamins are abundant, and can be found in multiple food groups. However, B12 in particular is pretty much impossible to find in produce, so as a rule of thumb you can always get plenty of B vitamins by eating seafood, eggs, and beef. Oysters and beef liver both have astronomical levels of B12. If you feel that your diet is lacking in these nutrients (especially given the price of meat products) there are some very effective supplements that contain all eight B vitamins.

    Magnesium Glycinate

    magnesium

     

    Despite being one of the most abundant minerals on Earth, there is a widespread epidemic of magnesium deficiency in America. This mineral has an effect on nearly every function in the human body, but among the most important is its role in the stabilization and replication of your cells and DNA. There are dozens of symptoms related to magnesium deficiency, and since it’s very difficult to test for it, you may be hurting from a deficiency and not even know it.

    Foods that contain large amounts of magnesium include spinach, chard, pumpkin seeds, yogurt, and almonds. But even if you consume these foods, you might still be lacking. Magnesium Glycinate provides good absorption, and unlike the more common Magnesium Citrate or Milk of Magnesia, it doesn’t have laxative properties.

    Astaxanthin

    astaxanthin

    This one is unique in this list for not being an essential nutrient, but it’s worth mentioning due to its powerful effects. Numerous studies have shown that it may be the most powerful antioxidant known to man. In terms of scavenging free radicals, it is significantly more potent than vitamin C,  vitamin E, and beta-Carotene.

    A study conducted on rats in 2011 found that it may be able to prevent damage from gamma radiation, which you might recognize as the most lethal kind of radiation that is emitted from nuclear weapons. So if you’re prepping for the big one do some research, and if you’re thoroughly convinced, pick up some supplements. Just make sure it is the natural form of astaxanthin and not the artificial kind that is used in food dyes.

    Vitamin D3

    vitamin d

    Of all the nutrients involved in the health of your DNA, few are as important as vitamin D. Research suggests that vitamin D plays a role in well over 200 genes, and 2,776 binding sites have been found throughout our genome. In fact, the lack of vitamin D may play a role in most cancers. A study conducted in 2011 found that 75% of cancer patients have a vitamin D deficiency, and the lowest levels were related to the more advanced stages of cancer. It also helps prevent autoimmune disease, promotes bone health, and is an essential part of your overall immune system.

    If you’re looking for a natural food source, vitamin D can be found in fish, beef, cheese, and eggs, although the amount you can receive from exposure to sunlight will dwarf those sources. However, for those of us who work inside or live in cold northern regions, vitamin D3 supplementation would be a good idea.